FORDSHOP MANUAL

MODELS8000—8600—8700—9000—9600—9700—TW-10—TW-20—TW-30

These Ford tractors are equipped with a six-cylinder diesel engine. The 9000 series, TW-20 andTW-30 modeis engines are equipped with a turbocharger and due to increased power output, severaicomponents on these modeis have been strengthened in comparison to the 8000 series and TW-10modeis. An eight-speed gear type transmission and disc type ciutch is standard on aii models. ADual Power planetary gear assembly which provides under-drive ratios in ail transmission speeds isstandard on TW-30 modeis and avaiiabie for ail other modeis.

identification numbers pertaining to Modeis 8000, 8600, 9000 and 9600 are iocated on a piate insidethe tool box cover.

Numbers pertaining to Modeis 8700 and 9700 are located on a piate mounted on the underside ofthe radiator filier cap access door.

Numbers pertaining to Models TW-10 and TW-20 are on a piate located above the right front cornerof the radiator and are accessible after removing the right front grill panel.

Numbers pertaining to Modei TW-30 are on a plate iocated between the radiator and front fuel tani<;they are accessibie by siiding the right front griii panei forward.

INDEX (By Starting Paragraph)BRAKESAdjustment .207,210Discs, Renew 211Fluid and Bleeding 208,210AMaster Cylinder 209Power Brake Valve 210BWheel Cylinders 211

CAB. .265

CLUTCH, ENGINEOverhaul 165Pedal (Free Play) Adjustment 160,161Remove & Reinstall 164

CLUTCH, POWER TAKE-OFF 212

COOLING SYSTEMEngine Oil Cooler 155Fan Assembly 156Pressure Cap 151Radiator 152Thermostat 151Water Pump I53

DIESEL FUEL SYSTEMBleeding 114A, 115AFilters .114^ II5Fuel Injectir Pump 125Injectors 116Troubleshooting 105

DIFFERENTIALDifferential Lock 198Overhaul 201Remove & Reinstall 199

DUAL POWERControl Valve I73Linkage Adjustment 169Overhaul 171Remove & Reinstall 170

ELECTRICAL SYSTEMAlternator 158Generator 157Regulator, Alternator 158Regulator, Generator 157Starting Motor 159Wiring Diagrams See Figs. 128,130,132

ENGINEAssembly, R&R 76Cam Followers 83Camshaft 91Connecting Rod Bearings 97Crankshaft and Bearings 98Crankshaft Oil Seals 99Cylinder Head 78Cylinders 94Flywheel, R&R lOlMain Bearings 98Oil Cooler 155Oil Pan 102Oil Pump 103,104Pistons 94Piston Pins 96Piston Rings 93Piston & Rod Removal 92Rocker Arms 85Tappets .83Timing Gear Cover 86Timing Gears 87Valve Adjustment 84Valve Guides and Seats 80Valve Springs 81Valve Stem Seals 80

FINAL DRIVE GEARS 206

INDEX CONT.FRONT AXLE [Except Front Wheel Drive]Axle Main (Center) Member 3.31Front Support (Pedestal) 6.33Pivot Pins .3,31Steering Spindles 2,30Tie Rods And Toe-in 4, 32

FRONT WHEEL DRIVEAxle Main (Center) Member 45Axle Shafts 49Differential And Bevel Gears 52Front Support 56Pivot Pins 45Steering Knuckles 50Tie Rods And Toe-in 45ATransfer Box 59Wheel Hub And Planetary Carrier 46

HYDRAULIC LIFT SYSTEMAdjustments 230Filters 227Flow Control Valve 243Fluid 226Lift Cover Assembly, R&R 245Lift Cylinder 252Lift Shaft (Rockshaft) 253Linkage 254,257Pressure Relief Valve, Overhaul 241, 242Pump 233Relief Pressure, Adjust 229Remote Control Valves 258Torsion Bar 257Troubleshooting 228

INTERCOOLERFan 143Heat Exchanger 147

LOW PRESSURE OIL SYSTEMPumpRegulator Valve

POWER STEERINGBleed System 7,34Pump 11.36Reservoir " t 34Steering (Hydramotor) Gear Unit 13Steering (Ross) Gear Unit 19Steering Motor 22,38Troubleshooting ^

POWER TAKE-OFFAdjust Control Linkage 215Clutch 220,221Control Valve 220,221OutputShaft 219Pressure Test, Pto System 213Reduction Gears 217Troubleshooting 212

REAR AXLEAxle Housings 204Bearing Adjustment — 205Shaft, Remove & Reinstall 205

TRANSMISSIONAssembly, Remove & Reinstall 187Overhaul 1^1Shifter Mechanism 189,190

TRANSMISSION HANDBRAKE 196

TURBOCHARGEROverhaul 138,140Remove & Reinstall 137

CONDENSED SERVICE DATA

8000GENERAL 8600,8700Torque RecommendationsEngine make OwnNo. of Cylinders 6Bore, Inches 4.4

troke. Inches 4.4Displacement, Cubic Inches 401Compression Ratio 16.5:1Pistons Removed From AboveMain Bearings, Number of 7Cylinder Sleeves NoneGenerator Make OwnAlternator Make

tarter Make OwnTurbocharger MakeInjection Pump Make SimmsForward Speeds 8

With Dual Power 16Reverse Speeds 2

With Dual Power 4

90009600,9700

Own6

4.44.4401

16.5:1Above

7NoneOwn

Own

Simms81624

TW-10 TW-20-See End of Shop Manual

Own . Own6 6

4.4 4.44.4 4.4401 401

16.3:1 15.6:1Above Above

7 :. 7None None

-Motorola-Own

-See Paragraph 134-Minimec

S1624

Own

Minimec81624

TW-30

Own6

4.44.4401

15.6:1Above

7None

Own

Minimec

INDEX CONT.FRONT AXLE [Except Front Wheel Drive]Axle Main (Center) Member 3.31Front Support (Pedestal) 6.33Pivot Pins .3,31Steering Spindles 2,30Tie Rods And Toe-in 4, 32

FRONT WHEEL DRIVEAxle Main (Center) Member 45Axle Shafts 49Differential And Bevel Gears 52Front Support 56Pivot Pins 45Steering Knuckles 50Tie Rods And Toe-in 45ATransfer Box 59Wheel Hub And Planetary Carrier 46

HYDRAULIC LIFT SYSTEMAdjustments 230Filters 227Flow Control Valve 243Fluid 226Lift Cover Assembly, R&R 245Lift Cylinder 252Lift Shaft (Rockshaft) 253Linkage 254,257Pressure Relief Valve, Overhaul 241, 242Pump 233Relief Pressure, Adjust 229Remote Control Valves 258Torsion Bar 257Troubleshooting 228

INTERCOOLERFan 143Heat Exchanger 147

LOW PRESSURE OIL SYSTEMPumpRegulator Valve

POWER STEERINGBleed System 7,34Pump 11.36Reservoir " t 34Steering (Hydramotor) Gear Unit 13Steering (Ross) Gear Unit 19Steering Motor 22,38Troubleshooting ^

POWER TAKE-OFFAdjust Control Linkage 215Clutch 220,221Control Valve 220,221OutputShaft 219Pressure Test, Pto System 213Reduction Gears 217Troubleshooting 212

REAR AXLEAxle Housings 204Bearing Adjustment — 205Shaft, Remove & Reinstall 205

TRANSMISSIONAssembly, Remove & Reinstall 187Overhaul 1^1Shifter Mechanism 189,190

TRANSMISSION HANDBRAKE 196

TURBOCHARGEROverhaul 138,140Remove & Reinstall 137

CONDENSED SERVICE DATA

8000GENERAL 8600,8700Torque RecommendationsEngine make OwnNo. of Cylinders 6Bore, Inches 4.4

troke. Inches 4.4Displacement, Cubic Inches 401Compression Ratio 16.5:1Pistons Removed From AboveMain Bearings, Number of 7Cylinder Sleeves NoneGenerator Make OwnAlternator Make

tarter Make OwnTurbocharger MakeInjection Pump Make SimmsForward Speeds 8

With Dual Power 16Reverse Speeds 2

With Dual Power 4

90009600,9700

Own6

4.44.4401

16.5:1Above

7NoneOwn

Own

Simms81624

TW-10 TW-20-See End of Shop Manual

Own . Own6 6

4.4 4.44.4 4.4401 401

16.3:1 15.6:1Above Above

7 :. 7None None

-Motorola-Own

-See Paragraph 134-Minimec

S1624

Own

Minimec81624

TW-30

Own6

4.44.4401

15.6:1Above

7None

Own

Minimec

Paragraph 1 FORD

CONDENSED SERVICE DATA CONT.8000, 9000,

T F ? ^ - ^ 8600,8700 9600,9700 TW-10 TW-20. TW-30Firing Order 1-5-3-6-2-4Compression, Gage Lbs. at

Cranking Speed of 200 Rpm 380 480 380-480 300-400 275-375Maximum Allowable Variation

Between Cylinders, Psi 20 20 20 20Valve Tappet Gap, Intake, Hot 0.014-0 016 inch —Valve Tappet Gap, Exhaust,

0.017-0.019 inchEngine Low Idle Rpm .: 700-800 700-800 700-800 700-800Engme High Idle Rpm 2530-2580 2420-2470 2530-2580 2420-2470Engine Rpm at Rated Load 2300 2200 2300 2300Engine Rpm for 540 Pto Rpm 1900 *1900 1873 •1873Engine Rpm for 1000 Pto Rpm 1935 1935 1918 1918Injection Timing 23** BTDC —Battery Terminal Grounded p^g-•540 rpm pto shaft not available on 9000, TW 30 and some 9600 models.

SIZES - CAPACITIES -CLEARANCES [INCHES]Crankshaft Journal Diameter See Paragraph 98Crankpin Diameter _ See Paragraph 9 7 -Oamsnait Journal Diameter 2.3895-2.3905Piston Pin Diameter 1.4997-1.5000 1.6246-1.6251 * 1.4997-1.5000 1.6246-1.6251Valve Stem Diameter, Intake 0.3711-0.3718Valve Stem Diameter, Exhaust — 0.3701-0.3708 - — ^Main Bearing Running

Clearance ^ 0.002-0.0045 ~Rod Bearing Running Clearance,

Aluminum Bearings 0.0025-0.0046Copper Lead Bearings 0.0017-0 0038

Camshaft Bearing RunningClearance 0.001-0.003 ^

Crankshaft End Play — 0.004-0 008Camshaft End Play 0 001-0 007 —Piston Skirt Clearance See Paragraph 95 Cooling System, Quarts 18 19 20 20Crankcase, Quarts, Without

Filter Change 10 12 18 mWith FuU Flow Filter ^^

Change Only 12 14 20 MWith Both Filters Changed 13 (8000 only)

Rear Axle & Hydraulic Systems,

~ See Paragraph 19743 43 58 **100

Power Steering System, Quarts 4.2 4 2 3 o q Q**TW-20 fuel capacity is 58 gallons. ' *

FRONT SYSTEM AND STEERINGMODELS 8000—8600—9000—9600

WIDE ADJUSTABLE are interchangeable between row crop follows: Straighten tabs of locking platesFRONT AXLE and all purpose types. Refer to Figs. 2 and unbolt center steering arm (13—Fig.

„ , , , . , and 3 for center steering arm and tie rod 1) from steering motor shaft. SupportExploded view of row crop axle is installation. front end of tractor, unbolt front pivot

shown m Fig. 1; all purpose type is pin support (21) from front support andsimilar except center (mam) member is 1. R&R FRONT AXLE ASSEMBLY, roll axle assembly forward. Unbolt andreversed. All parts except center steer- To remove either the row crop or all remove rear pivot pin support (16).mg arm (13) and inner tie rod ends (12) purpose type front axle, proceed as Reinstall front axle by reversing

Paragraph 1 FORD

CONDENSED SERVICE DATA CONT.8000, 9000,

T F ? ^ - ^ 8600,8700 9600,9700 TW-10 TW-20. TW-30Firing Order 1-5-3-6-2-4Compression, Gage Lbs. at

Cranking Speed of 200 Rpm 380 480 380-480 300-400 275-375Maximum Allowable Variation

Between Cylinders, Psi 20 20 20 20Valve Tappet Gap, Intake, Hot 0.014-0 016 inch —Valve Tappet Gap, Exhaust,

0.017-0.019 inchEngine Low Idle Rpm .: 700-800 700-800 700-800 700-800Engme High Idle Rpm 2530-2580 2420-2470 2530-2580 2420-2470Engine Rpm at Rated Load 2300 2200 2300 2300Engine Rpm for 540 Pto Rpm 1900 *1900 1873 •1873Engine Rpm for 1000 Pto Rpm 1935 1935 1918 1918Injection Timing 23** BTDC —Battery Terminal Grounded p^g-•540 rpm pto shaft not available on 9000, TW 30 and some 9600 models.

SIZES - CAPACITIES -CLEARANCES [INCHES]Crankshaft Journal Diameter See Paragraph 98Crankpin Diameter _ See Paragraph 9 7 -Oamsnait Journal Diameter 2.3895-2.3905Piston Pin Diameter 1.4997-1.5000 1.6246-1.6251 * 1.4997-1.5000 1.6246-1.6251Valve Stem Diameter, Intake 0.3711-0.3718Valve Stem Diameter, Exhaust — 0.3701-0.3708 - — ^Main Bearing Running

Clearance ^ 0.002-0.0045 ~Rod Bearing Running Clearance,

Aluminum Bearings 0.0025-0.0046Copper Lead Bearings 0.0017-0 0038

Camshaft Bearing RunningClearance 0.001-0.003 ^

Crankshaft End Play — 0.004-0 008Camshaft End Play 0 001-0 007 —Piston Skirt Clearance See Paragraph 95 Cooling System, Quarts 18 19 20 20Crankcase, Quarts, Without

Filter Change 10 12 18 mWith FuU Flow Filter ^^

Change Only 12 14 20 MWith Both Filters Changed 13 (8000 only)

Rear Axle & Hydraulic Systems,

~ See Paragraph 19743 43 58 **100

Power Steering System, Quarts 4.2 4 2 3 o q Q**TW-20 fuel capacity is 58 gallons. ' *

FRONT SYSTEM AND STEERINGMODELS 8000—8600—9000—9600

WIDE ADJUSTABLE are interchangeable between row crop follows: Straighten tabs of locking platesFRONT AXLE and all purpose types. Refer to Figs. 2 and unbolt center steering arm (13—Fig.

„ , , , . , and 3 for center steering arm and tie rod 1) from steering motor shaft. SupportExploded view of row crop axle is installation. front end of tractor, unbolt front pivot

shown m Fig. 1; all purpose type is pin support (21) from front support andsimilar except center (mam) member is 1. R&R FRONT AXLE ASSEMBLY, roll axle assembly forward. Unbolt andreversed. All parts except center steer- To remove either the row crop or all remove rear pivot pin support (16).mg arm (13) and inner tie rod ends (12) purpose type front axle, proceed as Reinstall front axle by reversing

SHOP MANUAL

removal procedure, making sure athrust washer (17) is placed on eachpivot pin. Tighten pivot pin support andcenter steering arm cap screws to atorque of 180-220 ft.-lbs., then bendlocking plates against steering arm capscrew heads.

2. SPINDLE BUSHINGS. To renewspindle bushings, support front of trac-tor and remove front wheels. Removesteering arm clamp bolts on models soequipped, pull arms from spindles andremove Woodruff keys (8—Fig. 1). Onmodels equipped with spindles havingsplined end is shown in F'ig. 1, removeretaining nut (24) and pull steering armfrom spindle. Withdraw spindles down-ward out of axle extensions. Removeseals (7) and thrust bearing (3). Removethrust bearing spacers (2) if worn ordamaged. Drive bushings from axle ex-tensions and install new bushings usingpiloted drift or driver; bushings are pre-sized and should not require reaming ifcarefully installed. Be sure grease holesare aligned. Pack thrust bearings withgrease.

NOTE: Upper ends of early spindleswith a key were 1^^ inches in diameter

whereas late spindles with a key areapproximately 1-5/8 inches. Only thelarge diameter spindle is available. Ifrenewing small spindle, a itew largediameter steering arm must aiso beinstalled. Be sure correct size splndieseal is installed. Tighten steering armclamp bolts on models equipped withkeyed spindles to a torque of 135-165ft.-ibs. On models with splined spindles,tighten retaining nuts (24—Fig. 1) to atorque of 200-250 ft.-lbs. Stake spindlethreads to nut.

3. AXLE CENTER MEMBER, PIV-OT PINS AND BUSHINGS. To removeaxle center member (20—Fig. 1), sup-port front of tractor, remove clamp boltsfrom tie rods and unbolt axle extensionsfrom center member. Withdraw axleextensions with spindles and wheelsfrom center member and tie rod sleeves.Unbolt and remove center steering armwith tie rods. Support center memberand unbolt front pivot pin support. Movecenter member and front pivot forwarduntil clear of rear pivot pin and lower tofloor. Unbolt and remove rear pivot pinand support.

Pivot pins are integral parts of pivotpin supports; renew the pin and sup-

Paragraphs 2-4

port assembly if pin is excessively worn.Renew bushings (18) in center member ifmember is otherwise serviceable; bush-ings are pre-sized and should not requirereaming if carefully installed. Be suregrease holes are aligned and install plug(19) in bore through axle tube. Renewthrust washers (17) if worn.

Reinstall by reversing removal proce-dure. Tighten pivot pin support andcenter steering arm cap screws to atorque of 180-220 ft.-lbs., then bendlocking plates against steering arm capscrew heads. Tighten tie rod clamp boltsto a torque of 25-35 ft.-lbs. and checktoe-in as outlined in paragraph 4.

4. TIE RODS AND TOE-IN. Tie rodends are of the non-adjustable automo-tive type and procedure for renewingsame is evident. Tighten clamp bolts onouter tie rod ends to a torque of 25-35ft.-lbs. and tighten jam nut at inner endof tie rods to a torque of 100-125 ft.-lbs.

Toe-in on both row crop and all pur-pose models should be V4- to V2-inch.Position center steering arm at centerline of tractor as shown in Fig. 2 or Fig.3 before checking toe-in at spindleheight. If toe-in is not correct, remove

1. &1A. Spindle, R.H.2. Thrust spacer3. Thrust bearing4. Lower bushing5. Axle extension, R.H.3. Upper bushing7. Seal

8. Woodruff key9. & 9A. Steering arm

10. Tie rod ends, outer11. Tie rod tube12. Tie rod ends, inner13. Steering arm, center

14. Dust seals15. Steering arm, L.H.16. Rear pivot pin &

support17. Thrust washers18. Pivot pin bushings

19. Plug20. Axle center member21. Front pivot pin &

support22. Axle extension, L.H.23. Spindle, L.H.24. Nut

Fig. 2—When checking toe-in on row cropwide adjustable axle, be sure steering arm iscentered as shown. View is from top. Wheninstalling center steering arm, be sure steeringmotor is centered and instaii arm as shown.

iPtONT

Fig. 1—Expioded view of row crop type wide adjustabie front axle. All purpose type front axle issimitar except that center member (20) is reversed to provide shorter wheeibase. Note that iatermodeis are equipped with spindles (lA) and steering arms are retained by a nut as shown ininset. All parts except center steering arm {13) and inner tie-rod ends {12) are interchangeable be-

tween row crop and aii purpose types. Refer to Figs, 2 and 3 for center steering arm views.

Fig. 3—View showing position of aii purposetype center steering arm for checking toe-in.Note that center arm (6) and tie rod inner endsare different than those used on row crop front

end. View is from top.

Paragraphs 5-6

clamp bolts and loosen jam nuts on bothtie rods, then turn each tie rod sleeve anequal amount as necessary. Refer topreceding paragraph for tighteningtorques.

TRICYCLE FRONT SPINDLE

5. The dual wheel tricycle spindle isbolted directly to the power steeringmotor shaft; procedure for removing andinstalling spindle is obvious. Tightenspindle to steering motor shaft capscrews to a torque of 209-231 ft.-lbs.Spindle can be installed on steeringmotor shaft in one position only due tooffset bolt holes.

FRONT SUPPORT (PEDESTAL)

6. To remove front support, first

10

remove steering motor assembly asoutlined in paragraph 22. Remove widefront axle assembly as outlined inparagraph 1. Unbolt and remove sideplates from front support and trans-mission. Attach hoist to front support,then unbolt front support from enginecylinder block and oil pan; be careful notto lose shims on the two oil pan bolts andlabel shims for reinstallation, if samepedestal, oil pan and cylinder block areto be reinstalled.

If front support, oil pan, and/orengine cylinder block have been re-newed, it will be necessary to selectshim thickness for installing frontsupport as follows: Install the three boltsand one cap screw retaining frontsupport to cylinder block and tighten toa torque of 180-220 ft.-lbs. Install thetwo cap screws retaining front support

12

Fig. 4—View showing hy-drostatic power steeringsystem used on 8000 and9000 modeis and early 8600and 9600 models. Note thattube {9) from ieft end ofsteering motor (8) is con-nected to iower port onfront side of Hydramotorsteering unit {11) and isconnected by iong fitting tooffset connecting nuts.Pressure tube (5) frompump is connected to ieftside port of Hydramotorunit by eibow {12); eibow{13) is fitted in rear port ofHydramotor unit and con-nects to return tube {14) toreservoir. Refer to Fig, 5 for

iater system.

1. Pump assy.2. "0" rings3. Pump inlet tube4. By pass tube

5. Pressure tube6. Reservoir assy.7. Return tube8. Steering motor

9. Left cylinder tube10. Right cylinder tube11. Hydramotor steering

unit

12. Elbow connector13. Elbow connector14. Return tube

Fig. 5—8600—9600 hydro-static power steering sys-tem with integrai hydrauiicpump and reservoir. Referto Fig. 4 for identificationof components. Steeringmotor {11) is pressurizedfrom tube (5) fo iower port.Upper port returns unusedfluid through tube (3) toreservoir (6). Tubes (9) and{10) are routed to frontsteering motor {8) from side

ports.

FORD

to oil pan, tighten them to a torque of180-220 ft.-lbs., then measure gap be-tween front support and oil pan at thetwo bolting points using a feeler gage.Remove the two front axle support to oilpan cap screws, then reinstall withshims equal to measured gap and tightencap screws to a torque of 270-330 ft.-lbs.Shims are available in thicknesses of0.015, 0.018, 0.021, 0.024 and 0.027 inch.

If front support is being reinstalledwith same engine cylinder block and oilpan, reinstall shims as removed on thetwo front support to oil pan cap screws.Tighten the front support to cylinderblock bolts and cap screws to a torqueof 180-220 ft.-lbs., then tighten the twofront support to oil pan cap screws to atorque of 270-330 ft.-lbs.

HYDROSTATIC POWERSTEERING SYSTEM

CAUTION: The maintenance of abso-iute cleanliness is necessary whenservicing the hydrostatic power steering

Fig. 6—Exploded view of power steering sys-tem reservoir used on 8000 and 9000 modeisand early 8600 and 9600 modeis. Oil levelswitch {10) is connected to warning iight oninstrument panel. Fitter element (8) and oil inreservoir shouid be renewed after each 600

hours of use.

1. Dipstick & niter cap2. Gasket3. Acorn nut4. Sealing washer5. Cover6. Gasket

7. Element retainerspring

8. Filter element9. Reservoir

10. Warning light switch11. Nut12. Ferrule

SHOP MANUAL Paragraphs 7-9

system. Avoid use of shop towels or ragsIn wiping internal parts as any lint cancause malfunction of the system.

All 8000 and 9000 models and early8600 and 9600 models were equippedwith a remote power steering oil reser-voir, a Saginaw Hydramotor powersteering motor and a power steeringpump with a flow control valve. Therelief valve on pump is accessible fromthe outside.

Late 8600 and 9600 models wereequipped with a Ross power steeringmotor which uses a spool to control flow.Steering pumps on these models havethe reservoir as an integral part ofpump. It is necessary to remove thistype pump from engine to change filteror relief pressure.

7. FLUID, BLEEDING AND SYS-TEM RESERVOIR. Recommendedpower steering fluid is Ford M-2C-41oil. Maintain fluid level to full mark ondipstick. A low oil level switch assembly(10—Fig. 6) is used on models withremote fluid reservoir and is connectedto a warning light on instrument panel.The light (located in Proof-Meter dial)should be on when starter switch isturned to "ON" position and go out whenengine is started. If light remains onafter engine is started, check for low oillevel or malfunction in warning lightsystem.

After each 600 hours of use, renewfilter element. On models with remotereservoir, remove all oil from reservoirwith suction gun, install new elementand refill reservoir with new oil. Onmodels with integral reservoir, removepump from engine, drain reservoir,remove bolt (1—Fig. 8) and renew filterand "0" rings.

On all models the power steeringsystem is self-bleeding. When any unithas been removed or disconnected, refillreservoir, start engine and cycle systemby turning steering wheel from lock tolock. System is fully bled when frontwheels respond directly to steeringwheel movement and oil stays at levelmark. Check fluid level and add oil asrequired to maintain full reservoir whencycling system.

8. CHECKING SYSTEM PRES-SURE. On models with remote reser-voir the power steering pump assemblyincorporates a pressure relief valve anda flow control valve. System reliefpressure should be 1450-1550 psi. Onlater models with integral pump andreservoir, pressure should be 1550-1650psi.

To check system relief pressure, dis-connect fitting and remove elbow inpressure line (5—Fig. 4 or Fig. 5) andconnect a 0-2000 psi gage to pump, using

an "0" ring on fitting to pump. With theengine running, gage reading should beas stated above. On models with remotereservoir, if pressure is not as specified,remove the pressure relief valve cap(7—Fig. 7) and add or remove shims (6)as required. If adding shims under thepressure relief valve cap will ndtincrease system pressure, clean flowcontrol spool in pump. If pressure is stilllow remove and overhaul power steeringpump as outlined in paragraph 11.

CAUTION: When checking systemreiief pressure, run engine only longenough to observe gage reading; pumpmay be damaged if engine is aiiowed torun for an excessive length of time.

Fig, 7—Exploded view ofpower steering pump usedwith remote reservoir. Noteposition of flow controlvalve spring (4) and thatsmall tip on vaive {3) Is

towards spring.

On 8600 and 9600 models, with pumpand reservoir as an integral unit, ifpressure is not as specified, pump mustbe removed from engine. Drain reser-voir and refer to Fig. 8. Removereservoir (2) and filter (3). Remove reliefvalve body (24), shims (25) and spring(26). Shims are available in 0.010, 0.015and 0.060 inch thicknesses. Each shimwill change the pressure by the followingapproximate values: 0.010 inch—70 psi,0.015 inch—105 psi, 0.060 inch—420 psi.Tighten relief valve to 30-40 ft.-lbs.torque.

9. STEERING SYSTEM TROUBLE-SHOOTING [Models with remote reser-

12

Cap plug"O* ring

1213.14.15.16.17.18.19.

2. Oring3. Flow control valve4. Spring5. Tubing seats6. Shims7. Cap plug8. •t)*^ring9. Spring

10. Pressure relief valve11. Seal ring12. Outlet elbow

Cap plug"O*ringRear cover"O"ring"O"ringRear plate

19. Inner seal ring20. Outer seal ring21. Bearing block22. Drive gear & shaft23. Driven gear & shaft24. Pump body25. Dowel rings (2)26. Bearing block27. Outer seal ring28. Inner seal ring

Fig. 8—Exploded view ofpower steering pump withintegrai reservoir used oniate 8600 and 9600 modeis.

1. Bolt2. Reservoir3. Filter4. Gasket5. Through bolt6. Cover7. "O 'ring8. Seal ring9. Bearing block

10. Driven gear11. Follow gear12. Woodruff key13. Body14. Outlet elbow15. Ring dowel16. Sealring17. Sealring18. Flange housing19. Oil seal20. Snap ring21. "O"ring22. Drive gear23. Shaft nut24. Valve body25. Shim pack26. Spring

29. Front cover30. Seal31. Snap ring32. "O"ring

24

33. Drive gear34. Tab washer35. Nut36. Woodruff key

27. Spring guide28. Sial29. Valve head

32

30. Valve seat31. "Chng32. Relief valve

Paragraphs 10-12 FORD

voir). Refer to the following paragraphsfor checking causes of steering systemmalfunction:

HARD STEERING. Check columnbearings and bearings in Hydramotorunit; renew if rough or damaged. Checkring, rotor and vanes for wear andrenew the assembly if necessary. Checkfor sticking control valve spool orblocking spool in Hydramotor; cleanvalves or renew Hydramotor parts asrequired.

EXCESSIVE WHEEL DRIFT. Checkblocking spool spring and guide assem-bly and renew if spring is broken. Checkfor leakage past blocking valve; if exces-sive, renew valve body housing assem-bly. Check seals on steering cylinderpistons and renew pistons and/orcylinders as required.

STEERING WHEEL TURNING UN-AIDED. Check the Hydramotor unit forsticking control valve spool, brokenvalve spool spring, actuator shaftbinding or torque shaft (inside actuatorshaft) broken. Clean spool and bore orrenew valve body housing assembly asrequired.

STEERING WHEEL SLIPPAGE.Hydramotor control valve spool scored(renew valve body housing assembly) orrotor seals leaking (renew seals).

EXCESSIVE NOISE. Hydraulic linesvibrating against tractor frame orbroken control valve spool spring;insulate lines from tractor or renewvalve body housing assembly if spring isbroken.

ERRATIC MOVEMENT OF FRONTWHEELS. Check Hydramotor ring,rotor or vanes for scoring, wear orbinding condition; renew the ring androtor assembly if necessary.

WILL NOT STEER IN EITHERDIRECTION. The manual steer checkball between pump return and pressurepassages in Hydramotor unit may not beseating. Disassemble unit and cleanpassage with solvent and dry withcompressed air. Renew pressure plateassembly if check ball cannot be made toseat.

FRONT WHEELS JERK OR TURNWITHOUT MOVING STEERINGWHEEL. Check for sticking rotor vanes,rotor springs out of place or broken,scored pressure plate, scored rotor ring,scored housing, ball check valves inpressure plate leaking, improper assem-bly causing gap between rotor compo-nents. Disassemble the Hydramotor

unit, carefully clean and inspect all partsand renew components as necessary.

10. STEERING SYSTEM TROU-BLESHOOTING. (Models with integralpump and reservoir). Refer to the fol-lowing paragraphs for checking causes ofsteering system malfunction:

HARD STEERING. Check columnbearings and bearings in steeringmotor; renew if rough or damaged.Check rotor and stator assembly forwear or damage and renew assembly ifnecessary. Check for leaks from dam-aged valve spool; renew steering motorif spool is damaged. Check for binding atall pivot points in steering; free up andlubricate as necessary. Check forjammed valve spool; if unable to free up,renew steering motor assembly.

EXCESSIVE WHEEL DRIFT. Checkfor leakage past valve spool; if spool isworn or damaged, renew spool assem-bly.

EXCESSIVE NOISE. Hydraulic linesvibrating against tractor frame. Insulatelines from tractor.

ERRATIC WHEEL MOTION. Rotorvanes sticking or damaged. Checkvanes, rotor and stator for freemovement; renew if necessary.

WHEELS JERK FROM STOP TO-STOP. Rotor vane springs jammed;check for proper seating of vane springs,renew complete assembly if damaged.

11. R&R AND OVERHAUL PUMP.(REMOTE RESERVOIR). Thoroughlyclean pump, lines and surrounding area.Disconnect lines from pump and allowfluid to drain. Cap all openings to pre-vent dirt from entering pump or lines,then unbolt and remove pump assem-bly from engine front plate. When rein-stalling pump, use new sealing "0" ringand tighten retaining bolts to a torque of23-30 ft.-lbs. Reconnect lines, fill andbleed system as in paragraph 7.

Refer to exploded view of remotereservoir model pump in Fig. 7 and dis-assemble pump as follows: Scribe anassembly mark across pump covers andbody. Straighten tab on washer (34) andremove nut (35). Pull drive gear (33)from pump shaft and remove key (36).Remove the four through-bolts andseparate rear cover assembly (15),plate (18), body (24) and front cover(29). Remove bearing blocks (21 and 26)and gears (22 and 23) from pump as aunit. Remove caps (1, 7 and 13) fromrear cover (15) and withdraw flowcontrol valve (3), pressure relief valve(10) and related parts. Remove locating

snap ring (31) and the oil seal (30) fromfront cover. Clean all parts in a suitablesolvent, air dry, then lightly oil allmachined surfaces.

Inspect bearing blocks (21 and 26) forsigns of seizure or scoring on face ofjournals. (When disassembling bearingblock and gear unit, keep parts inrelative position to facilitate reassem-bly). Light score marks on faces ofbearing blocks can be removed bylapping bearing block on a surface plateusing grade " 0 " emery paper andkerosene. Examine body for wear ingear running track. If track is worndeeper than 0.0025 inch on inlet side,body must be renewed. Examine pumpfor excessive wear or damage onjournals, journal bores in bearing blocksor teeth. Runout across the gear face togear tooth edge should not exceed 0.001inch. If necessary, the gear journals maybe lightly polished with grade "0" emerypaper to remove wear marks. The gearfaces may be polished by sandwichinggrade "0" emery paper between gearand face of scrap bearing block, thenrotating the gear. New gears are avail-able in matched sets only. If flow controlvalve (3) or rear cover (15) are scored ordamaged, they must be renewed as amatched set only.

When reassembling pump, install allnew seals, "0" rings and sealing rings.Insert new drive shaft oil seal (30) infront plate and install locating snap ring.Install flow control valve (3), spring (4)and plugs (1 and 13) with new "0" rings(2 and 14). Install pressure relief valve(10), spring (9) and plug (7), being surethat all shims (6) are in plug and usingnew "0" ring (8). Assemble pump gearsto bearing blocks and insert the unit intopump body. Be sure the two bolt rings(hollow dowels) are in place in pumpbody, then position the front cover onbody. Place the rear plate (18) at rear ofbody and install rear cover. Tighten thefour cap screws (through-bolts) to atorque of 13-17 ft.-lbs. Install the pumpdrive gear key, drive gear, tab washerand nut. Tighten the nut to a torque of55-60 ft.-lbs. and bend tab of washeragainst flat on nut.

12. R&R AND OVERHAUL INTE-GRAL RESERVOIR PUMP. For exploded view of parts used on models withintegral pump and reservoir refer to Fig.8. Clean pump and surrounding area anddisconnect pump pressure and returnlines. Remove the two cap screwssecuring pump to engine front cover andlift off pump and reservoir as a unit.Drain the reservoir and removethrough-bolt (1), reservoir (2) and filter(3).

Relief valve cartridge (32) can now beremoved if service is indicated. For ac-

8

SHOP MAMUAL Paragraphs 13-16

cess to shims (25) grasp seat (30) lightlyin a protected vise and unscrewbody (24). Shims (25) are available inthicknesses of 0.010, 0.015 and 0.060inch. Starting with the removed shimpack substitute shims, thus varying totalpack thickness, to adjust openingpressure. Available shims permit thick-ness adjustment in increments of 0.005inch and each 0.005 inch in shim packthickness will change opening pressureabout 35 psi. If parts are renewed, thecorrect thickness can only be determinedby trial and error, using the removedshim pack as a guide.

To disassemble the pump, bend backtab washer and remove shaft nut (23),drive gear (22) and key (12). Mark ornote relative positions of flange housing(18), pump body (13) and cover (6); thenremove pump through bolts (5). Keepparts in their proper relative positionwhen disassembling pump unit. Pumpgears (10 and 11) are available in amatched set only. Bearing blocks (9) areavailable separately but should berenewed in pairs if renewal is because ofwear. Bearing blocks should also berenewed with gear set if any shaft orbore wear is evident. Examine body (13)for wear in gear running track. If trackis worn deeper than 0.025 inch on inletside, body must be renewed. Renew all"0" rings and seals.

When reassembling the pump, tightenthrough bolts (5) to a torque of 25 ft.-lbs.and drive gear nut (23) and relief valvebody (24) to a torque of 30-40 ft.-lbs.

13. SAGINAW HYDRAMOTORSTEERING UNIT. Refer to the follow-ing paragraphs 14 through 18 forinformation on removal, overhaul andinstallation of the Saginaw Hydramotorsteering unit which is used on 8000 and9000 models and early 8600 and 9600models. If parts are not available forrepair of Hydramotor unit, a conversionkit is available to install the later Rossunit on early tractors. Refer to para-graph 9 for troubleshooting information.For the Ross unit used on 8600 and 9600models, refer to paragraphs 19, 20 and21.

14. R&R HYDRAMOTOR UNIT.To remove Hydramotor, first removehood top, right and left side panels, thenproceed as follows:

Remove cap (1—Fig. 9) from adjusterknob (4) and remove nut (2) and washer(3). Knob can then be removed fromlocking rod in shaft (11), then removesteering wheel (7) and shaft (8) as anassembly. Disconnect the four tubesfrom Hydramotor unit, then cap or plugall openings. Loosen both jam nuts (24)and unscrew the pivot studs (23) fromsupport (21). Then remove steering unitfrom below the instrument panel.

NOTE: Remove intake manifold air

tube if necessary for ciearance.

To reinstall, position unit in supportwith tilt quadrant engaged in lockplunger and turn pivot studs in tosupport unit. Reconnect the four tubesand reinstall steering wheel and adjusterknob. With steering shaft shortened tofuU extent and steering wheel in loweredposition, attach pull scale to steeringwheel rim and release quadrant latch.Tighten pivot studs until a pull of 18-22pounds will lift steering wheel fromlowered position, then tighten jam nutsto a torque of 180-220 ft.-lbs. andrecheck pivot stud adjustment.

NOTE: Do not attempt to positionsteering wheei on shaft as slippage inunit will not allow wheei to remain in anyrelative position to front wheel move-ment.

R&R STEERING COLUMNJACKET AND SHAFT ASSEMBLIES(Hydramotor Models). With Hydra-motor unit removed as outlined in para-graph 14, proceed as follows:

Loosen clamp (15—Fig. 9) and pullcolumn jacket assembly (10) from controlvalve housing (16). Unscrew the hex nut(14) until it nearly contacts control valve

housing. Nut was staked when assem-bled and will turn hard. Drive thetapered collar (13) towards nut untilcollar is loose, then turn collar untO holein collar is over locking ball hole in outershaft (11) and shake the ball (12) outof hole. The outer shaft, tapered collarand hex nut can then be removed fromthe Hydramotor actuator shaft.

Reassemble the unit before rein-stalling on actuator shaft as follows: In-stall tapered ring (13) on outer shaft(11), with large I.D. first. Install a newnut (14) just far enough to catch one ortwo threads of outer shaft. Engagesplines of outer shaft on splines ofactuator shaft. Align hole in taperedring, hole in outer shaft and groovearound the actuator shaft, then droplocking ball in hole and groove and turntapered collar V4-turn. Tighten the hexnut to a torque of 40-50 ft.-lbs. and stakenut into slot in outer shaft as shown inFig. 11.

16. R&R BLOCKING SPOOL (RE-ACTION) VALVE (Hydramotor Mod-els). The blocking spool valve andrelated parts can be removed and rein-stalled after the Hydramotor steeringunit has been removed as outlined inparagraph 14. Refer to Fig. 12 andproceed as follows:

Fig. 9—View showing ad-justable length steeringshaft and variable positionHydramotor steering unitbracket on 8000 and 9000models and early 8600 and9600 models. Lock plunger{22) engages one of eightnotches in quadrant (f 7) tohold steering wheel atdesired tiit position. Ad-justing knob (4) tightenstapered end of steeringshaft {8) against taperedend of tower shaft to locksteering wheei at desired

height.

1. Cap2. Nut3. Flat washer4. Adjusting knob5. Flat washer6. Nut7. Steering wheel &

outer tube8. Steering wheel shaft9. Shaft scraper & seal

10. Steering column jacket11. Hydramotor outer shaft12. Steel ball (11/64-inch)13. Taper ring14. Nut15. Clamp16. Hydramotor unit17. Tilt quadrant18. Spring19. Tilt knob20. Tilt pivot21. Support22. Tilt lock plunger23. Pivot studs24. Jam nut

Paragraph 17

Remove the lockout adjuster nut (1).Plug (3) and spool valve (4) may now beremoved by pushing the plug into boreagainst spring pressure with screw-driver, then quickly releasing the plug toallow spring to pop it out of bore.Remove plug and, if spool sticks in bore,invert the unit and tap housing (12) withsoft faced mallet to jar spool out. Invertunit and allow spring (5) and spring andguide assembly (6) to drop from bore.

Spool is not serviced separately, but isavailable in a complete housing kit,which includes necessary parts to re-build housing assembly.

NOTE: On some Hydramotor hous-ings, oii ieakage around blocking valveadjuster (1) may be due to mismatch ofcounterbore in valve spool bore andposition of "O" ring (2) on plug (3). Tostop oil leakage, instaii plug with partNo. C9NN-3R675-A. Note difference inplugs shown in Fig. 14. Later models willall be equipped with the later designplug.

To reassemble, install parts in bore ofhousing (12-Fig. 12) as shown in ex-ploded view, renewing the "0" ring (2)on plug (3) and tightening adjuster nutto a torque of 10-15 ft.-lbs.

NOTE: The adjuster (1) is not acces-sible after tractor is fully assembled;thus, the adjuster must be In the down.

or closed position when unit is beingreinstalled.

17. R&R COVER RETAINING SNAPRING (Hydramotor Models). To removesnap ring (7—Fig. 10) used to retaincover (30) to housing (12) proceed asfollows:

With unit removed from tractor asoutlined in paragraph 14, check to seethat end gap of snap ring is near hole incover as shown in Fig. 13; if not, bumpsnap ring into this position with hammerand punch. Insert a pin punch into holeand drive punch inward to dislodge snapring from groove. Hold punch undersnap ring and pry ring from cover withscrewdriver. Usually, the coil spring(27—Fig. 10) will push housing fromcover; if not, bump cover loose bytapping around edge with mallet.

To reinstall the cover retaining snapring, housing must be held in cover,against spring pressure. It is recom-mended that the unit be placed in anarbor press and the housing be pushedinto cover with a sleeve as shown in Fig.15.

CAUTION: Do not push against end ofshaft (14—Fig. 10).

Place snap ring over housing beforeplacing unit in press. Carefully applyforce on housing with sleeve until flangeon housing is below snap ring groove in

O-—10

— J

20

Fig. 10—Expioded view ofthe Saginaw Hydramotorsteering unit. Also refer toFigs, 11 to 27 for photosshowing disassembiy and

reassembiy techniques.

1. Blocking valve lockout2. "O"ring3. Plug4. Block valve5. Spring6. Spring & guide assy.7. Snap ring8. Snap ring9. Dust seal

10. Oil seal11. Needle bearing12. Housing13. Dowel pins (2)14. Actu^or shaft & control

valve spool15. Bearing support16. "O"ring17. Needle bearing18. "O"ring19. Rotor seal ring20. Ring, rotor & vane assy.21. Snap ring22. Needle bearing23. Pressure plate assy.24. Check valve balls (2)25. Check valve springs (2)26. Retaining plugs (2)27. Pressure plate spring28. Backuprmg29. "O"ring30. Cover

FORD

cover. Note that lug on housing whichprevents rotation must enter slot incover. If housing binds in cover, do notapply heavy pressure; remove unit frompress and bump cover loose with mallet.

Fig. 11—After installing steering shaft onHydramotor actuator shaft, stake hex nut to

siot in steering {11) with center punch,

11. Outer shaft 14. Hex nut13. Tapered ring 16. Housing

Fig. 12—Expioded view of Hydramotor hous-ing and biocking vaive components. Biockingvaive can be removed without disassembiy of

Hydramotor.1. Lockout2. "O"rinsr3. Plug4. Blocking valve

5. Spring6. Sbring & guide assy.

12. Housing

Fig. 13—To remove cover retaining snap ring,drive pin punch through hole (H) in cover to

disengage snap ring from groove.

10

SHOP MANUAL Paragraph 18

When housing has been pushed farenough into cover, install snap ring ingroove with end gap near hole in coveras shown in Fig. 13.

18. OVERHAUL SAGINAW HY-DRAMOTOR STEERING UNIT. Withthe unit removed from tractor as out-lined in paragraph 14 and the coverretaining snap ring removed as out-lined in paragraph 17, proceed asfollows:

Clamp flat portion of Hydramotorhousing in a vise and remove cover(30—Fig. 10) by pulling upward with atwisting motion. Remove the pressure

.115 H .175'

Fig, 14—Note difference in "0" ring positionon above piugs. Plug {B) is Ford part No.C9NN-3R675-A and shouid be instaiied to stop

oii leakage described in paragraph 16.

plate spring (27), then lift off thepressure plate (23) as shown in Fig. 16.Remove the dowel pins (Fig. 17), thenremove snap ring (21) from shaft (14)with suitable snap ring pliers and screw-driver; discard the snap ring. Pull pumpring and rotor assembly (20) up off ofshaft as shown in Fig. 18. Tap outer end

of shaft with soft faced mallet as shownin Fig. 19 until bearing support (15) canbe removed, then carefully remove theactuator shaft assembly from housing asshown in Fig. 21.

NOTE: As the actuator shaft andcontroi vaive spool asembiy is a fac-tory baianced unit and is not service-abie except by renewing the complete

Fig, 17—Removing dowel pins {13) from motorring and housing. Then, remove the snap ring

(21) retaining rotor to actuator shaft {14).

Fig, 20—Lifting the Teflon rotor seai {19) and**O"ring {18) from bearing support {15). Neediebearing {17) is serviced separateiy frombearing support. Groove (G) is for supportseaiing " 0 " ring {16—Fig. 10). identicai seais

{18 and 19) are used in pressure piate.

Fig. 18—Lifting the motor ring, rotor and vaneassembiy {20) from actuator shaft {14) and

housing {12).Fig. 21—Removing the actuator shaft assem-bly from housing. Be careful not to cock con-

trot vaive spooi in bore of housing.

Fig, 15—Using steeve and arbor press to pushhousing into cover to attow instattation of

cover retaining snap ring (7).

Fig 16—Lifting pressure piate (23) fromdowei pins {13).

Fig, 19—Tap on outer end of actuator shaft(14) to bump bearing support (15) from the

housing {12).

Fig. 22—Pin in actuator sieeve must be en-gaged in hoie in end of controt vatve spoot be-fore actuator assembty ts tnstatted. if spooicannot be puiied out of sieeve, pin is

engaged.

Paragraph 18 Cont. FORDhousing assembly, it is recommendedthat this unit not be disassembied.

Carefully clean and inspect the re-moved units. Refer to paragraph 16 forinformation on the blocking valve assem-bly. If the housing control valve bore orblocking valve bore are deeply scored or

Fig, 23—When pushing bearing support (15)into housing {12), be careful not to damage the"O" ring on outside groove of support.

Fig. 25—Be sure aii vane springs are engagedbehind the rotor vanes. Springs can be pried

into piace with screwdriver as shown.

worn, or if the blocking valve spool orthe actuator shaft and control valvespool assembly are damaged in any waymaking the unit unfit for further service,a complete new housing assembly mustbe installed. If these components (hous-ing, blocking valve and actuator assem-bly) are serviceable, proceed withoverhaul as follows:

Remove the check valve retainers(26-Fig. 10), springs (25) and checkvalve balls (24) from pressure plate (23)and blow passages clear with com-pressed air. Renew the pressure plateassembly if check valve seats or face ofplate are deeply scored or damaged.Renew needle bearing (22), springs (25)and/or check valve balls (24) if damagedand pressure plate is otherwise service-able.

NOTE: Drive or press on lettered(trademark) end of bearing cage wheninstaiiing new needle bearing.

If bearing support (15) is otherwiseserviceable, a new needle bearing (17)may be installed; drive or press only onlettered end of bearing cage.

Remove snap ring (8), dust seal (9)and oil seal (10) and inspect the needlebearing (11); renew needle bearing if

worn or damaged. Press only on lettered(trademark) end of bearing cage wheninstalling new bearing. Install oil sealwith Up towards inside (needle bearing),then install dust seal and retaining snapring.

If the motor ring, rotor or vanes areworn, scored or damaged beyond furtheruse, or if any of the vane springs arebroken, renew the unit as a completeassembly (20). If unit was disassembledand is usable, reassemble as follows:Place ring on flat surface and place rotorinside ring. Insert six vanes in rotorslots which are in line with large insidediameter of ring. Make sure roundededges of vane are facing outward. Turnrotor V4-turn and insert remainingvanes. Hook the springs behind thevanes with a screwdriver as shown inFig. 25, then turn the assembly over andhook springs behind the vanes on op-posite side of rotor.

To reassemble the Hydramotor unit,place housing (12-Fig. 10) (with needlebearing, seals and snap ring installed) ina vise with flat (bottom) side up. Checkto be sure that pin in actuator is engagedwith hole in valve spool; if spool can bepulled away from actuator as shown inFig. 22, push the spool back into ac-tuator and be sure pin is engaged in one

Fig. 27—Exptoded view ofsteering column and motorused on iate 8600 and 9600modeis. Unit differs fromSaginaw modeis mainty in

motor {15),

1. Cap2. Adjusting knob3. Steering wheel & tube4. Shaft lock rod5. Shaft taper ring6. Motor inner shaft7. Retainer pin8. Motor shaft lock9. Upper bearing

10. Inner column lacket11. Motor shaft pm12. Dowel ring13. Bearing14. Column15. Steering motor16. Jamnut(2)17. Pivot stud (2)18. Support19. Tilt lock plunger

Fig. 26—"0" ring {28) and back-up ring {29) areinstatted in cover {30); be sure back-up ring isto outside {open side) of cover. Groove (G) is

for cover retaining snap ring. 1812

SHOP MANUAL

of the holes in spool. Then, lubricatespool and shaft and carefully insert theassembly into bore of housing. Placebearing support (15) with outside "0"ring and needle bearing installed onshaft, and carefully push the support in-to housing as shown in Fig. 23. Insertrotor sealing "0" ring and rotor seal intobearing support. Place ring and rotor as-sembly (20-Fig. 10) on shaft and hous-ing with chamfered outer edge of ringup (away from housing). Install a newrotor retaining snap ring (21) and insertthe dowel pins through ring into hous-ing. Using heavy grease, stick the "0"ring and rotor sealing ring (19) into pres-sure plate, then install the pressureplate and bearing assembly over shaft,pump ring and rotor assembly and thetwo dowel pins. Place the coil spring ontop of pressure plate. Install new "0"ring and backup ring in second groove ofcover (Fig. 26), lubricate the rings andpush cover down over the pressure plateand ring. While holding the cover on theassembly, place the unit in an arborpress and insert the cover retainingsnap ring as outlined in paragraph 17.Reinstall Hydramotor as outlined inparagraph 14.

19. R&R STEERING COLUMNSHAFT AND MOTOR ASSEMBLY(Late 8600-9600 Models). Refer to Fig.

27. Remove cap (1) from adjuster knob(2), remove nut, washer and knob. Use asuitable puller to remove steering wheeland tube assembly from inner shaft (6).Remove left and right hood panels.Disconnect the four tubes from powersteering motor (15) and cap or plug allopenings. Remove the heat deflectorpanels below steering motor to allowremoval out the bottom. Loosen two jamnuts (16) and unscrew pivot studs (17)from support (18) until assembly can bebrought down and out right side oftractor.

To reinstall, reverse removal proce-dure. Before installing pivot studs (17),lubricate studs and tighten until a pull of18-22 lbs. will tilt assembly. Tighten jamnuts to a torque of 180-220 ft.-lbs.Reconnect four oil tubes so that all tubesare at right angles to engine when tight.Tighten steering wheel nut to 60-80 ft.lbs. torque. After knob (2) is placed onshaft, use knob to rotate locking shaftcounter-clockwise until it stops, thentighten nut to 11-15 ft.-lbs. torque.

20. R&R STEERING COLUMN JAC-KET AND SHAFT ASSEMBLIES(Late 8600-9600 Models). With steeringmotor and shaft assembly removed asoutlined in paragraph 19, proceed asfollows:

Remove four bolts holding column

27Fig. 28—Exptoded view of Ross power steering motor used on iate modets.

1. End cover w/pin2. Washer3. Seal4. Seal retainer5. Commutator6. Commutator ring7. Manifold8. Stator rotor set9. Drive link

10. Spacer (plate)11. Shims12. Retaining snap ring13. Thrust washer14. Valve thrust bearing15. Thrust washer16. Spring washer17. Spacer18. Input shaft

19. Drive ring20. Spacer21. Torsion bar22. Valve spool23. Ball retaining spring24. Actuator ball25. Plug26. "O"ring27. Valve body

28. Recirculating ball29. Plug w/pin30. Needle bearing31. Sealring32. Upper cover33. Seal34. Brass washer35. Stepped spacer36. Retamingring

Paragraphs 19-21

assembly (14—Fig. 27) to steering motor(15). Remove motor and shaft assemblyfrom column and remove motor shaft pin(11).

Reassemble in reverse order of disas-sembly. Tighten four bolts from columnto motor to 18-22 ft.-lbs. torque.

21. OVERHAUL ROSS STEERINGMOTOR UNIT. Remove column andsteering motor assembly as outlined inparagraph 19 and separate motorassembly from column as outlined inparagraph 20. To disassemble theremoved motor, refer to Fig. 28 andproceed as follows: Install a fitting in oneof the four ports in housing (27), thenclamp fitting in a vise so that input shaft(18) is pointing downward. Remove capscrews and end cover (1).

NOTE: Lapped surfaces of end cover(1), commutator set (5 and 6), manifoid(7), stator-rotor set (8), spacer (plate) andhousing (27) must be protected fromscratching, burring or any other damageas sealing of these parts depends ontheir finish and fiatness.

Remove seal retainer (4) and seal (3),then carefully remove washer (2), com-mutator set (5 and 6) and manifold (7).Lift off the spacer plate (10), drive link(9) and stator-rotor set as an assembly.Separate spacer plate and drive linkfrom stator-rotor set. If the pin in endcover (1) or cover is damaged, covermust be renewed, since pin is notserviced separately.

Remove unit from vise, then clampfitting in vise so that input shaft ispointing upward. Place a light mark onflange of upper cover (32) and housing(27) for aid in reassembly. Unbolt uppercover from valve body, using a 5/16-inch12-point socket, then grasp input shaftand remove input shaft, upper cover andvalve spool assembly. Remove anddiscard seal ring (31). Slide upper coverassembly from input shaft and removespacer (17). Remove shims (11) fromcavity in upper cover or from face ofthrust washer (13) and note number ofshims for aid in reassembly. Removeretaining ring (36), brass washer (34)and seal (33). Retain seal ring (35) andretaining ring (36) for reassembly. Donot remove needle bearing (30) unlessrenewal is required.

Remove ring (12), thrust washer (13)and thrust bearing (14) from input shaft.Drive out pin in input shaft (18)and withdraw torsion bar (21) and spacer(20). Place end of valve spool on top ofbench and rotate input shaft until drivering (19) falls free, then rotate inputshaft clockwise until actuator ball (24) isdisengaged from helical groove in inputshaft. Withdraw input shaft and removeactuator ball. Do not remove actuator

13

Paragraph 21 Cont. FORD

ball retaining spring (23) unless renewalis required.

Remove plug (29) and recirculatingball from valve body.

Thoroughly clean all parts in a suitablesolvent, visually inspect parts and renewany showing excessive wear, scoring orother damage.

If needle bearing (30) must berenewed, press same out toward flangedend of cover. Press new bearing in fromflanged end of cover to the dimensionshown in Fig. 29. Press only onnumbered end of bearing, using a pilotedmandrel.

Using a micrometer, measure thick-ness of the commutator ring (6—Fig.28) and commutator (5). If commutatorring is 0.0015 inch or more thicker thancommutator, renew the matched set.

Place the stator-rotor set (8) on thelapped surface of end cover (1). Makecertain that vanes and vane springs areinstalled correctly in slots of the rotor.

NOTE: Arched back of springs mustcontact vanes.

Position lobe of rotor in valley ofstator as shown in Fig. 30. Centeropposite lobe on crown of stator, thenusing feeler gage, measure clearancebetween rotor lobe and stator. If clear-ance is more than 0.006 inch, renewstator-rotor assembly. Using a micro-meter, measure thickness of stator androtor. If stator is 0.002 inch or morethicker than rotor, or vanes are worn to0.250 inch or less in length, renew theassembly. Stator, rotor and vanes areavailable only as an assembly.

Before reassembling, wash all partsin clean solvent and air dry. All parts,unless otherwise indicated, are installeddry. Install plug (25—Fig. 28) and new"0" ring in valve body. Install recircu-lating ball (28) and plug (29) with new"0" ring in valve body and tighten plugto a torque of 10-14 ft.-lbs. Clamp fitting

BEARING PART NO.ON TKI} SIOC

INSTALL BEARING

IN THlSOtRECTlON

(installed in valve body port) in a vise sothat top end of valve body is facingupward. Install thrust washer (15),thrust bearing (14), second thrustwasher (13) and snap ring (12) on inputshaft (18). If actuator ball retainingspring (23) was removed, install newretaining spring in spool (22). Placeactuator ball (24) in its seat from theinside of valve spool (22). Insert inputshaft into valve spool, engaging the helixand actuator ball with a counter-clock-wise motion. Use the mid-section oftorsion bar (21) as a gage between end ofvalve spool and thrust washer as shownin Fig. 31, to insure assembly in theneutral position of the ball on ramp.Place the assembly in a vertical positionwith end of input shaft resting on abench. Insert drive ring (19—Fig. 28)into valve spool until drive ring is fullyengaged on input shaft spline. Removetorsion bar gage. Install spacer (20) in

Fig. 30—With rotor positioned in stator asshown, ciearance " C " must not exceed

0.006 inch. Refer to text.

NECOLC BEARINGLOCATION (N BODY

Fig, 29—When instaiiing needie bearing inupper cover, press bearing into dimension

{inches) shown.

valve spool, over drive ring (19).Distance from top of spool (22) to top ofspacer (20) should be 11/16 inch. Installtorsion bar into valve spool. Aligncross-holes in torsion bar and input shaftwith a 0.120 inch pin punch and installpin into input shaft (18). Pin must bepressed into shaft until end of pin isabout 1/32-inch below flush. Placespacer (17) over spool and carefullyinstall spool assembly into valve body.Position original shims (11) on thrustwasher (13) (if the original input shaftand cover are to be used), lubricate newseal ring (31), place seal ring in uppercover (32) and install upper coverassembly. Align the match marks oncover flange and valve body and installcap screws finger tight. Tighten a wormdrive type hose clamp around coverflange and valve body to align the outerdiameters, (as shown in Fig. 32), thentighten cap screws to a torque of 18-22ft.-lbs.

NOTE: If either input shaft (18—Fig.28) or upper cover (32) or both have beenrenewed, the foiiowing procedure forshimming must be used.

With upper cover installed (with ori-ginal shims) as outlined above, invertunit in vise so that input shaft is pointingdownward. Grasp input shaft, pulldownward and prevent it from rotating.Engage drive link (9) splines in valve

Fig, 31—Use torsion bar as shown betweenthrust washer and end of spooi, to estabtishneutrai position. Refer to Fig. 28 for parts

identification.

Fig. 32—A targe hose damp may be used asshown to aiign cover to vaive body before

tightening cap screws.

14

SHOP MANUAL

spool and rotate drive link until end ofspool is flush with end of valve body.Remove drive link and check alignmentof drive link and check alignment ofdrive link slot to torsion bar pin. Installdrive link until its slot engages torsionbar pin. Check relationship of spool endto body end. If end of spool is protrudingfrom body and is within 0.0025 inch ofbeing flush with end of body, noadditional shimming is required. If notwithin 0.0025 inch of being flush, removecover and add or remove shims (11) asnecessary. Reinstall cover and recheckspool to valve body position.

With drive link installed, place spacerplate (10) on valve body with plain sideup. Install stator-rotor set over drivelink splines and align cap screws holes.Make certain vanes and vane springs areproperly installed. Install manifold (7)with circular slotted side up and aligncap screw holes with stator, spacer andvalve body. Install commutator ring (6)with slotted side up, then installcommutator (5) over drive link end withcounter-bore for washer (2) facing out.Make certain that link end is engaged inthe smallest elongated hole in commuta-tor. Install seal (3) and retainer (4).Apply a few drops of hydraulic fluid oncommutator (5) and manifold (7). Use asmall amount of grease to stick washer(2) in position over pin on end cover (1).Install end cover making sure that pinengages center hole in commutator.Align holes and install cap screws. Alter-nately and progressively tighten capscrews while rotating input shaft. Finaltightening should be 18-22 ft.-lbs.torque.

Relocate the unit in vise so input shaftis up. Lubricate seal (33) and carefullywork seal over shaft and into bore withlip toward inside. Install brass washer(34) then install stepped spacer (35) withflat side up. Install retaining ring (36)with rounded edge inward.

Remove unit from vise and removefitting from port. Turn unit on its sidewith hose ports upward. Pour cleanhydraulic fluid into inlet port, rotateinput shaft until fluid appears at outletport, then plug all ports.

Reinstall unit to steering column byinstalling motor shaft pin (11—Fig. 27).Tighten the four bolts from column tosteering motor to a torque of 18-22ft.-lbs. and reinstall assembly as out-lined in paragraph 19.

22. R&R FRONT POWER STEER-ING MOTOR (AU Models). To removepower steering motor from front sup-port, first remove radiator and shell asan assembly as outlined in paragraph152, then proceed as follows:

On tricycle model, support front oftractor and remove spindle assemblyfrom steering motor shaft. On wide front

axle models, unbolt center steering armfrom motor shaft. Disconnect powersteering tubes from steering motor andcap or plug all openings. Remove engineoil cooler, then unbolt and remove powersteering motor from pedestal.

When reinstalling, tighten steeringmotor retaining cap screws to a torque of180-220 ft.-lbs. and oil cooler cap screwsto 20-26 ft.-lbs. Fill and bleed the powersteering system as outlined in paragraph7.

23. OVERHAUL FRONT POWERSTEERING MOTOR. With assemblyremoved as in paragraph 22, proceed asfollows:

To renew piston seals, unbolt cylin-ders (20—Fig. 34) from housing (8) andwithdraw cylinders from rack pistons(13). Remove cap screws (18), flatwashers (17), pistons and spacer sleeves(16) from each end of rack (7). RemoveTeflon ring (15) and "0" ring (14) frompistons. Check to see that the spacersleeves (16) are not crushed; pistons

Paragraphs 22-23

must be free (except for "0" ringtension) between end of rack and flatwasher for alignment to cylinder bores.Reinstall pistons with new "0" rings (12)and tighten retaining cap screws to atorque of 14-20 ft.-lbs. Install new "0"rings (14) in piston grooves. Soften newTeflon rings (15) in hot water, installrings over the "0" rings and force theTeflon rings into groove using a pistonring compressor. Renew cylinder(s) ifscored or excessively worn. Lubricatepistons and cylinder bores with powersteering fluid, then install cylinders withnew "0" rings (19). Tighten cylinderretaining cap screws to a torque of 30-40ft.-lbs.

To overhaul rack, pinion gear, shaft,bearings and seal assembly, first removecylinders and pistons as outlined inpreceding paragraph, then proceed asfollows: Remove cap (1), then unstakeand remove nut (3). Press shaft (26)downward out of housing, remove upperbearing cone (4) from housing andremove pinion (22) and spacer (23). In-

Fig, 33—Power steeringmotor is accessibie afterremoving shett and radiatorassembty. Engine oiicooier is mounted on topof motor. Oit return tinecarries any ieakage pastrack pistons back to reser-

voir.

Ftg, 34—Exptoded view ofpower steering motor as-sembiy. Motor shaft bear-ings are adjusted by tight-ening nut (3). Shims {10)controi pressure of rackguide isiipper) {11) againstfront side of rack {7), pinion{22) and steering motor

shaft (26).

1. Cap2. Gasket3. Nut4. Bearing cone5. Bearing cu|)6. Retaining ring7. Rack8. Housing9. Plug

10. Shims11. Slipper guide12. "OSing13. Piston14. "C'ring15. Teflon ring16. ^ a c e r17. Flat washer18. Cap screw19. "O'^ring20. Cylinder21. Bearing cup22. Pinion23. Spacer24. Bearing cone25. Seal26. Motor shaft

11

2B

15

Paragraphs 28 31

spect bearing cone (24) and if necessaryto renew, use a suitable puller to removefrom shaft. Remove rack guide (slipper)(11) from housing, taking care not to loseshims (10), and withdraw rack fromhousing. Remove upper (5) and lower(21) bearing cups from housing, ifnecessary to renew and remove oil seal(25) from housing and discard.

Carefully clean and inspect all partsand renew any that are scored orexcessively worn. Reassemble usingnew oU sed, gasket, sealing rings andother parts required as follows:

If they have been removed, installsnap ring (6), then drive upper bearingcup (5) into housing tightly against snapring. If removed, install new bearing cup(21) and oil seal (25) in bottom ofhousing. Use a suitable step plate onbearing cup and make sure it bottoms inbore. Install bearing cone (24), spacer(23) and pinion (22) on shaft, makingsure that pinion to shaft timing marksare aligned as shown in Fig. 35. Placehousing over spindle, then instaU rack sothat timing marks on rack and pinion arealigned as in Fig. 35, then install guide(11—Fig. 34) with shims as removed;tighten guide retaining cap screwsfinger tight only. Install upper bearingcone (4) and retaining nut (3). Tighten aV4-inch cap screw in center hole of shaftflange so that torque wrenches may beused to check effort to turn shaft.Tighten nut (3) so that a torque of 52-62in.-lbs. is required to turn shaft withguide retaining cap screws loose, thenstake nut to shaft and install cap (1) withnew gasket. Install rack pistons andcylinders as previously outlined, thentighten rack guide retaining cap screwsto a torque of 20-26 ft.-lbs. With rackcentered, breakaway torque required toturn shaft with torque wrench should be20-25 ft.-lbs. If breakaway torque is notwithin this range, decrease shim pack(10) thickness to increase guide pressureor add thickness to decrease pressure.Shims are available in thicknesses of0.007, 0.009, 0.010, 0.012, 0.015 and0.020 inch.

When rack guide is properly shimmed,remove plug (9) and fill housing withpower steering fluid. Reinstall unit asoutlined in paragraph 22.

26TM 22

Fig. 35—Wh»n reassembling steering motor,be sure that timing marks {TM) on rack (7), pin-Ion (22) and Shalt (26) are aligned as shown.

16

FRONT SYSTEMAND STEERING(MODELS 8700,

9700, TW10, TW20ANDTW30)

Refer to paragraph 44 for frontwheel drive models.

28. Models 8700 and 9700 are equippedwith a front axle which may be adjustedto track widths from 56 to 84 inches.Axles on Models TW-10, TW-20 andTW-30 may be adjusted from 60 to 84inches. A short (93.2 inches) or long(109.7 inches) tractor wheeibase may beobtained by reversing front axle andreplacing spindle steering arms, tie rodsleeve and anchor for power steeringcylinder.

All models are equipped with a tiltingsteering column and hydrostatic powersteering which consists of an enginedriven pump with fluid reservoir, aRoss-type steering motor and a steeringcylinder.

FRONT AXLE

29. REMOVE AND REINSTALL,To remove front axle, remove frontweights and support front of tractor.Disconnect and cap steering cylinderhoses. Unbolt and remove front supportbracket (21—Fig. 40), then roll frontaxle assembly away from tractor.

To install front axle, reverse removal

FORD

procedure. Tighten front support brack-et (21) screws to 180-220 ft.-lbs. Cyclesteering wheel several times in bothdirections to bleed steering cylinder andcheck fluid level in reservoir.

NOTE: Tractor wheeibase may bechanged from long to short or vice versaby reversing direction of front axie centermember (23—Fig. 40) and repiacingsteering arms (3 and 7), tie rod sleeve (5)and steering cyiinder anchor (11). Steer-ing cyiinder hoses must be rerouted andiengthened or shortened.

30. SPINDLE BUSHINGS. Spindlebushings (13 and 16—Fig. 40) are pre-sized and can be renewed withoutremoving axle extension. Pull oldbushings and install new ones using apiloted driver to prevent damage tobushing and axle bore. Tighten spindleretaining nuts to a torque of 360-440ft.-lbs. on all TW-30 models and onTW-10 and TW-20 models equipped witha heavy duty front axle. Tighten spindlenuts on all other models to a torque of100-125 ft.-lbs.

31. AXLE CENTER MEMBER, PIV-OT PINS AND BUSHINGS. To removeaxle center member (23—Fig. 40), sup-port front of tractor, remove tie rod endsand cylinder rod as necessary, thenunbolt axle extensions from centermember. Withdraw axle extensions withspindles and wheels from center memberand tie rod sleeves. Support centermember and unbolt front pivot pin sup-port. Move center member and frontpivot forward until clear of rear pivot pinand lower to floor.

2

Fig, 40—Expioded view of front axie assembiy used on Modeis 8700, 9700, TW10, TW20 andTW30,

1. Front support2. Bushing3. Steering arm, R.H.4. Tie rod end5. Tie rod sleeve6. Tie rod

7. Steering arm, L.H.8. Steering cylinder9. Seal

10. Thrust washer11. Anchor12. Seal

13. Bushing14. Seal15. Axle extension, R.H.16. Bushing17. Thrustbearing18. Spacer

19. Spindle. R.H.20. Axle extension, L.H.21. Support bracket22. Spindle, L.H.23. I<'ront axle center

member

Paragraphs 28 31

spect bearing cone (24) and if necessaryto renew, use a suitable puller to removefrom shaft. Remove rack guide (slipper)(11) from housing, taking care not to loseshims (10), and withdraw rack fromhousing. Remove upper (5) and lower(21) bearing cups from housing, ifnecessary to renew and remove oil seal(25) from housing and discard.

Carefully clean and inspect all partsand renew any that are scored orexcessively worn. Reassemble usingnew oU sed, gasket, sealing rings andother parts required as follows:

If they have been removed, installsnap ring (6), then drive upper bearingcup (5) into housing tightly against snapring. If removed, install new bearing cup(21) and oil seal (25) in bottom ofhousing. Use a suitable step plate onbearing cup and make sure it bottoms inbore. Install bearing cone (24), spacer(23) and pinion (22) on shaft, makingsure that pinion to shaft timing marksare aligned as shown in Fig. 35. Placehousing over spindle, then instaU rack sothat timing marks on rack and pinion arealigned as in Fig. 35, then install guide(11—Fig. 34) with shims as removed;tighten guide retaining cap screwsfinger tight only. Install upper bearingcone (4) and retaining nut (3). Tighten aV4-inch cap screw in center hole of shaftflange so that torque wrenches may beused to check effort to turn shaft.Tighten nut (3) so that a torque of 52-62in.-lbs. is required to turn shaft withguide retaining cap screws loose, thenstake nut to shaft and install cap (1) withnew gasket. Install rack pistons andcylinders as previously outlined, thentighten rack guide retaining cap screwsto a torque of 20-26 ft.-lbs. With rackcentered, breakaway torque required toturn shaft with torque wrench should be20-25 ft.-lbs. If breakaway torque is notwithin this range, decrease shim pack(10) thickness to increase guide pressureor add thickness to decrease pressure.Shims are available in thicknesses of0.007, 0.009, 0.010, 0.012, 0.015 and0.020 inch.

When rack guide is properly shimmed,remove plug (9) and fill housing withpower steering fluid. Reinstall unit asoutlined in paragraph 22.

26TM 22

Fig. 35—Wh»n reassembling steering motor,be sure that timing marks {TM) on rack (7), pin-Ion (22) and Shalt (26) are aligned as shown.

16

FRONT SYSTEMAND STEERING(MODELS 8700,

9700, TW10, TW20ANDTW30)

Refer to paragraph 44 for frontwheel drive models.

28. Models 8700 and 9700 are equippedwith a front axle which may be adjustedto track widths from 56 to 84 inches.Axles on Models TW-10, TW-20 andTW-30 may be adjusted from 60 to 84inches. A short (93.2 inches) or long(109.7 inches) tractor wheeibase may beobtained by reversing front axle andreplacing spindle steering arms, tie rodsleeve and anchor for power steeringcylinder.

All models are equipped with a tiltingsteering column and hydrostatic powersteering which consists of an enginedriven pump with fluid reservoir, aRoss-type steering motor and a steeringcylinder.

FRONT AXLE

29. REMOVE AND REINSTALL,To remove front axle, remove frontweights and support front of tractor.Disconnect and cap steering cylinderhoses. Unbolt and remove front supportbracket (21—Fig. 40), then roll frontaxle assembly away from tractor.

To install front axle, reverse removal

FORD

procedure. Tighten front support brack-et (21) screws to 180-220 ft.-lbs. Cyclesteering wheel several times in bothdirections to bleed steering cylinder andcheck fluid level in reservoir.

NOTE: Tractor wheeibase may bechanged from long to short or vice versaby reversing direction of front axie centermember (23—Fig. 40) and repiacingsteering arms (3 and 7), tie rod sleeve (5)and steering cyiinder anchor (11). Steer-ing cyiinder hoses must be rerouted andiengthened or shortened.

30. SPINDLE BUSHINGS. Spindlebushings (13 and 16—Fig. 40) are pre-sized and can be renewed withoutremoving axle extension. Pull oldbushings and install new ones using apiloted driver to prevent damage tobushing and axle bore. Tighten spindleretaining nuts to a torque of 360-440ft.-lbs. on all TW-30 models and onTW-10 and TW-20 models equipped witha heavy duty front axle. Tighten spindlenuts on all other models to a torque of100-125 ft.-lbs.

31. AXLE CENTER MEMBER, PIV-OT PINS AND BUSHINGS. To removeaxle center member (23—Fig. 40), sup-port front of tractor, remove tie rod endsand cylinder rod as necessary, thenunbolt axle extensions from centermember. Withdraw axle extensions withspindles and wheels from center memberand tie rod sleeves. Support centermember and unbolt front pivot pin sup-port. Move center member and frontpivot forward until clear of rear pivot pinand lower to floor.

2

Fig, 40—Expioded view of front axie assembiy used on Modeis 8700, 9700, TW10, TW20 andTW30,

1. Front support2. Bushing3. Steering arm, R.H.4. Tie rod end5. Tie rod sleeve6. Tie rod

7. Steering arm, L.H.8. Steering cylinder9. Seal

10. Thrust washer11. Anchor12. Seal

13. Bushing14. Seal15. Axle extension, R.H.16. Bushing17. Thrustbearing18. Spacer

19. Spindle. R.H.20. Axle extension, L.H.21. Support bracket22. Spindle, L.H.23. I<'ront axle center

member

SHOP MANUAL Paragraphs 32-44

To remove pivot pins and bushingsfrom front support (1—Fig. 40) andbracket (21), remove front axle foraccess. Renew front axle center member(23) if pivot pins are excessively worn ordamaged. Use suitable driving tool toremove bushings. New bushings are pre-sized.

32. TIE ROD AND TOE-IN. Recommended toe-in is V4 to V2-inch. To adjusttoe-in, remove bolt securing sleeve(5—Fig. 40) to tie rod (6) and loosenclamp on sleeve. Turn sleeve (5) untildesired toe-in is obtained. Tightenclamp, install bolt securing sleeve to tierod and recheck toe-in measurement.

FRONT SUPPORT (PEDESTAL)

33. REMOVE AND REINSTALL. Toremove front support casting (1—Fig.40), remove radiator as outlined inparagraph 152. Remove front axleassembly as outlined in paragraph 29.Attach a hoist or other device to frontsupport casting and unscrew retainingbolts and nuts.

To install front support casting, attachfront support casting to engine usingfour upper bolts and tighten bolts to180-220 ft.-lbs. Be sure oil pan capscrews are tight and measure gapbetween front support and oil pan atattaching bolt holes. Loosen the fourinstalled cap screws, then install the twolower screws using shims equal to themeasured clearance. Shims are availablein thicknesses of 0.014, 0.017, 0.021,0.024 and 0.027 inch. Tighten frontsupport to cylinder block bolts to 180-220ft. lbs., then tighten front support to oilpan cap screws to 270-330 ft.-lbs. Installfront axle and radiator by reversingremoval procedure.

POWER STEERING SYSTEM

These models are equipped with ahydrostatic power steering system con-sisting of a steering cylinder attached tothe front axle, a Ross-type steeringmotor and a tilting steering gearmechanism.

34. FLUID AND BLEEDING. UseFord M-2C41A fluid in this system. Fluidlevel should be kept at bottom ofreservoir filler neck. System capacity is7.8 US pints. Reservoir (2—Fig. 41)should be disassembled for cleaning andnew filter (3) installed after each 600hours of operation.

System is self-bleeding. Wheneverpower steering system has been disas-sembled for any reason, after reassem-bly, refill fluid reservoir, start engine torun at low idle rpm and operate steeringfuU right to full left through at least fivecomplete cycles. Replenish reservoir

fluid as needed to maintain level. Systemis free of trapped air when no bubblesappear, steering is firm and reservoirlevel remains steady at full.

35. PRESSURE AND FLOW. System pressure is regulated at 1950-2100psi on TW-30 or 1550-1650 psi on allother models by the pump pressurerelief valve. Rate of flow should be 4.2gpm at 1000 engine rpm.

36. R&R AND OVERHAUL PUMP.For exploded view of pump refer to Fig.41. Clean pump and surrounding areaand disconnect pump pressure andreturn lines. Remove two cap screwssecuring pump to engine front cover andlift off pump and reservoir as a unit.

Relief valve is now accessible. Shims(25) are available in thicknesses of 0.010,0.015 and 0.060 inch to adjust reliefvalve opening pressure. A change ofshim pack thickness of 0.005 inch willalter opening pressure approximately 35psi.

To disassemble the pump, bend backtab washer and remove shaft nut (23),drive gear (22) and key (12). Mark ornote relative positions of flange housing(18), pump body (13) and cover (6); thenremove pump through bolts (5). Keepparts in their proper relative positionwhen disassembling pump unit. Ifnecessary, flow control valve compo-nents can now be removed. Pump gears(10 and 11) are available in a matched setonly. Bearing blocks (9) are availableseparately but should be renewed inpairs if renewal is because of wear.Bearing blocks should also be renewed

with gear set if any shaft or bore wear isevident. Examine body (13) for wear ingear running track. If track is worndeeper than 0.025 inch on inlet side,body must be renewed. Renew all "0"rings and seals.

When reassembling the pump, tightenthrough bolts (5) to a torque of 25 ft.-lbs.and drive gear nut (23) and relief valvebody (24) to a torque of 30-40 ft.-lbs.

37. R&R STEERING MOTOR. Re-move hood and side panels and bracesnecessary to gain access to steeringmotor. Disconnect and tag hydrauliclines leading to steering motor. Hydraulic lines and motor parts should besealed to prevent contamination. Loosenpinch bolt (4—Fig. 42) in coupler,remove steering column lower bracketscrews and remove motor with bracket.Unscrew motor retaining screws andseparate motor from bracket.

Reverse removal procedure to installsteering motor. Refer to paragraph 34for bleeding procedure.

38. OVERHAUL STEERING MO-TOR. Refer to paragraph 21 and Fig. 28for steering motor overhaul.

FRONT WHEELDRiVE

44. Front wheel drive is offered as anoption on 8700, 9700, TW-10, TW-20 andTW-30 models. Major components arethe transfer box, front axle, differential,wheel hubs, final drive planetary units

35 36 37

Fig. 41—Expioded view of power steering pump used in Modeis 8700, 9700, TW10, TW20 andTW30.

1. Bolt2. Reservoir3. Filter4. Gasket5. Through bolt6. Cover7. "C'ring8. Sealring9. Bearingl)lock

10. Driven gear11. Follow gear12. Woodruff key13. Body15. Ring dowel16. Sealring17. Sealring18. Flange housing19. OUaeal

20. Snap ring21. "O"ring22. Drivei^ar23. Nut24. Plug25. Shim26. Spring31. "Coring32. Relief valve

34. Flow control valve35. Spring36. Seal37. Plug38. Vent39. Seal40. Spring41. "E"ring

17

SHOP MANUAL Paragraphs 32-44

To remove pivot pins and bushingsfrom front support (1—Fig. 40) andbracket (21), remove front axle foraccess. Renew front axle center member(23) if pivot pins are excessively worn ordamaged. Use suitable driving tool toremove bushings. New bushings are pre-sized.

32. TIE ROD AND TOE-IN. Recommended toe-in is V4 to V2-inch. To adjusttoe-in, remove bolt securing sleeve(5—Fig. 40) to tie rod (6) and loosenclamp on sleeve. Turn sleeve (5) untildesired toe-in is obtained. Tightenclamp, install bolt securing sleeve to tierod and recheck toe-in measurement.

FRONT SUPPORT (PEDESTAL)

33. REMOVE AND REINSTALL. Toremove front support casting (1—Fig.40), remove radiator as outlined inparagraph 152. Remove front axleassembly as outlined in paragraph 29.Attach a hoist or other device to frontsupport casting and unscrew retainingbolts and nuts.

To install front support casting, attachfront support casting to engine usingfour upper bolts and tighten bolts to180-220 ft.-lbs. Be sure oil pan capscrews are tight and measure gapbetween front support and oil pan atattaching bolt holes. Loosen the fourinstalled cap screws, then install the twolower screws using shims equal to themeasured clearance. Shims are availablein thicknesses of 0.014, 0.017, 0.021,0.024 and 0.027 inch. Tighten frontsupport to cylinder block bolts to 180-220ft. lbs., then tighten front support to oilpan cap screws to 270-330 ft.-lbs. Installfront axle and radiator by reversingremoval procedure.

POWER STEERING SYSTEM

These models are equipped with ahydrostatic power steering system con-sisting of a steering cylinder attached tothe front axle, a Ross-type steeringmotor and a tilting steering gearmechanism.

34. FLUID AND BLEEDING. UseFord M-2C41A fluid in this system. Fluidlevel should be kept at bottom ofreservoir filler neck. System capacity is7.8 US pints. Reservoir (2—Fig. 41)should be disassembled for cleaning andnew filter (3) installed after each 600hours of operation.

System is self-bleeding. Wheneverpower steering system has been disas-sembled for any reason, after reassem-bly, refill fluid reservoir, start engine torun at low idle rpm and operate steeringfuU right to full left through at least fivecomplete cycles. Replenish reservoir

fluid as needed to maintain level. Systemis free of trapped air when no bubblesappear, steering is firm and reservoirlevel remains steady at full.

35. PRESSURE AND FLOW. System pressure is regulated at 1950-2100psi on TW-30 or 1550-1650 psi on allother models by the pump pressurerelief valve. Rate of flow should be 4.2gpm at 1000 engine rpm.

36. R&R AND OVERHAUL PUMP.For exploded view of pump refer to Fig.41. Clean pump and surrounding areaand disconnect pump pressure andreturn lines. Remove two cap screwssecuring pump to engine front cover andlift off pump and reservoir as a unit.

Relief valve is now accessible. Shims(25) are available in thicknesses of 0.010,0.015 and 0.060 inch to adjust reliefvalve opening pressure. A change ofshim pack thickness of 0.005 inch willalter opening pressure approximately 35psi.

To disassemble the pump, bend backtab washer and remove shaft nut (23),drive gear (22) and key (12). Mark ornote relative positions of flange housing(18), pump body (13) and cover (6); thenremove pump through bolts (5). Keepparts in their proper relative positionwhen disassembling pump unit. Ifnecessary, flow control valve compo-nents can now be removed. Pump gears(10 and 11) are available in a matched setonly. Bearing blocks (9) are availableseparately but should be renewed inpairs if renewal is because of wear.Bearing blocks should also be renewed

with gear set if any shaft or bore wear isevident. Examine body (13) for wear ingear running track. If track is worndeeper than 0.025 inch on inlet side,body must be renewed. Renew all "0"rings and seals.

When reassembling the pump, tightenthrough bolts (5) to a torque of 25 ft.-lbs.and drive gear nut (23) and relief valvebody (24) to a torque of 30-40 ft.-lbs.

37. R&R STEERING MOTOR. Re-move hood and side panels and bracesnecessary to gain access to steeringmotor. Disconnect and tag hydrauliclines leading to steering motor. Hydraulic lines and motor parts should besealed to prevent contamination. Loosenpinch bolt (4—Fig. 42) in coupler,remove steering column lower bracketscrews and remove motor with bracket.Unscrew motor retaining screws andseparate motor from bracket.

Reverse removal procedure to installsteering motor. Refer to paragraph 34for bleeding procedure.

38. OVERHAUL STEERING MO-TOR. Refer to paragraph 21 and Fig. 28for steering motor overhaul.

FRONT WHEELDRiVE

44. Front wheel drive is offered as anoption on 8700, 9700, TW-10, TW-20 andTW-30 models. Major components arethe transfer box, front axle, differential,wheel hubs, final drive planetary units

35 36 37

Fig. 41—Expioded view of power steering pump used in Modeis 8700, 9700, TW10, TW20 andTW30.

1. Bolt2. Reservoir3. Filter4. Gasket5. Through bolt6. Cover7. "C'ring8. Sealring9. Bearingl)lock

10. Driven gear11. Follow gear12. Woodruff key13. Body15. Ring dowel16. Sealring17. Sealring18. Flange housing19. OUaeal

20. Snap ring21. "O"ring22. Drivei^ar23. Nut24. Plug25. Shim26. Spring31. "Coring32. Relief valve

34. Flow control valve35. Spring36. Seal37. Plug38. Vent39. Seal40. Spring41. "E"ring

17

Paragraphs 45-47

and front axle assembly. The front wheeldrive transfer hox holts directly onto thetransmission handhrake housing assem-hly and is luhricated hy oil overflow fromrear axle housing.

There are three axles used on sixcylinder tractors equipped with frontwheel drive. Axle APL 4053/CK is usedon 8700, 9700 models, axle APL 3052/Bis used on TW-10 and TW-20 models andaxle APL 3054/BK is used on TW-30models. The axle type numher isstamped on an identification plateattached to the rear face of the axle nextto the differential housing.

The differential is offset to the left ofthe axle center line and is driven fromthe transfer box by a drive shaft hav-ing a U-joint at both ends and a slidingcoupling at the rear. Late 8700, 9700models and all TW models are equippedwith a limited slip differential.

At each axle end is a huh that containsa planetary reduction gear set. Each huhis held in place hy a pair of king pins.Steering is controlled hy a single,adjustahle tie rod connected betweenthe steering knuckles. The powersteering cylinder is holted to thesteering arm on the left-hand steeringknuckle.

FRONT AXLE

45. R&R FRONT AXLE AND PIVOTSUPPORT. To remove front axle(11—Fig. 47) and pivot support (6), firstremove drive shaft. Remove frontweights and weight bracket, thensupport front of tractor and remove boltsecuring steering cylinder hose supportto rear of pivot support (6). Disconnectsteering cylinder from left hand steeringarm and pivot support. Temporarilysecure steering cylinder to underside oftractor. Support front axle (11), removebolts securing pivot support (6) to frontsupport, then roll axle assembly (11)away from tractor.

Inspect components for excessivewear or damage and renew as necessary.Install shims (4) to reduce pivot support(6) end play to 0.008-0.016 inch. Toinstall front axle (11) and pivot support(6) assembly, reverse removal proce-dure. Tighten fasteners to followingtorques: pivot support to axle housingbolts—302 ft.-lbs.; steering cylinder tosteering arm nut—217 ft.-lbs.; driveshaft flange nuts—36 ft.-lbs.

45A. TOE-IN. Toe-in is adjusted bydetaching tie rod end and rotating end.Correct toe-in is 0-1/8 inch. Check forbent or excessively worn parts if toe-inis not correct.

46. WHEEL HUB AND PLANE-TARY CARRIER. To remove wheel hub

(25—Fig. 48) and planetary assembly(12), raise tractor and remove wheel onside requiring service. Drain oil in hub(25) and scribe alignnnent marks onplanetary carrier (12) and hub (25). Re-move retaining bolts (11) and removecarrier (12). Detach snap-ring (15) andremove sun gear (16).

To install carrier assembly (12), makesure alignment marks on carrier and hub(25) are aligned, then secure carrierassembly to hub (25). Bolts (11) should

FORD

be tightened to a torque of 18 ft.-lbs. Fillassembly with clean oil (specificationM2C105-A, MIL-L-2105B SAE90 orAPI GL-5 SAE9()), until sight plug holeoverflows. Capacity of carrier assemblyis approximately 2.1 pints for 8700 and9700 models, 1.8 pints for TW-10 andTW-20 models and 3.2 pints for TW-30models.

47. OVERHAUL. Unscrew slottednut (17-Fig. 48) and remove planetaryring gear (18) and carrier (19) from hub

18

Fig. 42—Viewoftiiting steering coiumn used on Modeis 8700, 9700, TW10, TW20and TW30,1. Motor2. Lower bracket3. Upper bracket4. Pmchbolt5. Coupler

6. Seal7. Tube8. Flange cover9. Thrust washer

10. Flange extension11. Retainer12. Spring washer13. Cover

14. Tilt lever15. Tilt mechanism16. Steering mechanism17. Nut18. Cap

Fig. 47—Expioded view offront axie housing and

steering knuckie.1. Tierod2. Cup3. Tie rod end4. Shim5. Pin0. Pivot support7. Roll pin8. Dust cap9. Bearing

10. Dishedcover11. Axle housing12. King pin cap13. Shim14. Kingpin15. **O"rmg16. Retaining rinjr17. Ring18. Shaft seal19. Bushing20. Steering knuckle

18

SHOP MANUAL Paragraphs 48-50

(25). Remove snap ring (20) fromplanetary ring gear (18) and remove ringgear carrier (19). Pull hub and bearingassembly (25) carefully off hub carrier(31).

On 8700, 9700, TW-10 and TW-20models, extract shim (22) from hubcarrier. Remove bolts securing hubcarrier (31) to steering knuckle andremove carrier. Axle shaft (36) may nowbe removed from housing. Disassembleplanetary carrier (12), inspect compo-nents and renew as necessary. Removeoil seal (30), spacer (29—on TW30models only), inner bearing (28) coneand dust seal (27) from hub if damagedor worn excessively. If damage orexcessive wear is apparent, renewbushing (32) and oil seal (33) usingsuitable tools. Insert axle shaft (36) intoaxle housing (11—Fig. 47), then installhub carrier (31—Fig. 48) and secure tosteering knuckle (20—Fig. 47) with hexhead bolts. Tighten bolts to a torque of155ft.-lbs.

NOTE: Two shorter bolts must beinstalled in two lowest holes to preventinterference between steering Itnuckieand axle yoke on full lock.

Install bearing (21 and 28—Fig. 48)cups in hub (25) and bearing (28) cone toinboard side of hub (25). On TW 30models, install washer (29), then on allmodels install seals (27 and 30). Installhub (25) on hub carrier (31) so carriercontacts hub.

Place ring gear carrier (19) in ringgear (18) and secure with snap ring (20).Position ring gear carrier (19) oversplines of hub carrier (31) and push in.Apply grease to slotted nut (17) theninstall finger tight onto carrier shaft(31).

48. Hub roller bearings (21 and28—Fig. 48) are preloaded by turningslotted nut (17). Refer to Fig. 49 andmeasure rolling resistance of hub rollerbearings. Wrap a strong cord aroundwheel stud and hub, then attach a pullscale (S) to cord. Pull scale and notereading as hub rotates. Nut (17) isproperly tightened when pulling re-sistance is between 9-14 lbs. If originalbearings are used, reading may be 4.5-7lbs.

NOTE: If slotted nut (17) locks beforeproper pulling resistance is obtained onModeis 8700, 9700, TW-10 and TW-20, itwill be necessary to replace shim (22—Fig. 48). Shim (22) is avaiiabie in metricsizes from 5.2 to 5.4 mm. On ModelTW-30, install a lockwasher and a secondslotted nut (17) to serve as a locknut.Bend lockwasher tabs to engage bothnuts.

Install sun gear (16) on axle shaft (36)and secure with snap ring (15). To checkaxle shaft (36) end play, push axle shaftinward. While shaft is being turned byan assistant, turn hub (25) to left andright steering lock positions. With wheelat full lock position, refer to Fig. 50 andmeasure depth of shaft end (36) fromjoint face of hub (25). Refer to Fig. 51and using a similar setup, determineheight of detent plug (14 - Fig. 48) abovejoint face of carrier (12-Fig. 51). Sub-tract height of detent plug (14—Fig. 48)from previously measured depth of shaftend to obtain shaft end play. Drive outdetent plug (14) and install shims (13)equal to measured shaft end play so endplay will be zero with hub at full steeringlock. Shims (13) are available in metric

thicknesses of 0.3,0.5,1.0 and 3.0 mm.

49. R&R AXLE SHAFTS. To removeaxle shafts (36—Fig. 48), refer toparagraph 46 and remove wheel hub andplanetary assembly. Axle shaft can nowbe removed. Inspect bushings (19—Fig.47 and 32-Fig. 48) and seals (18-Fig.47 and 33—Fig. 48) and renew ifnecessary. To install axle shaft, reverseremoval procedure. Refer to paragraph48 to adjust axle shaft end play and hubbearing preload.

STEERING KNUCKLEAND KING PINS

50. R&R AND OVERHAUL. Refer toFig. 47 for an exploded view of steering

Fig. 48—Exploded Waiv of hub, C9rrl9r and planetary driva uaad In modala aqulppad with frontwhaal drIva, Waahar (29) la uaad In TW'3O modala only,

1. Thrust washer2. Spacer 11. Cap screw3. Planetary pinion 12. Planetary carrier4. Needle bearings 13. Spacing washer5. Sealing ring 14. Detent plug6. Screw plug 15. Snap ring7. Roll pin 16. Sun gear8. RoUpin 17. Slotted nut9. Sealing cover 18. Ring gear

10. Pin 19. Ring gear carrier

20. Snap ring21. Bearing22. Shim (all models except

TW30)23. Wheel nut24. Soring washer25. Hub26. Wheel bolt27. Dust shield

28. Bearing29. Washer (TW 30)30. Seal31. Hub carrier32. Bushing33. Seal34. RingSo. Retaining ring36. Axle shaft

19

Paragraphs 51-52

knuckle assembly. Knuckle (20) may beremoved without disassembly of finaldrive components.

Refer to paragraph 49 for removal ofaxle shaft. Remove upper and lower kingpin caps (12) and tie rod (1). If leftknuckle assembly is to be serviced,remove steering cylinder from steeringarm. Remove shims (13) and set aside forinstallation in original location. Removeking pins (14) and bearing cones andmark for return to original location.Remove steering knuckle (20) from axlehousing. If renewal is necessary, removebearing (9) cups from axle housing yoke.Dished covers (10) should be renewed ifdamaged. Examine all components forburrs, scoring and excessive wear andrenew as necessary.

51. If removed, install dished covers(10) and bearing (9) cups into axlehousing yokes. Install "0" ring (15), dustcap (8) and bearing (9) cone to each kingpin (14). Mount steering knuckle on axlehousing yoke and install upper king pin(14). O astalled shim (13)with gT >n it over king pin(14). In ip (12) on steeringknuckl en socket headscrews j . and hex headscrews Repeat procedureon lowfci Aiii^ yui aaoembly. Install axleshaft and hub carrier and tighten hubcarrier cap screws to a torque of 155ft.-lbs. Check steering torque by attach-ing Ford tool No. T3119 steering knuckleadaptor and a torque wrench to uppercap (12) just above king pin. Measuretorque required to turn steeringknuckle. If steering torque is not13.3-15.5 ft-lbs., install or remove shims(13) as required to obtain desiredtorque reading. Shims are available inmetric thicknesses from 2.6 to 3.3 mm.Thickness of upper and lower shimpacks should be equal, however, it maybe necessary to transfer shims betweenshim packs so drive shaft is centered inaxle housing. With steering knuckle instraight ahead position, rotate axle shaftand check for binding. Transfer shimsbetween shim packs (13) to remove anybinding.

DIFFERENTIAL ANDBEVEL GEARS

52. REMOVE AND REINSTALL. Remove front wheels, disconnect driveshaft from differential input flange anddrain axle housing oil. Remove capscrews securing hub carriers (31—Fig.48) to steering knuckles. Support hubsthen pull hubs and front axle drive shaftsout far enough to disengage drive shaftinner ends from differential side gears.

NOTE: Remove two differentialhousing cap screws and replace with

FORD

F/g. 49—Maasura hubbaaring pra-load by maas-uring rolling torqua using aspring scaia (S). Turn nut(17} to adfust pra-ioad. Saa

taxt.

Fig, 50—Viawshaft proiaction

mant.

showingmaasura-

E. StraightedgeM. Depth micrometer25. Hut) joint face36. Axle shaft

Fig. 51—Maasura haight ofdatant plug as outiinad in

text.

B. Gage blocksE. StraightedgeM. Depth micrometer12. HUD carrier

20

SHOP MANUAL

guide studs for ease of differentialhousing removal and installation.

Carefully remove differential housingassembly using a suitable floor jack orhoist. To reinstall reverse removalprocedure. Differential housing to axlehousing screws should be tightened to atorque of 61 ft.-lbs. Fill axle housingwith API GL-5 SAE 90 lubricant. Axlecapacity is 14.8 pints on 8700 and 9700,16.9 pints on TW-10 and TW-20 or 15.8pints on TW-30.

53. OVERHAUL (ALL MODELSEXCEPT TW-30). Mount differentialhousing in a vise, then unscrew bevelpinion nut (15—Fig. 52) and adjustingnuts (6). Mark bearing caps (2) accordingto position, remove caps and lift outdifferential.

Remove bearing (7) cones fromdifferential case halves (4 and 9-Fig.53), using a suitable puller. Removebevel ring gear retaining cap screws andseparate gear (4—Fig. 52) from differ-ential case halves then separate halves.

Remove washer (14—Fig. 52), driveflange (13), and dust seal (12) frompinion shaft. Using a suitable press orhammer, remove bevel pinion gear (3)from differential housing (8). If re-quired, press bearing (5) cone off bevelpinion shaft (3) and remove bearing (5)cup and shim (17) from differential hous-ing. Remove oil seal (11) and drive bear-ing (10) out from rear of differential car-rier.

Inspect all components and renew asnecessary. Bevel ring (4) and pinion gear(3) are available as a matched set only.Identical serial numbers will be stampedon outer edge of bevel ring gear (4) andon end of bevel pinion gear (3).

If gears require renewal, the followingprocedure must be followed to deter-mine pinion bearing shim (17) thickness:All measurements should be metric orconversion will be necessary. Refer toFig. 54 and install pinion setting mandrelNo. T3123 and dummy pinion No.T3123-3 on Models 8700 and 9700, orpinion setting mandrel No. T3131 anddummy pinion No. T3131-1 on ModelsTW-10 and TW-20. Apply pressure tomandrel when measurements are taken.Height of dummy pinion (a) + gap be-tween mandrel and dummy pinion (b) +half the diameter of the differentialbores (c) = dimension (x).

Note that dummy pinion height (a) ismarked on side of tool. Dimension (c), is1.96 inches for Models 8700 and 9700,1.93 inches for TW-10 and TW-20models. Measure overall width ofassembled pinion bearing (5—Fig. 52)cone and cup, then add bearing width toetched pinion setting number (in milli-meters) next to serial number on gear

end of bevel pinion (3). Subtract resultfrom dimension (x—Fig. 54) to obtainrequired thickness of pinion bearingshim (17—Fig. 52). Shims are availablein thicknesses of 0.1 through 0.5 mm.Install shims so tolerance is within plus

Paragraph 53

or minus 0.05 mm of calculated thick-ness. Install shim (17) and bearing (5)cup in differential housing and pressbearing (5) cone on pinion gear shaftuntil seated against shoulder.

To determine pinion bearing pre-load.

12

Fig. S2—Explodad viaw ofdiffarantial housing forModaia $700, 9700, TW-10

and TW'2O.

1. Lock wire2. Bearing cap3. Pinion gear4. Ring gear5. Bearing6. Adjustmgnut7. Bearing8. Housing9. Shim

10. BearingU. Shaft seal12. Dust shield13. Drive flange14. Washer15. Hex nut16. Lock plate17. Shim

Fig. 53—Exptodad viaw oflimitad slip diffarantial.Standard diffarantial issimilar but clutch platas(5 and 6) ara not used and athrust washar and shim arausad in ptaca of prassura

Plata {8}.

1. Thrust washers2. Pinion gear3. Shalt4. Case half5. Drive plate6. Driven plate7. Side gear8. Pressure plate9. Case half

21

Paragraph 53 Cont.

install bearing (10) cup without shim (9),into small bore at rear of differentialcarrier (8). Install pinion shaft (3) intodifferential carrier, then insert adjust-able spacer, tool No. 3120 for 8700, 9700models or No. T3130 for TW-10 andTW-20 models ( T - F i g . 55) so itsurrounds pinion shaft (3—Fig. 52).Spacer roll pins should protrude as muchas possible. Install bearing (10) conewithout oil seal (11), then install driveflange (13), washer (14) and retainingnut (15). Hold drive flange and tightennut in small increments until torquerequired to turn pinion (3) is 10-20in.-lbs. Remove pinion shaft (3) fromdifferential housing (8). Carefully re-move adjustable spacer. Using a suitablegage, measure overall height of adjust-able spacer. This height will be requiredthickness of shim (9). Shims areavailable in thicknesses from 5.6 mm to6.3 mm.

Reinstall pinion shaft (3) into differ-ential housing (8) and place proper shim(9) on pinion shaft with chamfer towardsgear end. Press bearing (10) cone intoposition. Install new oil seal (11) with lipfacing inward. Coat threads of retaining

Fig, 54—Diagram of pinion shimming toolsand maasuring points, Hafar to taxt.

1. Pinion setting mandrel2. Differential housing3. Dummy pinion

nut (15) with grease, then install driveflange (13), washer (14) and retainingnut (15). While holding flange, tightenretaining nut to a torque of 260 ft.-lbs.Install new cotter key on 8700, 9700models or new lock plate (16) on TW-10and TW-20 models.

Install bevel ring gear (4) on differ-ential case half (9-Fig . 53), instaU boltsand tighten to a torque of 155 ft.-lbs. Ifequipped with limited slip differential,refer to next paragraph for differentialassembly. On models not equipped withlimited slip, install new lock plate overdifferential case to bevel ring gear bolts.Install pinion gears (2) with thrustwashers (1) on pinion shafts (3) andinstall assembly with side gear (7) intodifferential case half (9j. To determinebacklash of pinion gears (2), hold threepinion gears and measure backlash offourth gear. Backlash should be 0.006-0.008 inch. To reduce backlash install a

FORD

thicker shim behind side gear. Shims arepinned into the differential case half.When new shims are installed, securingpins should be below surface of shim.Shims must be installed with oil groovesfacing side gear. Repeat procedure forother case half. After obtaining correctbacklash, assemble differential casehalves making sure projections on pinionthrust washers are positioned as shownin Fig. 56. Part numbers are stamped onouter edge of both differential casehalves (4 and 9 - F i g . 53) and shouldalign when halves are assembled.

To assemble limited slip differential onmodels so equipped, proceed as follows:Refer to Fig. 53 and assemble pressureplate (8) and clutch plates (5 and 6) onside gear (7) being sure that polishedside of pressure plate (8) is towardsgear. Carefully insert gear and clutchpack assembly into differential case half(4 or 9) so clutch plate (5) tabs engage

Fig, 5$—Proiactions (1) onthrust washars must matawith diffarantial casa haif

as shown.

Fig. 57—Maasura dutchpack fraa piay by insertingdiai gaga (f) through casahaif (2) to contact dutch

Plata,

Fig, 55—Bafar to taxt to adjust pinion baar-ing praioad.

22

SHOP MANUAL

slots in case half. Assemble remainingdifferential case half, side gear andclutch pack. Install bevel pinions (2),thrust washers (1) and differential shafts(3). Assemble differential halves (4 and9) and tighten retaining screws to atorque of 85 ft.-lbs. To check free play ofeach clutch pack, refer to Fig. 57 andmount a dial gage on one end ofdifferential case so the plunger contactsthe outer clutch plate. Use two screw-drivers to move clutch plate assembly upand down while noting movement of dialgage needle. Allowable free play is0.004-0.008 inch. If free play is exces-sive, side gear pressure plate (8—Fig.53) must be changed. Pressure plates (8)are available in thicknesses of 2.8, 2.9and 3.0 mm. If after installation ofthickest pressure plate free play remainsexcessive, then a new set of clutch plates(5 and 6) must be installed. Repeat pro-cedure for opposite side of differential.

On all models, note difference inwidths of bearings (7—Fig. 52) theninstall bearing cones on differential casehalves (4 and 9—Fig. 53) so widerbearing is on ring gear case half (9).Install differential assembly into housing(8—Fig. 52). Install bearing caps (2)making sure alignment marks (madeduring disassembly) are aligned. Screwadjusting nuts (6) hand tight, thentighten bearing cap bolts to a torque of140 ft.-lbs. Bevel ring gear (4) backlashis reduced by moving gear (4) towardspinion (3) by adjustment of slotted nuts(6). Correct backlash is 0.008-0.011 inch.Backlash should be measured with a dialgage mounted to differential case (8).

To check differential bearing (7)pre-load, mount a dial gage so tip of dialgage contacts back (flat) side of bevelring gear (4). Move differential back andforth while tightening adjusting nuts (6)until no movement of differential isnoted on dial gage. Pre-load bearings(7) by tightening adjusting nut (6)opposite bevel ring gear (4) IV2 to 2V2slots, as necessary to align cotter keywith a slot in nut (6). Re-check bevel ringgear (4) backlash as previously des-cribed. Repeat steps as necessary toobtain proper bearing pre-load and gearbacklash. Measure bevel ring gear (4)runout on back surface of gear. If runoutexceeds 0.003 inch then gear is seatedimproperly on differential case andshould be removed and inspected.

Refer to Fig. 58 for proper bevel ringand pinion gear tooth contact pattern. Ifpinion shimming procedure wasn't per-formed properly, ideal tooth pattern willnot be obtained and shimming procedurewill have to be repeated.

Insert new cotter keys to secureadjusting nuts (6—Fig. 52). On modelswithout a limited slip differential, safetywire differential case half securing bolts.

Paragraph 54 I

Fig 58—Views of bevel ring gear tooth contact pattarns. Refer to taxt to datarminethickness of shim (17-Fig. 52 or IB-Fig. 59) // appropriate tools are avaiiabie.

A. Proper tooth contact-coastside pattern

B. Proper tooth contact-driveside pattern

C. Pinion gear requires thickershim-coast side pattern

D. Pinion gear requires thickershim drive side pattern

E. Pinion gear requires thinnershim-coast side pattern

F. Pinion gear requires thinnershim-drive side pattern

To install differential assembly refer toparagraph 52.

54. OVERHAUL (TW-30 MODELS).Mount differential housing (7—Fig. 59)in a vise and loosen twelve cap screwsthat retain bevel ring gear (3) todifferential case half (9—Fig. 53). Driveout roll pins that lock adjusting nuts(4—Fig. 59), then unscrew and removeadjusting nuts (4). Remove bearing (5and 6) cups. Note that differentialcomponents must be disassembled indifferential housing and cannot be

removed as a unit assembly. Removering gear retaining screws then reposi-tion housing so pinion shaft is horizontal.Separate differential case halves (4 and9—Fig. 53) and remove both pinionshafts (3), pinion gears (2) and thrustwashers (1). Remove two halves (4 and9) from housing separately. Separatebevel ring gear (3—Fig. 59) fromdifferential case half. If necessary,remove bearing cones from differentialcase halves. Remove retaining nut(14), washer (13) and drive flange (12)

Fig. 59—Exploded view offront wheel drive differen-tiai housing for TW-30

modais.

1. Bevel pinion gear2. Bearing3. Bevel ring gear4. Adjusting nut5. Bearing6. Bearing7. Housing8. Sleeve9. Bearing

10. Shaft seal11. Dust shield12. Drive flange13. Washer14. Nut15. Lock plate16. Shim

23

Paragraphs 56-59

from bevel pinion gear (1), then drive orpress bevel pinion gear from housing.Remove and discard collapsible sleeve(8). Remove oil seal (10) and bearing (9)cone from rear of housing (7), and ifnecessary, drive out bearing (2) cup.

Clean and inspect all components andrenew as necessary. Bevel ring andpinion gears are available only as amatched set. Identical serial numberswill be stamped on outer edge of bevelring gear (3) and on end of bevel piniongear (1). If housing, bearings, differ-ential case or ring and pinion gears havebeen renewed, then the followingshimming procedure must be followed todetermine pinion bearing shim (16)thickness: All measurements should bemetric or conversion will be necessary.Refer to Fig. 54 and install dummypinion tool No. T3131 into bore ofdifferential housing, then install pinionsetting mandrel, tool No. T3131 intodifferential bearing bores.

NOTE: Mandrel is smaller at one end,install small end of mandrel tool No.T3131 into bearing bore on bevel ringgear side.

Apply pressure to mandrel as follow-ing measurements shown in Fig. 54 aretaken: Height of dummy pinion (a) +gap between dummy pinion and mandrel(b) + half the diameter of differentialbores (c) = dimension (x).

Dummy pinion height should be 1.93inches. Measure overall width of assem-bled pinion bearing (2—Fig. 59) cone andcup, then add bearing width to etchedpinion setting number (in millimeters)next to serial number on gear end ofbevel pinion (1). Subtract result fromdimension (x—Fig. 54) to obtain re-quired thickness of pinion bearing shim(16—Fig. 59). Shims are available inthicknesses of 0.1 through 0.5 mm.Install shims so tolerance is within plusor minus 0.05 mm of calculated thick-ness. Install shim (16) and bearing (2)cup in housing and press bearing (2) coneon pinion gear shaft until seated againstshoulder.

To determine pinion bearing pre-load,install bearing (9) cup into small bore atrear of differential carrier (7) and installpinion gear (1). Install a new collapsiblesleeve (8) on bevel pinion shaft, theninstall bearing (9) cone and oil seal (10).Coat threads of retaining nut (14), installwasher (13) and drive flange (12) theninstall nut (14) finger tight. Beforedetermining pinion (9) bearing pre-load,the resistance of oil seal (10) must bedetermined. Apply a torque wrench toflange nut (14), turn pinion (1) shaft andrecord torque required to turn shaft.This result will be oil seal (10)resistance. While holding drive flange

24

(12) with a suitable tool, tightenretaining nut (14) in small incrementsuntil torque required to turn assembly isbetween 10-20 in.-lbs., after addingresistance of oil seal (10). If desiredtorque reading is exceeded, then bearingpre-load is excessive and a new sleeve(8) must be installed and bearingpre-load readjusted.

Install bevel ring gear (3) onto differ-ential case half (9—Fig. 53). Installpressure plates (8) on side gears sopolished side is towards gear andassemble clutch disc plates (5 and 6) onside gears (7). Install gear and clutchcomponents into differential case halves(4 and 9). Refer to Fig. 53 for properclutch pack assembly sequence. Matedifferential halves (4 and 9), install ringgear retaining screws and tighten to atorque of 155 ft.-lbs. Refer to Fig. 57 andcheck clutch pack free play as follows:Mount a dial gage on differential case sogage plunger contacts outer clutch plate.Use two screwdrivers to move clutchplate assembly up and down and notemovement of gage needle. Allowablefree play is 0.004-0.008 inch. Adjust freeplay by changing thickness of pressureplate (18-Fig. 53). Pressure plates (8)are available in 2.8, 2.9 and 3.0 mmsizes. If after installation of thickestpressure plate (8) free play remains ex-cessive, a new set of clutch plates (5 and6) must be installed. Repeat instructionsfor opposite differential case half.

Separate case halves (4 and 9) forinstallation in differential housing (7—Fig. 59). Note that bearing (5) is widerthan bearing (6) and bearing (5) must beinstalled on ring gear differential casehalf (9 -F ig . 53). While supportingdifferential housing with pinion gear in ahorizontal position, install ring gearwith differential case half (9) and clutchassembly. Install opposite differentialcase half and clutch assembly then whileholding case half (4), install differentialshafts (3) complete with bevel piniongears (2) and thrust washers (1). Be sureprojections on thrust washers mate withcase half as shown in Fig. 56. Mate dif-ferential halves and install ring gearscrews but do not tighten at this time.Install bearing (5 and 6-Fig. 59) cupsand adjusting nuts (4). Tighten bevelring gear cap screws to a torque of 155ft.-lbs.

Backlash between ring and piniongears should be 0.008-0.011 inch and isadjusted by turning adjusting nuts(4—Fig. 59). To check differentialbearing (5 and 6) pre-load, mount a dialindicator so tip of gage contacts back(flat) side of bevel ring gear (3). Whileprying differential side to side, turnadjusting nut (4) opposite bevel ringgear just until no movement of differ-ential assembly is noted on dial gage.

FORD

Pre-load bearings (5 and 6) by tighteningadjusting nut (4) opposite bevel ringgear lVz-2Vz slots, as necessary, to alignlocking roll pin with a slot in nut (4).Re-check bevel ring gear to pinion gearbacklash. With dial gage tip stillcontacting back of bevel ring gear, checkfor ring gear runout. If runout exceeds0.003 inch then gear is seated improper-ly on differential case and should beremoved and inspected.

Refer to Fig. 58 for proper bevel ringand pinion gear tooth contact pattern. Ifpinion shimming procedure wasn't per-formed properly, ideal tooth pattern willnot be obtained and shimming procedurewill have to be repeated.

To install differential assembly, referto paragraph 52.

FRONT SUPPORT

56. REMOVE AND REINSTALL. Toremove front support, refer to para-graph 45 and separate front axleassembly from tractor then refer toparagraph 33 for front support removaland installation.

POWER STEERING SYSTEM

57. The power steering system is thesame as used on two wheel drive models.Refer to paragraphs 34 through 38 forservice.

DRIVE SHAFT

58. R&R AND OVERHAUL. Toremove drive shaft, remove eightlocknuts at transfer box output flangeand lower rear of shaft to ground. Re-move eight cap screws and locknuts atdifferential input flange and lower shaftto ground.

Inspect all components for damage orexcessive wear and renew as necessary.If U-joints are renewed, drive shaftmust be balanced.

To install drive shaft, reverse removalprocedure. Tighten all cap screws andlocknuts to a torque of 36 ft.-lbs.

TRANSFER BOX

59. OPERATION. The transfer box ismounted on the transmission handbrakehousing as shown in Fig. 60. Thetransfer box output shaft is supported atthe rear by needle roller bearing (2)located within the hollow shaft of thetransmission handbrake while the frontis supported by tapered roller bearing(11). The transfer box assembly is actu-ated by a control rod that passes throughthe cab floor and connects to a controlvalve designed to divert oil from thetractor hydraulic system to clutch piston

SHOP MANUAL

Fig. $0—Sectional viaw of transfar box assambiy.

1. Handbrake housing2. Roller bearing3. Driven plat»4. Drive plates5. Clutch drume. Retainer ring

7. Split ring8. Transfer box hou^g9. Snap ring

10. Output sliaft11. Roller bearing12. Cover

13. Output shaft flange14. Oil deflector15. Belleville washers1ft. Clutch piston17. Clutch oil return port18. Snap ring

19. Roll pin and clutch oOfeed port

20. Thrust rin^21. Pressure piece22. Plate earner

Paragraphs 60*61

(16). When the rod is pushed down, thecontrol valve allows hydraulic oO topressurize clutch piston (16) and disen-gage the clutch. When the rod is pulledup, the oil will return to the sumpthrough an oil pipe leading from thecontrol valve to the front of the transferbox case. In this position, clutch plates (3and 4) are engaged as pressure ofBelleville washers (15) against pressurepiece (21) forces clutch plates together.With clutch plates engaged, plate carrier(22) and output shaft (10) rotate andtransfer power to front wheel drive.

60. R&R TRANSMISSION HAND-BRAKE AND TRANSFER BOX. Jackup left side of tractor to diverttransmission oil away from transmissionhandbrake housing. Remove left rearwheel and drain oil from transfer box.Remove locknuts securing drive shaftrear flange to transfer box outputflange. Remove cotter pin, washer andclevis pin from operating rod. Discon-nect main oil feed pipe at top of controlvalve. Disconnect lower end of hand-brake cable from control rod. While sup-porting handbrake/transfer box assem-bly remove hex head bolts that secureassembly to rear axle center housing.Remove complete unit. To reinstallreverse removal procedure. Refer toparagraph 176 and refill transmission oilas required.

61. OVERHAUL. Disconnect clutchoil feed and return lines from trans-fer box housing ports (17 and 19—Fig.60). Remove hex head bolts securingcontrol valve retaining plate to housingand remove valve assembly, retainingplate and oil pipes. Remove remainingbolts and separate transfer box fromhandbrake assembly. Using special toolFord No. T3122 or equivalent removehex bolt, lockplate disc and pin (25—Fig.61) from end of output shaft then removeflange (13). Mark housing and cover forproper alignment during reassembly.Remove cover bolts and transfer boxcover (12). It may be necessary to use ahammer and brass drift to aid in

Fig. BI—Explodad viaw of transfar box.

2. Bearing3. Driven plate4. Drive plate5. Clutch drum6. Retainer ring7. Split rings8. Case9. Snaprin^

10. Output shaft11. Bearing12. Cover13. Output flange14. Oil deflector15. Belleville washers16. Piston18. Snap ring19. RoUpin20. Thrust Hn^21. Pressure piece22. Plate carrier23. Cap screw

24. Lockplate25. Grooved pin26. Disc27. OUseal28. Shim29. *'O"ring30. Shim31. Thrust washer32. Bearing33. Shim34. Ring35. Detent spring36. Ring37. Dowel pins38. Seal ring39. Pressure plate40. Gasket41. Thrust washers42. Bearing43. Oilseid

25

Paragraph 62

removal. Remove clutch and outputshaft assembly snap ring (18). Drive rollpin (19) into transfer box housing fromoutside. Drive or press clutch and outputshaft assembly out of housing from rearand remove clutch drum (5). Roller bear-ings in transfer box may be removed ifnecessary.

Using suitable tools, remove bearinginner race and oil deflector (14) fromoutput shaft. Remove retainer ring (6)from rear of output shaft. Supportoutput shaft and with Ford tool No. 1312or equivalent, compress Belleville wash-ers (15) and remove split rings (7).Remove output shaft components. Re-move snap ring (9) and disassemble pis-ton (16), springs, dowel pins, seals andthrust ring (20). Remove oil seal at rearface of transfer box case. Remove rollerbearing if necessary from front oftransfer box handbrake shaft. Inspecttransfer box components and renew asnecessary.

Control valve must be renewed as aunit assembly if defective.

62. When reassembling, coat periph-ery of oil seals with sealant meetingFord specification ESA-M4G129-A orequivalent. Coat inner seal lips and "0"rings with petroleum jelly.

Install quad ring (34) on piston (16)and quad ring (36) and seal ring (38) onthrust ring (20). Install two dowel pins(37) and four springs (35) in piston (16)and mate thrust ring (20) with piston. In-stall piston and thrust ring assembly onpressure piece (21) and assemble shim(33), thrust bearing (32) and small thrustwasher (31) on pressure piece. Compressunit and retain with snap ring (9).

Install clutch plate carrier (22) inclutch drum. Coat drive plates (4) withoil, then insert components in followingorder: pressure plate (39) with flat sideup, drive plate (4) and driven plate (3)then continue alternating installation ofplates (4 and 3) until remaining platesare installed. If old Belleville washersare to be installed disregard followingparagraph. However, if new Bellevillewashers are necessary use procedure infollowing paragraph to determine shimthickness.

To determine shim (30) thickness,place clutch assembly on output shaftwith clutch drum up. Remove drumwithout moving plates. Coat split rings(7) with petroleum jelly and install tosecure clutch components. Carefullyturn assembly so shaft collar (C—Fig.62) is facing up and measure gap be-tween pressure piece (21) and undersideof output shaft collar (C) using a 0.787inch long gage block (B). Record thismeasurement. Note dimension of Belle-ville washer pack as indicated on packingslip then subtract dimension of washerpack from previously measured gap

FORD

Fig, $2—Viaw showingtransfar box dutch shim-

ming procadura.

E. Gage block (0.787-in.)C. Output shaft collarG. Feeler gage

21. Pressure piece

Fig. 63—Viaw chackingcovar shim thicknass.

M. Depth micrometerS. Output shaft shoulder

Fig. 64—Viaw showingpropar mathod to chack

braka shaft projection,

E. StraightedgeM. Depth micrometerS. Brake driven shaft

26

SHOP MANUAL Paragraphs 63-76

between shaft collar and pressure piece.Result is thickness of shim (30—Fig. 61).Shim is available in metric thicknessesfrom 2.0 mm through 5.0 mm in 0.5 mmincrements. Separate output shaft fromclutch and piston assemblies. Install oOdeflector (14) with lip engaging flat oncollar then press roller bearing (11) coneon front of shaft untO oil deflector (14)and bearing are seated against shaftcollar. Install original or new shim (30)then install Belleville washers (15) withconcave sides facing each other. Installclutch and piston assemblies. Removedrum (5) without disturbing compo-nents, compress clutch and install splitrings (7) on output shaft. Coverretaining ring (6) with petroleum jellyand install over split rings. Reinstallclutch drum.

Install seal (1) in housing (8) using asuitable sealant on seal periphery. Coattransfer box housing bores (wherepiston and thrust ring are located) withpetroleum jelly and lower housing (8)over clutch and output shaft compo-nents. Align one recess in outer edge ofthrust ring (20) with clutch piston oilpressure feed hole (19—Fig. 60) thendrive roll pin into feed hole 0.006 inchfrom outer edge of hole. Roll pin mustengage thrust ring recess to preventturning. Secure clutch piston with snapring (18). Coat outer edge of oil seal (43)with a suitable sealant and press intotransfer box cover with sealing liptowards roller bearing. If front bearingcover outer race was removed installoriginal size shim. Obtain correct outputshaft end play by performing followingshimming procedure: Protect frontcover oil seal from output shaft splinesand install "0" ring (29) on output shaftstem. Coat cover (12) face with sealantthen install cover on housing using align-ment marks made during disassembly.Tighten cap screws to a torque of 32ft.-lbs. Mount transfer box assembly onblocks face down. Measure distance fromrear face of case to output shaft shoulderas shown in Fig. 63. Distance should bebetween 2.216-2.232 inches. Installcorrect thickness of shim (28—Fig. 61) to

obtain proper dimension. After shim-ming cover to proper limits, recordmeasured distance. Install output shaftflange bolts then secure flange (13) tooutput shaft. Tighten flange retainingscrew to 88 ft.-lbs.

63. To determine proper end play be-tween transfer box output shaft anddrive shaft in brake housing assembly,remove brake housing gasket and place astraight edge of known height acrossbrake housing face as shown in Fig. 64.Measure distance from face of brakehousing to edge of brake driven shaft.Subtract previously measured distancefrom transfer box rear face to outputshaft shoulder (Fig. 63), The result(Dimension C - Fig. 65) is the total thick-ness of thrust needle bearing (42-Fig.61) and two thrust washers (41) neededto obtain desired end play. See Fig. 65 todetermine correct bearing/washer thick-nesses. Coat thrust needle bearing andthrust washers with petroleum jelly andinstall on rear of transfer box outputshaft. Washer's polished face must facebearing. Install new needle bearing inbore of brake driven shaft if necessary.Apply sealer. Ford specification ESE-M4G-11-A or equivalent to gasket, theninstall transfer box assembly and controlvalve plate to brake assembly. Tightenhousing cap screws to a torque of 38ft.-lbs. Tighten control valve retainingplate bolts to a torque of 18 ft.-lbs. In-stall clutch, oil return lines and transfercase drain plug.

NOTE: Check for proper alignment ofdrive shaft spiines if drive shaft has beenseparated.

ENGINE ANDCOMPONENTS

R&R ENGINE WITH CLUTCH

76. To remove engine and clutch as-sembly, proceed as follows: Remove

hood side panels, air pre-cleaner, ex-haust pipe and hood top panel. Drainradiator and disconnect radiator hoses.Disconnect transmission oil cooler Uneson units with pressure lubricated trans-missions. If engine is to be disassem-bled, drain oil pan. Disconnect engine oilcooler lines from engine and powersteering tubes from steering motor infront support or cylinder on front axle.Unbolt side braces from radiator shelland support tractor under front end oftransmission. On wide adjustable frontaxle models, drive a wooden blockbetween front axle and pedestal on bothsides, so that front assembly cannot tipsideways. Attach hoist to radiator shell,remove side plates and unbolt frontsupport from engine.

NOTE: Be careful not to lose shims onfront support to oil pan boits. Roil frontend assembly away from engine.

Disconnect battery cables (negativecable first), then disconnect powersteering tubes from pump and hydra-motor steering unit. Disconnect aircleaner hose at intake manifold andmuffler from exhaust manifold on 8000,8600, 8700, and TW-10 models. Discon-nect turbocharger oil lines and manifoldconnections on 9000, 9600, 9700, TW-20and TW-30 models. Plug all openings onturbocharger, oil lines and manifolds.Attach hoist to air cleaner and hoodsupport, unbolt side braces from instru-ment panel support and lift assemblyfrom tractor. Remove fuel tank on 8700,9700, TW-10, TW-20 and TW-30 models.Remove turbocharger intercooler onTW-30 models.

Disconnect electrical wiring, Proof-Meter cable, fuel shut-off cable, fuel lineand throttle linkage from engine.Remove battery cables from starter,remove starter motor, then removeflywheel access cover. Attach hoist toengine with lifting fixture attached withcylinder head bolts. Unbolt engine fromtransmission and lift assembly awaywith hoist.

To reinstall engine, reverse removal

Dimension 'C(inch)

Washer (1)thickness

(inch)

Washer (2)thickness

(inch)

^ ^ Needle Bear-^^ ^ ^ ing thicknes*s^ H (inch)

00

0

0

0

.279-

.284

.110

.0927

.0787

00

0

0

0

.285-

.288

.110

.0984

.0787

00

0

0

0

.289-

.292

.118

.0937

.0787

0.293-0.296

0.118

0.0984

0.0787

0.0.

0.

0.

0.

297-299

110

110

0787

00

0

0

0

.300-

.303

.124

.0984

.0787

0.304-0.309

0.118

0.110

0.0787

0.310-0.313

0.124

0.110

0.0787

00

0

0

0

.314-

.317

.118

.118

.0787

00

0

0

0

.318-

.324

.124

.118

.0787

0.0.

0.

0.

0.

324330

124

129

0787

box output ahaft.

27

SHOP MANUAL Paragraphs 63-76

between shaft collar and pressure piece.Result is thickness of shim (30—Fig. 61).Shim is available in metric thicknessesfrom 2.0 mm through 5.0 mm in 0.5 mmincrements. Separate output shaft fromclutch and piston assemblies. Install oOdeflector (14) with lip engaging flat oncollar then press roller bearing (11) coneon front of shaft untO oil deflector (14)and bearing are seated against shaftcollar. Install original or new shim (30)then install Belleville washers (15) withconcave sides facing each other. Installclutch and piston assemblies. Removedrum (5) without disturbing compo-nents, compress clutch and install splitrings (7) on output shaft. Coverretaining ring (6) with petroleum jellyand install over split rings. Reinstallclutch drum.

Install seal (1) in housing (8) using asuitable sealant on seal periphery. Coattransfer box housing bores (wherepiston and thrust ring are located) withpetroleum jelly and lower housing (8)over clutch and output shaft compo-nents. Align one recess in outer edge ofthrust ring (20) with clutch piston oilpressure feed hole (19—Fig. 60) thendrive roll pin into feed hole 0.006 inchfrom outer edge of hole. Roll pin mustengage thrust ring recess to preventturning. Secure clutch piston with snapring (18). Coat outer edge of oil seal (43)with a suitable sealant and press intotransfer box cover with sealing liptowards roller bearing. If front bearingcover outer race was removed installoriginal size shim. Obtain correct outputshaft end play by performing followingshimming procedure: Protect frontcover oil seal from output shaft splinesand install "0" ring (29) on output shaftstem. Coat cover (12) face with sealantthen install cover on housing using align-ment marks made during disassembly.Tighten cap screws to a torque of 32ft.-lbs. Mount transfer box assembly onblocks face down. Measure distance fromrear face of case to output shaft shoulderas shown in Fig. 63. Distance should bebetween 2.216-2.232 inches. Installcorrect thickness of shim (28—Fig. 61) to

obtain proper dimension. After shim-ming cover to proper limits, recordmeasured distance. Install output shaftflange bolts then secure flange (13) tooutput shaft. Tighten flange retainingscrew to 88 ft.-lbs.

63. To determine proper end play be-tween transfer box output shaft anddrive shaft in brake housing assembly,remove brake housing gasket and place astraight edge of known height acrossbrake housing face as shown in Fig. 64.Measure distance from face of brakehousing to edge of brake driven shaft.Subtract previously measured distancefrom transfer box rear face to outputshaft shoulder (Fig. 63), The result(Dimension C - Fig. 65) is the total thick-ness of thrust needle bearing (42-Fig.61) and two thrust washers (41) neededto obtain desired end play. See Fig. 65 todetermine correct bearing/washer thick-nesses. Coat thrust needle bearing andthrust washers with petroleum jelly andinstall on rear of transfer box outputshaft. Washer's polished face must facebearing. Install new needle bearing inbore of brake driven shaft if necessary.Apply sealer. Ford specification ESE-M4G-11-A or equivalent to gasket, theninstall transfer box assembly and controlvalve plate to brake assembly. Tightenhousing cap screws to a torque of 38ft.-lbs. Tighten control valve retainingplate bolts to a torque of 18 ft.-lbs. In-stall clutch, oil return lines and transfercase drain plug.

NOTE: Check for proper alignment ofdrive shaft spiines if drive shaft has beenseparated.

ENGINE ANDCOMPONENTS

R&R ENGINE WITH CLUTCH

76. To remove engine and clutch as-sembly, proceed as follows: Remove

hood side panels, air pre-cleaner, ex-haust pipe and hood top panel. Drainradiator and disconnect radiator hoses.Disconnect transmission oil cooler Uneson units with pressure lubricated trans-missions. If engine is to be disassem-bled, drain oil pan. Disconnect engine oilcooler lines from engine and powersteering tubes from steering motor infront support or cylinder on front axle.Unbolt side braces from radiator shelland support tractor under front end oftransmission. On wide adjustable frontaxle models, drive a wooden blockbetween front axle and pedestal on bothsides, so that front assembly cannot tipsideways. Attach hoist to radiator shell,remove side plates and unbolt frontsupport from engine.

NOTE: Be careful not to lose shims onfront support to oil pan boits. Roil frontend assembly away from engine.

Disconnect battery cables (negativecable first), then disconnect powersteering tubes from pump and hydra-motor steering unit. Disconnect aircleaner hose at intake manifold andmuffler from exhaust manifold on 8000,8600, 8700, and TW-10 models. Discon-nect turbocharger oil lines and manifoldconnections on 9000, 9600, 9700, TW-20and TW-30 models. Plug all openings onturbocharger, oil lines and manifolds.Attach hoist to air cleaner and hoodsupport, unbolt side braces from instru-ment panel support and lift assemblyfrom tractor. Remove fuel tank on 8700,9700, TW-10, TW-20 and TW-30 models.Remove turbocharger intercooler onTW-30 models.

Disconnect electrical wiring, Proof-Meter cable, fuel shut-off cable, fuel lineand throttle linkage from engine.Remove battery cables from starter,remove starter motor, then removeflywheel access cover. Attach hoist toengine with lifting fixture attached withcylinder head bolts. Unbolt engine fromtransmission and lift assembly awaywith hoist.

To reinstall engine, reverse removal

Dimension 'C(inch)

Washer (1)thickness

(inch)

Washer (2)thickness

(inch)

^ ^ Needle Bear-^^ ^ ^ ing thicknes*s^ H (inch)

00

0

0

0

.279-

.284

.110

.0927

.0787

00

0

0

0

.285-

.288

.110

.0984

.0787

00

0

0

0

.289-

.292

.118

.0937

.0787

0.293-0.296

0.118

0.0984

0.0787

0.0.

0.

0.

0.

297-299

110

110

0787

00

0

0

0

.300-

.303

.124

.0984

.0787

0.304-0.309

0.118

0.110

0.0787

0.310-0.313

0.124

0.110

0.0787

00

0

0

0

.314-

.317

.118

.118

.0787

00

0

0

0

.318-

.324

.124

.118

.0787

0.0.

0.

0.

0.

324330

124

129

0787

box output ahaft.

27

Paragraphs 77-80 FORD

procedures and observe the following:Remove transmission input shaft fromtransmission and place into clutchsplines. As engine is moved towardtransmission, the input shaft willswallow pto shaft. Tighten the 5/8-inchengine to transmission bolts to a torqueof 95-130 ft.-lbs. and 3/4-inch bolts to 180-220ft.-lbs.

NOTE: If oii pan was removed, refer toparagraph 102.

Refer to paragraph 6, 33 or 56 forinstallation of front support to engine.Bleed the fuel injection system as out-lined in paragraph 115 and bleed thepower steering system as outlined inparagraph 7 or 34.

Make connections on 9000, 9600, 9700,TW-20 and TW-30 series turbochargerand prime with oil following procedure inparagraph 137.

ENGINE COMPRESSIONPRESSURES

77. Engine compression should bechecked at cranking speed of 200 rpmwith a maximum allowable variation be-tween cylinders of 20 psi.

NOTE: Considerable variation in com-pression pressures wili be noted atspeeds under 200 rpm.

Compression pressure should be 300-400 psi on Model TW-10, 275-375 psi onModels TW-20 and TW-30 or 380-480 psion all other models.

CYLINDER HEAD

78. REMOVE AND REINSTALL. Toremove cylinder head, drain coolingsystem and proceed as follows: Removeengine hood side panels, air pre-cleaner,exhaust pipe and hood top panel. Discon-nect power steering tubes from Hydra-motor unit, power steering pump andsteering motor. On 8000, 8600, 8700 andTW-10 models, disconnect air cleanerhose from intake manifold and mufflerfrom exhaust manifold. Remove turbo-charger intercooler on TW-30 models.Disconnect and remove turbocharger oillines and manifold connections on 9000,9600, 9700, TW-20 and TW-3Q modelsand remove turbocharger. Plug allopenings on turbocharger, oil lines andmanifolds. Unbolt side braces fromradiator shell and instrument panelsupport casting. Attach hoist and lift aircleaner and hood support assembly fromtractor. Remove fuel tank from 8700,9700, TW-1(), TW-20 and TW-30 models.Disconnect injector lines from injectorsand pump and remove lines. Cap allexposed fittings to prevent entry of dirt.Clean area around injectors, remove

mounting nuts and if necessary, pryinjector gently from head. Removeintake and exhaust manifolds, thenremove rocker arm cover, rocker armsassembly and push rods. Disconnectupper radiator hose and temperaturegage sender. Unbolt and remove cylin-der head assembly.

NOTE: if cyiinder head gasket faiiurehas occurred, checic cylinder head andblock mating surface for fiatness.Maximum allowable deviation from flat-ness is 0.006 inch overail or 0.003 inch inany six inches. If cyiinder head is notwithin flatness specified or is rough, thesurface may be machined providing thedepth from vaive seat inserts to cyiinderhead surface is not less than 0.117 inchafter machining. If the cylinder block isnot within flatness specified, it may bemachined providing the distance be-tween top of pistons at top dead centerand top surface of cyiinder block is notiess than 0.002 inch after machining.Aiso, instail cyiinder head to blockwithout gasket, instail rocker armsupports, washer and ail head boitsfinger tight. Then using feeler gage,measure clearance between underside ofbolt heads and cylinder head or rockerarm supports. If clearance is 0.010 inchor more, cut threads of boit hoie deeperIn block with a suitable tap.

Models 8700,9700, TW-10, TW-20 andTW-30 are equipped with 9/16-inchcylinder head bolts while all othermodels have Va-inch bolts. New cylinderblocks have 9/16-inch bolt holes so a studkit must be installed to mate an earlycylinder head with a new cylinder blockWhen reassembling, make sure head

Fig, 6B—Tighten cylinderhead retaining boits in se-

quence shown.

gasket is properly positioned on twodowel pins.

Tighten Vz-inch bolts or nuts to 110ft.-lbs. using steps of 90 and 100 ft.-lbs.Tighten 9/16-inch bolts to 160 ft.-lbs.using steps of 120 and 140 ft.-lbs. Referto Fig. 69 for tightening sequence.

NOTE: Torque values given are forlubricated threads; tighten cyiinder headbolts only when engine is cold.

Adjust intake valve gap of 0.014-0.016 inch and exhaust valve gap to0.017-0.019 inch. Complete the reassem-bly of engine by reversing disassemblyprocedure. Tighten the intake manifoldbolts to a torque of 23-28 ft.-lbs., theexhaust manifold bolts to a torque of25-30 ft.-lbs. Make connections on 9000,%00, 9700, TW-20 and TW-30 modelsturbocharger and prime with oil byfollowing procedure in paragraph 137.With reassembling complete, bleed thediesel fuel system as outlined inparagraph 114A or 115A.

VALVES, GUIDES, STEM SEALSAND SEATS

80. Exhaust valves are equipped withpositive type rotators and an "0" ringtype seal is used between valve stem androtator body. Intake valve stems arefitted with umbrella type oil seals on8000, 8600, 8700 and TW-10 engines. On9000, 9600, 9700, TW-20 and TW-30engines, no seals are used on intakevalve stems. Both the intake andexhaust valves seat on renewable typevalve seat inserts that are a shrink fit incylinder head. Inserts are avaUable inoversizes of 0.010, 0.020 and 0.030 inchas well as standard size.

Fig. 70—Exploded viewshowing rocker arms,spring and rockar armspacar saquance for No. 1cylinder; sequence for in-stallation of ramainingrockar arms, springs andspacars is identical, installshaft with notch (N) upand towards front of

angina,

N. Notch1. Cvlinder head bolt2. Flat washer3. Rocker arm support

4. Rocker arms5. Adjusting screwi6. Springs

7. Spacers8. Shaft end plugs9. Rocker arm shaft

28

SHOP MANUAL

NOTE: Valve seat inserts of 0.010 and0.020 inch oversize have been installed insome cyiinder heads in production.Cylinder heads so fitted are stamped "SOlO/OS" or "SO 20/OS'* on exhaustmanifold side In line with oversize vaiveseat. Counterbore In cyiinder head forstandard exhaust valve seat Is 1.597-1.590 inches and for standard Intakevalve seat Is 1.897-1.898 inches.

Refer to Fig. 70A to determine valveface and seat angle. Valve margin is1/16-inch for intake valves of Models9600, 9700, TW-20 and TW-30 and 1/32-inch for all other valves.

Valve guides are integral with cylin-der head. If wear on guides or valves isexcessive, renew valves and ream valveguide bore to nearest oversize ifnecessary. Desired stem to guideclearance is 0.001-0.0024 inch for intakevalves and 0.002-0.0037 inch for exhaustvalves. New (standard) stem diameter is0.3711-0.3718 inch for intake valves and0.3701-0.3708 inch for exhaust valves.Valves with 0.003, 0.015 and 0.030 inchoversize stems are available as well asreamers for enlarging valve guide boreto 0.003,0.015 or 0.030 inch oversize.

NOTE: Some production cylinderheads have been fitted with 0.015 Inchoversize valve stem. Heads so fitted arestamped "15" or "VO 15/OS" on exhaustside of head opposite the oversize vaivestem guide.

Paragraphs 81-86

Model

8000,8600,8700,9000

9600,9700

TW-10

TW-20, lW-30

Intake face

44

29>5

44^

29%

Exhaust face

44

44

44*5

44H

Intake seat

45

30

45

30

Exhaust seat

45

45

45

45

Fig, 70A—Tabia iisting vaivaangies.

VALVE SPRINGS

81. Intake and exhaust valve springsare interchangeable. Valve spring freelength should be 2.15 inches. Springsshould exert a force of 61 to 69 poundswhen compressed to a length of 1.74inches, and a force of 125-139 poundswhen compressed to a length of 1.32inches. Valve springs should also bechecked for squareness by setting springon flat surface and checking with asquare; renew spring if clearancebetween top end of spring and square ismore than 1/16-inch with bottom end ofspring against square. Also, renew anyspring showing signs of rust or erosion.

VALVE TAPPETS(CAM FOLLOWERS)

83. Valve tappets are semi-mush-room type and can be removed afterremoving camshaft as outlined in para-graph 91. Tappet diameter is 0.9889-0.9894 inch and bore in cylinder block is0.990-0.991 inch. Desired tappet to boreclearance is 0.0006-0.0021 inch.

VALVE CLEARANCEADJUSTMENT

84. Valve clearance should be adjustedevery 600 hours on Models 8000, TW-10,TW-20 and TW-30 and every 300 hourson all others. To adjust valve clearance,rotate engine and adjust intake valves to0.014-0.016 inch and exhaust valves to0.017-0.019 inch. Do not adjust valves ifengine is over normal operating temper-ature.

NOTE: Torque required to turn theseif-locking adjusting screws in rockerarms should be from 9 to 26 ft.-lbs. Ifless than 9 f t . - lbs. , install a newadjusting screw. If turning torque is stiiiless than 9 ft.-ibs., install a new rockerarm assembly. Refer to paragraph 85.

After valve clearance is properly ad-justed, reinstall rocker arm cover usinga new gasket and tighten cover retain-ing cap screws to a torque of 10-15ft.-lbs.

ROCKER ARMS

85. To remove rocker arms, removeair cleaner on TW-30 or fuel tank on allother models, then remove rocker armcover. Unscrew the seven cylinder headbolts that retain rocker arm assembly tocylinder head, but do not remove boltsfrom rocker arm supports. Lift out therocker arm assembly and head bolts as aunit.

To disassemble, withdraw the cylin-der head bolts. Rocker arm to shaftclearance should be 0.002-0.004 inch.Shaft diameter is 1.000-1.001 inches;rocker arm inside diameter is 1.003-1.004 inches. Renew rocker arm ifclearance is excessive or if valve contactpad is worn more than 0.002 inch.Torque required to turn valve adjust-ment screw in rocker arm should be 9 to26 ft.-lbs.; renew rocker arm and/orscrew if torque required to turn screw isless than 9 ft.-lbs.

When reassembling, be sure notch(N—Fig. 70) in end of rocker arm shaft isup and towards front end of engine; thiswill correctly place the rocker arm oilingholes. Back each rocker arm adjustingscrew out two turns, then tighten allretaining bolts evenly until valve springsare compressed and rocker arm supportsare snug against the cylinder head; then,tighten all cylinder head bolts asoutlined in paragraph 78.

After rocker arm shaft is installed,adjust valve clearance as described inparagraph 84.

R&R TIMING GEAR COVER

86. To remove timing gear cover, firstsplit tractor between front support andengine as outlined in paragraph 76, thenproceed as follows:

Drain and remove engine oO pan.Remove cap screw and washers from

Fig, 71 — Explodad viawshowing fual injectionpump gear cover {2), tim-ing gear cover {5\, enginefront piate (7), gaskets and

reiatad parts.

1. Timing pointer2. Injection pump gear

cover3. Gasket4. Oil filler cap5. Timing gear cover6. Gasket7. Front plate8. Gasket9. Cup plug

10. Dowel pins

29

Paragraphs 87-90

Fig, 72—Chacking cam-shaft drive {idler) gear tocamshaft gear backiash

with feaiar gaga.

front end of crankshaft, then removecrankshaft pulley using suitable pullers.The timing gear cover, with fuelinjection pump drive gear cover (2—Fig.71) attached, can then be unbolted andremoved from engine.

With timing gear cover removed, thecrankshaft front oil seal (5—Fig. 76) anddust seal (6) can be renewed as outlinedin paragraph 99.

When reinstalling timing gear cover,tighten cap screws to a torque of 13-18ft.-lbs. Tighten crankshaft pulley retain-ing cap screw to a torque of 130-160ft.-lbs. Install oil pan following proce-dure outlined in paragraph 102 and referto paragraph 6, 33 or 56 whenreconnecting front support to engine.

TIMING GEARS

87. Before removing any gears in thetiming gear train, first remove rockerarms assembly to avoid the possibility ofdamage to piston or valve train if eitherthe camshaft or crankshaft should beturned independently ofthe other.

The timing gear train consists of thecrankshaft gear, camshaft gear, injec-tion pump drive gear and a camshaftdrive gear (idler gear) connecting theother three gears of the train. Refer to

1

Fig. 73—Camshaft driva {idiar) gaar andadapter as removed from front end of cyiin-der biock. Bushing in gear is not available

separately.

paragraph 129 for information on fuelinjection pump drive gear.

Timing gear backlash between crank-shaft gear and camshaft drive gear, orbetween camshaft drive gear andcamshaft gear (see Fig. 72) should be0.001-0.009 inch. Backlash betweencamshaft drive gear and fuel injectionpump drive gear should be 0.001-0.012inch. If backlash is not within recom-mended limits, renew the camshaftdrive gear, gear shaft and/or any othergears concerned.

88. CAMSHAFT DRIVE GEAR ANDSHAFT. To remove, unscrew the self-locking cap screw and remove the cam-shaft drive gear and shaft (see Fig. 73)from front face of cylinder block. Renewshaft and/or gear if bushing to shaftclearance is excessive, or if bearingsurfaces are scored. Shaft oil hole mustbe free of dirt or foreign material.Inspect gear teeth for wear or scoremarks; small burrs can be removed withfine carborundum stone.

FORD

To reinstall the camshaft drive gear,turn crankshaft so that No. 1 piston is attop dead center on compression strokeand turn camshaft and fuel injectionpump drive gear so that timing markspoint to center of camshaft drive gearlocation. Place the camshaft drive gearwithin the other three gears so that alltiming marks are aligned as shown inFig. 74, then install the shaft (2—Fig.73) and tighten the self-locking capscrew (1) to a torque of 100-105 ft.-lbs.

89. CAMSHAFT GEAR. To removethe camshaft gear, remove cap screw(1—Fig. 75), lockwasher (2) and washer(3) then, pull gear from shaft. Gearshould be a hand push fit on shaft. Withgear removed, inspect drive key (10),thrust plate (6) and spacer (7) and renewif damaged in any way.

To reinstall gear, first install spacer,thrust plate and drive key, then installgear, washer, lockwasher and gearretaining cap screw. Tighten the capscrew to a torque of 40-45 ft.-lbs.

90. CRANKSHAFT GEAR. If notremoved with timing gear cover and sealassembly, slide the spacer (7~Fig. 76)

7 I

Fig, 75—View showing assembiy of cam-shaft gear to camshaft. Camshaft end play iscontrollad by piate (6) which fits between

shouiders on gear and shaft.

1. Cap screw2. Lockwasher 6. Thrust plate3. Flat washer 7. Spacer4. CanMhaftgear 9. Camshaft5. Cap screw 10. Woodruff key

Fig. 74—View showingtiming marks aiignad oncrankshaft gear, camshaftdrive gear, camshaft gearand fuei injection pump

gear.

1. Retainer bolt2. Adapter shaft 3. Gear & bushing assy.

ENGINE FRONTCOVER PLATE

30

SHOP MANUAL Paragraphs 91-92

from crankshaft; then, using remover-replacer (Ford tool No. 2134) and insert(Ford tool No. 1237) or equivalent tool,pull gear from crankshaft. Inspect thegear and crankshaft pulley drive key (2)and renew if damaged in any way.

To reinstall gear, first drive the key(2) into crankshaft keyway until fullyseated, then install the gear with timingmark outward using remover-replacertools as used in removal procedure, orwith bolt threaded into front end ofcrankshaft, use a nut, large washer anda sleeve.

CAMSHAFT AND BEARINGS

91. To remove camshaft, first removetiming gear cover as outlined in para-graph 86. Turn engine so that the timingmarks on crankshaft gear, camshaft gearand fuel injection pump drive gear pointto center of idler gear. Remove rockerarm cover, rocker arm assembly andpush rods as outlined in paragraph 85.Drive suitable size wood dowels into thehollow valve tappets (cam followers),then lift the tappets up away fromcamshaft and hold with pincher typeclothes pins. On all models exceptTW-10, TW-20 and TW-30, remove oilfilter, plug and oil pump drive gear;refer to Fig. 85.

Desired camshaft end play is 0.001-0.007 inch. If end play is excessive,renew thrust plate (6—Fig. 75) duringreassembly. Remove the cap screw (1),lockwasher and flat washer and pullcamshaft gear from shaft. Remove theWoodruff key (10), thrust plate andspacer (7). Withdraw camshaft fromfront end of engine, taking care not tostrike camshaft lobes as shaft isremoved.

The camshaft is supported in fiverenewable bearings. Check camshaft andbearings against the following values:

Camshaft journaldiameter 2.3895-2.3905 in.

Desired journal tobearing clearance 0.001-0.003 in.

Camshaft end play 0.001-0.007 in.

If excessive bearing wear is indi-cated, the bearings can be removed andnew bearings installed with bearingdriver (Ford tool No. 1255) and handle(Ford tool No. 1442) or equivalent tools.

NOTE: It wiil be necessary to removeengine and remove oii pan, ciutch, fiy-wheei, engine rear cover plate and cam-shaft rear cover piate to remove andinstail bearings. Pay particuiar attentionthat the oii hoies in bearings are aiignedwith the oil passages in cylinder biock.

Refer to Fig. 78. Remove camshaftdrive (idler) gear, then reinstall gear

Fig, 76—Viaw showingcrankshaft gear, front oiiseat and crankshaft puiiayinstaliation. Dust saal (6)and oil saal {5) ara prassadinto timing gaar covarfrom inside and rida on

puiiay spacer (7),

1. Crankshaft2. Drive key3. Crankshaft gear4. Oilslinsrer

5. Oilseaf6. Dust seal7. Pulley simcer

8. Crankshaft pulley9. Flat washer

10. Cap screw

4.746* TO4.753*-

Fig. 77—Diagram showingmachining dimansionsnecessary for instaiiatlonof sarvica siaeve, Rafar to

taxt.

.099* TO .100*

with timing marks aligned as shown inFig. 74. Refer also to paragraph 88. Newbearings are pre-sized and should notrequire reaming if carefully installed.

Lubricate tappets and camshaft andreinstall camshaft by reversing removalprocedure. Rotate camshaft to be surethere is no binding in new bearingsbefore installing drive gear. Tightenthrust plate cap screws to a torque of12-15 ft.-lbs. and tighten the camshaftgear retaining cap screw to a torque of40-45 ft.-lbs.

CONNECTING ROD ANDPISTON UNITS

92. Connecting rod and piston unitsare removed from above after remov-

ing the cylinder head and oil pan. Besure to remove top ridge from cylinderbores before attempting to withdraw theassemblies.

Connecting rod and bearing cap arenumbered to correspond to their respec-tive cylinder bores. When renewing theconnecting rod, be sure to stamp thecylinder number on new rod and cap.

When reassembling, it is importantthat the identification notch in top faceof piston is towards the front end ofengine. Assemble connecting rod topiston with cylinder numbers to rightside of engine (away from camshaft).Refer to Fig. 79.

NOTCH ORNUMBER ON

PISTON

CONNECTtNGROD AND CAP

NUMBERS

Fig, 78—Viaw showing spedai too/ for cam-shaft baaring installation. Be sure that bear-ings ara instaiied with oii hoies aiigned with

oil passages In cylindar block.

1. Bearing2. Handle no. 1442

3. Oil holes4. Driver no. 1255

yg^Yiew showing proper assembiy ofpiston to connecting rod*

31

Paragraphs 93-97 FORD

When installing connecting rod cap, besure that bearing liner tangs, and thecylinder identification number, of rodand cap are towards same side of engine.Tighten the connecting rod nuts to atorque of 60-65 ft.-lbs.

PISTON RINGS

93. Pistons are fitted with threecompression rings and one oil controlring. The two top compression rings andthe oil control ring are chrome plated.All 8000 models and early 9000 modelsare equipped with a barrel face type topcompression ring which must be in-stalled with identification mark up.Later 9000 models and all 8600, 8700,9600, 9700, TW-10, TW-20 and TW-30models are equipped with a keystonetype top compression ring. Secondcompression ring is black with chromeedge. Third compression ring is dullgray or black. Both are marked with an"0", which must be installed towards topof piston.

The oil control ring and slottedexpander may be installed with eitherside up. Detailed instructions arepackaged with most service ring sets.

Piston ring sets are available in over-sizes of 0.020, 0.030 and 0.040 inch aswell as standard size. The standard sizerings are to be used with standard sizepistons and also with 0.004 inch oversizepistons. Refer to the following specifica-tions for checking piston ring fit:

Ring End GapTop compression ring . . . 0.012-0.038 in.Second and third compression

rings 0.010-0.035 in.Oil control ring 0.013-0.033 in.

Ring Side Clearance In GrooveTop compression ring.. 0.0044-0.0061 in.Second and third compression

rings 0.0039-0.0056 in.Oil control ring 0.0024-0.0041 in.

PISTONS AND CYLINDERS

94. Engine is fitted with trunk typealuminum alloy pistons with a continu-ous skirt. Pistons are tapered in theupper land area. Replacement pistonsmay have a drill point dimple in theircrown, which will necessitate the use ofthe newer, thicker head gasket, sincecrown height is higher on the new typepistons.

Cylinder bores in engine block areunsleeved. Where excessive cylinderwear has occurred, cylinders can berebored to fit next larger oversizepiston. Pistons 0.004 inch oversize areavailable for standard size cylinderswhich must be honed. Where necessaryto rebore cylinders, pistons of 0.020,

0.030 and 0.040 inch oversizes areavailable. If cylinder taper is 0.005 inchor more, cylinders should be rebored orhoned to next larger oversize piston.Refer to paragraph 95 for fitting pistonsto cylinder bores.

A cylinder sleeve is available forservice installation. Sleeve should bechilled to aid in installation. After sleeveis started in bore, use puller in kit No.2757 to complete installation. Do notdrop chilled sleeve into bore as sleeve lipmay be cracked. Cylinder is bored to4.5042-4.5052 inches. Counterbore cylin-der to 4.746-4.753 inches at a depth of0.099-0.100 inch. Depth of lip of sleevemust be no greater than 0.002 inch asshown in Fig. 77. Standard or 0.004 inchoversize pistons must be used in sleeve.Sleeve n>ust not be overbored.

95. FITTING PISTONS. Recommend-ed method for fitting piston is asfollows: Before checking piston fit, de-glaze cylinder wall using a hone or de-glazing tool. Using a micrometer, meas-ure piston diameter at centerline of andat right angle to the piston pin bore.Then, using an inside micrometer,measure cylinder bore diameter ofcylinder block crosswise with the blockat the smallest point. Subtract the pistondiameter from the cylinder bore diame-ter; the resulting piston to cylinder boreclearance should be within range of 0.008to 0.009 inch for proper piston fit onpistons No. 1 through No. 5. Piston No. 6should have 0.002 inch more clearancethan the others, with the range being0.010 to 0.011 inch clearance.

NOTE: After honing or deglazing cyl-inder bore, wash bore thoroughiy withhot water and detergent untii a whitecioth can be rubbed against cyiinder waiiwithout smudging, then rinse with coidwater, dry thoroughiy and oii to preventrusting.

PISTON PINS

96. A 1.4997-1.5000 inch diameterfloating type piston pin is used on 8000,8600,8700 and TW-10 engines. Diameterof floating type piston pin on 9000, 9600,

Fig. 80—Oii hoie in con-necting rod bushing mustbe driiied after bushing isinstaiied, but before ream-ing bushing to size. Holein top of connecting rod is0.045-0,050 inch and must

not be driiied oversize.

9700, TW-20 and TW-30 engines is1.6246-1.6251 inches. Piston pins are re-tained in the piston pin bosses by snaprings and are available in standard sizeonly. Piston pin should have a clearanceof 0.0005-0.0007 inch in connecting rodbushing and a clearance of 0.0003-0.0005 inch in piston bosses. After in-stalling new piston pin bushings in con-necting rods, the oil hole in bushing mustbe drilled as shown in Fig. 80 being sureto drill through bushing on 9000, 9600,9700, TW-20 and TW-30 models to oilpassage in rod. Final size bushing with aspiral expansion reamer to obtain thespecified pin to bushing clearance. Bush-ing inside diameter should then be1.5003-1.5006 inches on 8000, 8600, 8700and TW-10 engines and 1.6253-1.6256inches on 9000, 9600, 9700, TW-20 andTW-30 engines. When assembling, iden-tification notch or number in top face ofpiston must be to front end of enginesand the identification number on rod andcap towards right side of engine (awayfrom camshaft).

CONNECTING RODS ANDBEARINGS

97. Connecting rods for all models aresimilar except 9000, 9600, 9700, TW-20and TW-30 model connecting rod has anoil passage going from big end of rod tosmall end and a larger pin bore.Connecting rod bearings are of the non-adjustable, slip-in precision type, renew-able from below after removing the oilpan and connecting rod bearing caps.

Crankpin bearing liners may be of twodifferent materials, copper-lead or alu-minum-tin alloy. The bearings will havean identification marking as follows:

Copper-lead PV or GAluminum-tin G and AL

NOTE: Copper-lead bearings oniy areused on 9000, 9600, 9700, TW-20 andTW-30 connecting rods. Bearings forthese models have an oil hoie whichmust match oil passage in connectingrod. Standard size bearing liners of eachmaterial are avaiiabie in two different

CONNECTtNOROD BUSHJNG

32

SHOP MAMUAL Paragraphs 98-100

thicknesses and are color coded toindicate thickness as foilows:

Copper-lead bearing thickness:Red 0.0943-0.0948 in.Blue 0.0947-0.0952 in.Aluminum-tin alloy bearing thickness:Red 0.0939-0.0944 in.Blue 0.0943-0.0948 in.

In production, connecting rods andcrankshaft crankpin journals are colorcoded to indicate bore and journal dia-meters as follows:

Connecting rod bore diameter:Red 2.9412-2.9416 in.Blue 2.9416-2.9420 in.

Crankpin journal diameter:Red 2.7500-2.7504 in.Blue ....2.7496-2.7500 in.

When installing a new crankshaft andthe color code marks are visible onconnecting rods, the crankpin bearingliners may be fit as follows: If the colorcode markings on both rod and crank-shaft crankpin journal are red, installtwo red bearing liners; if both color codemarkings are blue, install two blue codedbearing liners. If color code marks on rodand crankpin do not match (one is redand the other is blue) install one red andone blue bearing liner.

NOTE: Be sure that both bearing linersare of the same material; that is, eitherboth are copper-lead or both arealuminum-tin aiioy. If color code mark isnot visible on connecting rod or crank-shaft, bearing fit should be checked withplastlgage for the proper clearanceaccording to bearing material as follows:

Crankpin journal to bearing linerclearance:

Copper-leadbearings 0.0017-0.0038 in.

Aluminum-tinbearings 0.0025-0.0046 in.

As well as being available in eitherred-coded or blue-coded standard size,bearing liners are also available inundersizes of 0.002, O.()1O, 0.020, 0.030and 0.040 inch. When installing under-size crankpin bearing liners, the crank-pin must be reground to one of thefollowing exact undersizes:

BearingUndersize0.0020.0100.0200.0300.040

CrankpinJournal Dia.

2.7476-2.7480 in.2.7400-2.7404 in.2.7300-2.7304 in.2.7200-2.7204 in.2.7100-2.7104 in.

NOTE: When regrinding crankpinJournals, maintain a 0.12-0.14 inch filietradius and chamfer oii hoie after journaiis ground to size.

When reassembling, tighten the con-necting rod nuts to a torque of 60-65ft.-lbs.

CRANKSHAFT AND MAINBEARINGS

98. Crankshaft is supported in sevenmain bearings. Crankshaft end thrust iscontrolled by the flanged main bearingliner which is'used on the second mainjournal from rear. Before removing mainbearing caps, check to see that they havean identification number so that they canbe installed in same position from whichthey are removed.

Main bearing liners may be of twodifferent materials, copper-lead or alu-minum-tin alloy. The bearings will havean identification marking to indicatebearing material as follows:

Copper-lead .PVorGAluminum-tin alloy G and AL

Standard size bearing liners areavailable in two different thicknessesand are color-coded to indicate thick-ness as follows:

Red 0.1245-0.1250 in.Blue 0.1249-0.1254 in.

In production, main bearing bores inblock and main bearing journals oncrankshaft are color coded to indicatebore and journal diameter as follows:

Main bearing bore diameter:Red 3.6242-3.6246 in.Blue 3.6246-3.6250 in.

Main journal diameter:Red 3.3718-3.3723 in.Blue 3.3713-3.3718 in.

When installing new crankshaft andthe color code marks are visible in crank-case at main bearing bores, new mainbearing liners may be fit as follows: Ifthe color code marks on bore and journalare both red, install two red codedbearing liners; if both marks are blue,install two blue coded bearing liners. Ifcolor code mark on bore is not the sameas color code on journal (one is blue andthe other is red), install one red codedbearing liner and one blue coded bearingliner.

NOTE: Be sure both liners used at onejournai are of the same materiai;however, copper-lead bearing iiners maybe used on one or more Journais withaluminum-tin alloy liners on the remain-

ing Journais. if coior code marks are notvisibie at the main bearing bores inbiock, check bearing fit with plastigageand instaii red or blue, or one red and onebiue iiner to obtain a bearing Journal toliner clearance of 0.0022-0.0045 Inch.

As weU as being available in eitherred-coded or blue-coded standard size,new main bearing lines are also availablein undersizes of 0.002, 0.010, 0.020,0.030 and 0.040 inch. When installingundersize main bearing liners, thecrankshaft journals must be reground toone of the following exact undersizes:

BearingUndersize0.0020.0100.0200.0300.040

MainJournal Dia.

3.3693-3.3698 in.3.3618-3.3623 in.3.3518-3.3523 in.3.3418-3.3423 in.3.3318-3.3323 in.

NOTE: When regrinding crankshaftmain bearing Journais, maintain a filietradius of 0.12-0.14 inch and chamfer oilholes after Journal Is ground to size.

When reinstalling main bearing caps,proceed as follows: Be sure the bearingbores and rear main bearing oil seal areaare thoroughly clean before installingbearing liners. Be sure tangs on bearinginserts are in the slots provided incylinder block and bearing caps. Refer toparagraph 100 for rear cap side seals.Tighten bearing cap bolts to a torque of115-125 ft.-lbs.

CRANKSHAFT OIL SEALS

99. FRONT OIL SEAL. Crankshaftfront oil seal is mounted in timing gearcover and cover must be removed torenew seal. Timing gear cover removalprocedure is outlined in paragraph 86.To renew seal, drive dust seal (6—Fig.76) and oil seal (5) out towards inside oftiming gear cover. Install new dust sealin timing gear cover, then using a sealinstaller (Ford tool No. 7536 or equiva-lent), install new oil seal with springloaded lip towards inside of cover.

The crankshaft front oil seal rides onpulley spacer (7). Carefully inspectspacer for wear at seal contact surfaceand renew spacer if wear or scoring isevident.

100. REAR OIL SEAL. To renew rearoil seal, engine must be removed fromtractor and the clutch, flywheel, enginerear plate, oil pan and rear main bearingcap must be removed.

Production crankshafts are "scrolled"to aid in feeding oil back from the rear oilseal. Whenever necessary to renew rearoil seal, either with a used or newservice installed crankshaft, it will benecessary to apply a scroll finish to rear

33

Paragraph 101

oil seal contact surface. Refer to Fig. 81;it is very important that only Grade 240aluminum oxide cloth be used and thatthe scroll marks be applied at angleshown. Finish accessible area of crank-shaft, then turn shaft a little at a timeand finish adjacent area until completecircumference of shaft sealing surface isfinished.

NOTE: "Scroir* lines should not beapparent to the naked eye.

After "scrolling" shaft, proceed asfollows to install rear toain bearing andbearing cap: Clean the mating surfacesof block and bearing cap and apply alight coating of gasket sealing compoundto both surfaces. Install new side seals inrear main bearing cap with sealsprojecting slightly beyond block face ofcap (see Fig. 82) and install cap withbearing insert and side seals. Tightenbearing cap bolts to a torque of 115-125ft.-lbs., then trim bottom ends of sideseals so that seals project 1/64-inch.Apply a light coating of gasket cement tosplit lines of bearing cap and block in seal

bore, taking care not to allow anycement on shaft. Pack grease betweenthe two lips of the new seal and applylight coat of high temperature grease toseal bore in block and bearing cap and tocrankshaft seal journal.

Install new crankshaft seal usingspecial installation tool (Ford tool No.1301) as shown in Fig. 83. Use flywheelretaining cap screws; tighten cap screwsevenly until tool bottoms against crank-shaft flange, then tighten each cap screwto a torque of 25 ft.-lbs. to be sure thatseal is square with crankshaft center-line.

NOTE: If spedai tool is not avaiiabie,use a 4-7/8 inch i.D. sieeve and carefuiiypress seal into block untii rear face ofseai is 0.060 inch inside rear face ofbiock. Then, using dial indicator mount-ed on rear end of crankshaft check to seethat runout of seai does not exceed 0.015inch.

Apply a liberal amount of penetrat-ing oil to the cap side seals to cause themto swell, then install engine rear plate

Fig. 81—Whenever neces-sary to renew crankshaftrear oii seai, crankshaftsealing surface must be"scrolled" using Grade 240aluminum oxide doth andat angie shown. Refer to

text.

LL)/ -- 'CAM SHAFT

REAR COVERPtATE

Fig. 82—lnstaiiing rearmain bearing cap with sideseals; seals should pro-trude slightiy above biockface of cap as shown.Appiy iight coat of seaiingcompound to biock and cap

mating surfaces.

SEALINGCOMPOUND

34

FORD

using new gasket. Be sure that bottomedge of gasket is parallel to bottom edgeof cylinder block and cap. Reinstallflywheel, clutch and oil pan and reinstallengine in tractor.

NOTE: Do not tighten oii pan retain-ing cap screws until after engine isboited to transmission; refer to para-graph 102.

FLYWHEEL

101. The flywheel can be removedafter splitting tractor between engineand transmission and removing theclutch. Flywheel can be installed in oneposition only. The flywheel bolts retainthe power take-off drive adapter. Beforeinstalling flywheel, inspect flywheel tocrankshaft cap screws to make sure theyare proper type grade 8 screws and ingood condition. After applying "LoctiteNo. 721" or equivalent to threads,tighten screws to a torque of 155-165ft.-lbs.

Starter ring gear is installed fromfront face of flywheel; therefore, theflywheel must be removed to renew thering gear. Heat the gear to be removedwith a torch from front side of gear andknock off of flywheel. Heat new gearevenly by applying heat from insideonly, so that heat expands out into gearteeth, and only until gear expandsenough to slip onto flywheel. Tap gearall the way around to be sure it isproperly seated and then quench withwater to cool gear rapidly.

NOTE: Be sure to heat gear evenly; ifany portion of gear is heated to atemperature higher than 450 degrees F.,rapid wear wiii resuit. Heat sensingcrayons which melt at 400 degrees F. and

Fig. 83—Using spedai tooi No, 1301 (2) to In-stall crankshaft rear oii seai, Tightan cap-screws (1) to 25 ft,-ibs. if spedai tooi is notused, seai rear face must be checked for run-out with diai indicator mounted on rear end of

crankshaft; maximum aiiowabie runout is0.015 inch.

SHOP MAMUAL

450 degrees F., can be used to avoidoverheating, if they are avaiiabie.

OIL PAN

102. To remove oil pan, proceed as fol-lows: One at a time, replace existingcylinder block-to-front support boltswith bolts 8-inches long. Drain oil panand remove oil level dipstick. Supporttractor with a jack under transmissionand a hoist at the front support andradiator assembly. Remove hood sidepanels, air pre-cleaner, exhaust pipe andhood top panel. Remove two boltssecuring oil cooler to steering motorhousing. Support air cleaner supportassembly and remove bolts which securesupport assembly to front hood. Removebolts securing side frame members tofront support. Move front supportassembly forward until there is suffi-

Paragraphs 102-103

cient clearance to remove front oil panbolts. Do not lose shims. Remove thetwo transmission to oil pan bolts andsupport oil pan. Unbolt and lower oil panfrom engine.

If a new oil pan is being installed, referto paragraph 6, 33 or 56 for shimmingfront support to oil pan. To reinstall oilpan, proceed as follows:

If timing gear cover is removed, rein-stall cover before installing oO pan. Besure all gasket surfaces are clean andcement gasket to pan with thin film ofgasket sealer. Lift pan into place with

P/g. $4—Flat washers are instaltad undar twoof the flywheel and pto drive plate retainingboits to hoid dutch shaft pilot baaring in

position.

STOP

Fig, 85—Removing oii pump drive gear andshaft on aii models except TW-10, TW-20 andTW'3O, The shaft may ramain in oil pump as

gaar is ramoved.

Fig. 86—Expioded view of oil pump assambiy,suction {inlet) screen and oii pump drive gearfor ali models except TW-IO, TW-20 andTW-30, Stop {7) and drive gear (9) are removed

from abova as shown in Fig. 85,

1. Retainer clip2. Inlet screen3. Suction tube4. Plug5. Relief valve spring6. Relief valve plunger7. Stop8. Gasket

9. Drive gear10. Floating shaft11. Oil pump body12. Gasket13. Outer pump rotor14. Inner pump rotor15. Cover plate

floor jack and reinstall oil pan to enginecap screws finger tight only. Install andtighten, then loosen the two transmis-sion to oil pan cap screws. Then, start-ing from center of pan, tighten the oilpan to engine cap screws to a torque of30-35 ft.-lbs. Tighten the transmission tooil pan cap screws to a torque of 180-220ft.-lbs. Reinstall front end assembly byreversing removal procedure, makingsure the shims removed from betweenoil pan and front on disassembly arereinstalled. Tighten the front support tocylinder block bolts and cap screw to atorque of 180-220 ft.-lbs., then tightenfront support to oil pan cap screws to atorque of 270-330 ft.-lbs. Fill and bleedthe power steering system as outlined inparagraph 7,34 or 57.

OIL PUMP AND RELIEF VALVE

All Models Except TW-10, TW-20And TW-30

NOTE: Later oii pumps have a six-fluteinner rotor which is thicker than earlyfour-flute inner rotor. Ail clearances arethe same, however It may be necessary togrind away interfering metal on eariy oilpan if iater pump Is fitted.

103. To remove oil pump first removeoil pan as outlined in paragraph 102,then unbolt and remove pump and inletfilter screen from cylinder block. Referto Fig. 86 for exploded view of oil pumpand the oil pump drive gear assembly.The floating drive shaft (10) will usuallybe removed with the pump. To removedrive gear, remove full flow oil filterassembly, then unscrew plug andremove gear as in Fig. 85.

To disassemble pump, remove clip(1—Fig. 86) and screen (2), then removescrews retaining suction tube (3) andpump cover (15) to pump body (11). Re-move the covers and pump rotor set (13and 14), noting which direction outerrotor was placed in pump body. Thread aself-tapping screw into plug (4) and pullplug from pump body. Remove thespring (5) and oil pressure relief valve(6).

Fig. 87—Chacking pumprotor to cover clearanceand pump outer rotor tobody clearance; refer totext for specifications andto Fig, 88 for chacking

pump rotors.

PUMP COVfRTO ROTOR

UTO

P BODYROTOt

35

Paragraphs 104-107 FORD

Check the pump for wear as shown inFigs. 87 and 88. Pump cover to rotorclearance (rotor end play) should be0.001-0.0035 inch; pump body to rotorclearance should be 0.006-0.011 inch; androtor clearance should be 0.001-0.006inch when measured as shown in Fig. 88.Renew the rotor set and/or pump body ifclearances are excessive. Renew pumpcover plate if excessively worn orscored. Relief valve spring should exerta force of 10.7 to 11.9 pounds whencompressed to a length of 1.07 inches.Engine oil pressure should be 60-70 psiat 1000 engine rpm.

Assemble the oil pump and reinstallby reversing removal and disassemblyprocedure. Press a new relief valve plug(4—Fig. 86) into pump body so that plugis flush with body. Tighten the oil pumpretaining cap screws to a torque of 23-28ft.-lbs.

Models TV)(-10, TW-20 And TW-30

104. To remove oil pump on TW-10,TW-20 and TW-30 models, first removeoil pan as outlined in paragraph 102. Oilpump idler gear (4—Fig. 89) and bearing(3) should be checked for excessive endplay. If end play exceeds 0.008 inch,renew bearing. Renew bearing when-ever gear is renewed. Remove idler gear(4) using tool No. 7537 or equivalent andremove drive gear (11) by hand or use asuitable press. Remove relief valve plug(23) and spring (24). Clean and inspect allparts for excessive wear or scoring andreplace as necessary.

Measure clearances as in Figs. 87 and88. Rotor clearance is 0.001-0.006 inch.Rotor to pump housing clearance is0.006-0.011 inch. Rotor end play is0.001-0.0035 inch. Renew shaft and rotorassembly if not within specifications.

NOTE: Prime pump by fiiiing pumpiniet with ciean oil whiie rotating pump

0.001-4). 000

Fig, 88—Measure inner to outar rotor dear-anca as shown; renew rotors if dearanca

exceeds 0.006 inch. Refer aiso to Fig. 87.

36

drive gear and shaft.

Install pump assembly by reversingremoval procedure. Tighten pump toblock bolts to a torque of 23-28 ft.-lbs.Tighten oil pan bolts to a torque of 30-35ft.-lbs. Normal oil pump pressure is60-80 psi at 2200 rpm.

DiESELFUELSYSTEiVi

The diesei fuei system consists ofthree basic components: The fuei fiiters,injection pump and Injection nozzles.When servicing any unit associated withthe fuei system, the maintenance ofabsoiute cieanllness is of utmost impor-tance. Of equai importance is theavoidance of nicks or burrs on any of theworking parts.

Probabiy the most important precau-tion that service pesonnel can Impart toowners of diesei powered tractors is tourge them to use an approved fuei that isabsolutely clean and free from foreign

Fig, 89—Expiodad viaw ofoii pump usad on ModaisTW-10, TW-20 and TW-30.

L Idler gear shaft nut2. Lockwasher3. Idler gear bearing4. Idler gear5. Bolt6. Pin7. Adaptor shaft8. Housing9. Dowel

10. Front bushing11. Drive gear12. Plug13. Rotor and shaft14. Rear bushing15. Pump plate16. Plug17. "O"ring18. Outlet tube19. Gasket20. Pump inlet21. Screen22. Spring23. Pressure relief plug24. Relief spring26. ReUef valve

materiai. Extra precaution shouid betaken to make certain that no waterenters the fuei storage tanks.

TROUBLESHOOTING

105. If the engine will not start, ordoes not run properly after starting,refer to the following paragraphs forpossible causes of trouble.

106. FUEL NOT REACHING INJEC-TION PUMP. If no fuel will run from linewhen disconnected from pump, checkthe following:

Be sure fuel supply valve is open.Check the filters for being clogged (In-

cluding filter screen in fuel supplyvalve).

Bleed the fuel filters.Check lines and connectors for dam-

age.Check for low fuel pump pressure.

107. FUEL REACHING NOZZLESBUT ENGINE WILL NOT START. If,when lines are disconnected at fuel noz-

22

Fig. 89A—Front viaw of oilpump assambiy usad onTW-10, TW-20 and TW-30

model tractors.

1. Oil pump support plate2. Oil pump drive gear3. Oil pump housing4. Idler gear5. Front support bolts6. Rear support bolts7. Oil pump and screen8. Support bolt

Paragraphs 104-107 FORD

Check the pump for wear as shown inFigs. 87 and 88. Pump cover to rotorclearance (rotor end play) should be0.001-0.0035 inch; pump body to rotorclearance should be 0.006-0.011 inch; androtor clearance should be 0.001-0.006inch when measured as shown in Fig. 88.Renew the rotor set and/or pump body ifclearances are excessive. Renew pumpcover plate if excessively worn orscored. Relief valve spring should exerta force of 10.7 to 11.9 pounds whencompressed to a length of 1.07 inches.Engine oil pressure should be 60-70 psiat 1000 engine rpm.

Assemble the oil pump and reinstallby reversing removal and disassemblyprocedure. Press a new relief valve plug(4—Fig. 86) into pump body so that plugis flush with body. Tighten the oil pumpretaining cap screws to a torque of 23-28ft.-lbs.

Models TV)(-10, TW-20 And TW-30

104. To remove oil pump on TW-10,TW-20 and TW-30 models, first removeoil pan as outlined in paragraph 102. Oilpump idler gear (4—Fig. 89) and bearing(3) should be checked for excessive endplay. If end play exceeds 0.008 inch,renew bearing. Renew bearing when-ever gear is renewed. Remove idler gear(4) using tool No. 7537 or equivalent andremove drive gear (11) by hand or use asuitable press. Remove relief valve plug(23) and spring (24). Clean and inspect allparts for excessive wear or scoring andreplace as necessary.

Measure clearances as in Figs. 87 and88. Rotor clearance is 0.001-0.006 inch.Rotor to pump housing clearance is0.006-0.011 inch. Rotor end play is0.001-0.0035 inch. Renew shaft and rotorassembly if not within specifications.

NOTE: Prime pump by fiiiing pumpiniet with ciean oil whiie rotating pump

0.001-4). 000

Fig, 88—Measure inner to outar rotor dear-anca as shown; renew rotors if dearanca

exceeds 0.006 inch. Refer aiso to Fig. 87.

36

drive gear and shaft.

Install pump assembly by reversingremoval procedure. Tighten pump toblock bolts to a torque of 23-28 ft.-lbs.Tighten oil pan bolts to a torque of 30-35ft.-lbs. Normal oil pump pressure is60-80 psi at 2200 rpm.

DiESELFUELSYSTEiVi

The diesei fuei system consists ofthree basic components: The fuei fiiters,injection pump and Injection nozzles.When servicing any unit associated withthe fuei system, the maintenance ofabsoiute cieanllness is of utmost impor-tance. Of equai importance is theavoidance of nicks or burrs on any of theworking parts.

Probabiy the most important precau-tion that service pesonnel can Impart toowners of diesei powered tractors is tourge them to use an approved fuei that isabsolutely clean and free from foreign

Fig, 89—Expiodad viaw ofoii pump usad on ModaisTW-10, TW-20 and TW-30.

L Idler gear shaft nut2. Lockwasher3. Idler gear bearing4. Idler gear5. Bolt6. Pin7. Adaptor shaft8. Housing9. Dowel

10. Front bushing11. Drive gear12. Plug13. Rotor and shaft14. Rear bushing15. Pump plate16. Plug17. "O"ring18. Outlet tube19. Gasket20. Pump inlet21. Screen22. Spring23. Pressure relief plug24. Relief spring26. ReUef valve

materiai. Extra precaution shouid betaken to make certain that no waterenters the fuei storage tanks.

TROUBLESHOOTING

105. If the engine will not start, ordoes not run properly after starting,refer to the following paragraphs forpossible causes of trouble.

106. FUEL NOT REACHING INJEC-TION PUMP. If no fuel will run from linewhen disconnected from pump, checkthe following:

Be sure fuel supply valve is open.Check the filters for being clogged (In-

cluding filter screen in fuel supplyvalve).

Bleed the fuel filters.Check lines and connectors for dam-

age.Check for low fuel pump pressure.

107. FUEL REACHING NOZZLESBUT ENGINE WILL NOT START. If,when lines are disconnected at fuel noz-

22

Fig. 89A—Front viaw of oilpump assambiy usad onTW-10, TW-20 and TW-30

model tractors.

1. Oil pump support plate2. Oil pump drive gear3. Oil pump housing4. Idler gear5. Front support bolts6. Rear support bolts7. Oil pump and screen8. Support bolt

SHOP MANUAL Paragraphs 108-115A

zles and engine is cranked, fuel will flowfrom connections, but engine will notstart, check the following:

Check cranking speed.Check throttle control rod adjust-

ment.Check pump timing.Check fuel lines and connections for

pressure leakage.Check engine compression.

108. ENGINE HARD TO START. Ifthe engine is hard to start, check thefollowing:

Check cranking speed.Injection pump timing.Bleed the fuel filters.Check for clogged fuel fOters.Check for water in fuel or improper

fuel.Check for air leaks on suction side of

fuel lift pump.Check engine compression.Injection pump gallery may be drain-

ing back to auxiliary tank if there is nofuel in upper tank.

109. PUMP FAILS TO DELIVERFUEL TO ONE OR MORE INJEC-TORS. Check for the following:

Air in fuel lines to injectors.Plunger spring broken.Scored barrel.Control rod stuck in off position.Delivery valve defective.

110. ENGINE STARTS, THENSTOPS. If the engine wiU start, but thenstops, check the following:

Check for clogged or restricted fuellines or fuel filters.

Check for water in fuel.Check for restrictions in air intake.Check engine for overheating.Check for air leaks in lines on suction

side of fuel lift pump.Check for faulty lift pump.

111. ENGINE SURGES, MISFIRESOR POOR GOVERNOR REGULA-TION. Make the following checks:

Bleed the system.Check for clogged filters or lines or

restricted fuel lines.Check for water in fuel.Check pump timing.Check injector lines and connections

for leakage.Check for faulty or sticking injector

nozzles.Check for faulty or sticking engine

valves.Check for faulty governor.

112. LOSS OF POWER. If engine doesnot develop full power or speed, checkthe following:

Check throttle control rod adjust-ment.

Check maximum no-load speed ad-justment.

Check for clogged or restricted fuellines or clogged fuel or air filters.

Check for air leaks in suction line oftransfer pump.

Check pump timing.Check engine compression.Check for improper engine valve gap

adjustment or faulty valves.

113. EXCESSIVE BLACK SMOKEAT EXHAUST. If the engine emitsexcessive black smoke from exhaust,check the following:

Check for restricted air intake such asclogged air cleaner.

Check pump timing.Check for faulty injectors.Check engine compression.

FILTERS AND BLEEDING

Models TW-10, TW-20 and TW-30

114. MAINTENANCE. These modelsare equipped with one filter element anda separate sediment bowl. Drain sedi-ment bowl when water or sediment canbe seen in separator. Renew fuel filterevery 600 hours. Close fuel shut-offvalve before removing filter.

114A. BLEEDING. Open bleed screwon filter head and operate priming leveruntil bubble free fuel flows fromopening. Close filter bleed screw, thenopen front bleed screw on injectionpump and operate lever until fuel flow-ing from bleed screw is free of bubbles.Closed bleed screw while operatinglever. Loosen fuel injector lines at theinjectors and crank engine until fuelappears at all injectors, then tighten the

fuel injector line connections and startengine.

All Other Models

115. MAINTENANCE. These modelsare equipped with two spin-on type filterelements as shown in Fig. 90. Waterdrain plugs (bottom caps) should beremoved after 50 hours of operation andany water in sediment bowls drained.Sediment bowls should be drained moreoften if excessive condensation is noted.Fuel filter elements should be renewedafter 900 hours of operation. Close fuelshut-off valve at tank before removingfilters.

115A. BLEEDING. Refer to Fig. 90.Open rear bleed screw on filter head andoperate lever on fuel lift pump until fuelflowing from bleed screw is free ofbubbles. Close the rear bleed screw andopen front bleed screw on filter head andoperate primer lever until bubble freefuel flows from opening. Then, close thefuel filter bleed screw, open front bleedscrew on fuel injection pump and operateprimer lever until fuel flowing frombleed screw is free of bubbles. Close thepump bleed screw while operatingprimer lever. Loosen the fuel injectorlines at the injectors and crank engineuntil fuel appears at all injectors, thentighten the fuel injector line connectionsand start engine.

INJECTION NOZZLES

CAUTION: Fuel leaves the injectionnozzies with sufficient force to penetratethe skin. When testing keep your personclear of the nozzle spray.

Fig, 90—Operate lever (3)on lift pump to bleed filterand fuei injection pump;refer to text for procedure.Pump on aii models exceptTW-10, TW-20 and TW-30is fittad with low idiaspeed stop screw only;high idle speed is adjustedby adjusting throttia Unk-aga; rafar to paragraph

130.

? )lNJECTfON PUMPBLEED SCREW

T ) F t L T E R BLEEDS C R E W S

LIFT PUMPLEVEROW IDLE

37

Paragraphs 116-122

116. TESTING AND LOCATING AFAULTY NOZZLE. If engine does notrun properly and a faulty injection nozzleis indicated, such a faulty nozzle can belocated as follows: With engine running,loosen the high pressure line fitting oneach nozzle holder in turn, therebyallowing fuel to escape at the unionrather than enter the injector. As inchecking for faulty spark plugs in aspark ignition engine, the faulty unit isthe one which, when its line is loosened,least affects the running of the engine.

117. NOZZLE TESTER. A completejob of testing and adjusting the fuelinjection nozzle requires use of a spe-cial tester such as shown in Fig. 91. Thenozzle should be tested for opening pres-sure, spray pattern, seat leakage andleak back.

Operate the tester until oil flows andthen connect injector nozzle to tester.Close the tester valve to shut off pres-sure to tester gage and operate testerlever to be sure nozzle is in operatingcondition and not plugged. If oil does notspray from aU four spray holes innozzle, if tester lever is hard to operateor other obvious defects are noted,remove nozzle from tester and service asoutlined in paragraph 123. If nozzleoperates without undue pressure ontester lever and fuel is sprayed from allfour spray holes, proceed with followingtests:

118. OPENING PRESSURE. WhUeslowly operating tester lever withvalve to tester gage open, note gagepressure at which nozzle spray occurs.This gage pressure should be as follows:

TW-10 2600-2850 psiTW-20, TW-80 3000-3250 psiAll other models 2720-2794 psi

If gage pressure is incorrect, removecap nut and turn adjusting screw (Fig.

92) as required to bring openingpressure within specified limits. Ifopening pressure is erratic or cannot beproperly adjusted, remove nozzle fromtester and overhaul nozzle as outlined inparagraph 123. If opening pressure iswithin limits, check spray pattern asoutlined in paragraph 123. If openingpressure is within'limits, check spraypattern as outlined in following para-graph.

119. SPRAY PATTERN. Operate thetester lever slowly and observe nozzlespray pattern. All four (4) sprays mustbe similar and spaced at approximate in-tervals of lOO*', 90^, 70* and 90^. Eachspray must be well atomized and shouldspread to a 3-inch diameter cone atapproximately %-inch from nozzle tip. Ifspray pattern does not meet these condi-tions, remove nozzle from tester andoverhaul nozzle as outlined in paragraph123. If nozzle spray is satisfactory, pro-ceed with seat leakage test as outlined infollowing paragraph.

120. SEAT LEAKAGE. Close valveto tester gage and operate tester leverquickly for several strokes. Then, wipenozzle tip dry with clean blotting paperand open valve to tester gage. On all

Fig. 92—Adjusting noztia opening prassura;refer to paragraph 118 for spadfications.

FORD

models except TW-10, TW-20 andTW-30, push tester lever down slowly tobring gage pressure to 200 psi belownozzle opening pressure and hold thispressure for one minute. On ModelsTW-10, TW-20 and TW-30, applypressure to 150 psi below nozzle openingpressure and hold this pressure for sixseconds. Apply a piece of clean blottingpaper (Fig. 91) to tip of nozzle; theresulting oil blot should not be greaterthan V2-inch in diameter. If nozzle tipdrips oil or blot is excessively large, re-move nozzle from tester and overhaulnozzle as outlined in paragraph 123. Ifnozzle seat leakage is not excessive, pro-ceed with nozzle leak back test as out-lined in following paragraph.

121. NOZZLE LEAK BACK. Operatetester lever to bring gage pressure toapproximately 2300 psi, release leverand note time required for gage pressureto drop from 2200 psi to 1500 psi. Timerequired should be from 10 to 40seconds. If time required is less than 5seconds, nozzle is worn or there are dirtparticles between mating surfaces ofnozzle and holder. If time required isgreater than 40 seconds, needle may betoo tight a fit in nozzle bore. Refer toparagraph 123 for disassembly, cleaningand overhaul information.

NOTE: A ieaking tester connection,check vaive or pressure gage will showup in this test as excessiveiy fast leakback. If, in testing a number of injectors,all show excessiveiy fast leak back, thetester should be suspected as faultyrather than the injectors.

122. REMOVE AND REINSTALLINJECTORS. Before removing injec-tors, carefully clean all dirt and otherforeign material from lines, injectors and

NJECTOR SEALINGWASHER

Fig. 91—A fual injactor tester such as tha onashown is necessary for checking and adjustingfuei injector assemblies. Nozzle seat iaakaga

chack is iilustratad; refer to paragraph 120,

Fig, 93—View showing injector ieak-off linedisconnected from injector. Note copper seai-ing washers piaced on each side of banjo

fitting.

Fig. 94—Cap or piug ail openings when re-moving injector assembiy. Dust washer (t)keeps dirt out of injactor bora in cyiindar haad.Ba sura saat in bora is daan and inataii saaling

waahar (2) whan rainstalling injactor.

38

SHOP MANUAL

cylinder head area around the injec-tors. Disconnect the injector leak-off line(Fig. 93) at each injector and at the fuelreturn line. Disconnect the injector lineat the pump and at the injector. Cap alllines and openings. Remove the tworetaining nuts and carefully remove theinjector from cylinder head (Fig. 94).

Prior to reinstalling injectors, checkthe injector seats in cylinder head to seethat they are clean and free from anycarbon deposit. Install a new copperwasher in the seat and a new cork dustsealing washer around the body of theinjector. Insert the injector in cylinderbore, install retaining washers and nutsand tighten the nuts evenly andalternately to a torque of 10-15 ft.-lbs.Position new leak-off fitting gasketsbelow and above each banjo fitting andinstall the banjo fitting bolts to a torqueof 5-7 ft.-lbs. Reconnect leak-off line toreturn line. Check the fuel injector lineconnections to be sure they are clean andreinstall lines, tightening connections atpump end only. Crank engine until astream of fuel is pumped out of each lineat injector connection, then tighten theconnections. Start and run engine to besure that injector is properly sealed andthat injector line and leak-off lineconnections are not leaking.

123. OVERHAUL INJECTORS. Un-less complete and proper equipment is

available, do not attempt to overhauldiesei nozzles. Equipment recommendedby Ford is Ford tool No. 2021-Poptester,No. 1719-Injector Holding Fixture andNo. 1720-Injector Cleaning Kit. Toolsmay be ordered by using Common ToolOrder Form, FTO 8091, available atFord Tractor Dealerships then forward-ing order to nearest district office.

Secure injector holding fixture. No.1719, in a vise and mount injectorassembly in fixture. Never clampinjector body in vise. Remove cap nutand back-off adjusting screw then lift offupper spring disc, injector spring andspindle. Remove the nozzle retaining nutusing nozzle nut socket (8136), orequivalent, and remove the nozzle andvalve. Nozzles and valves are a lapped fitand must never be interchanged. PlaceaU parts in clean fuel oil or calibratingfluid as they are disassembled. Cleaninjector assembly exterior as follows:Soften hard carbon deposits formed inthe spray holes and on needle tip bysoaking in a suitable carbon solvent,then use a soft wire (brass) brush toremove carbon from needle and nozzleexterior. Rinse the nozzle and needleimmediately after cleaning to preventthe carbon solvent from corroding thehighly finished surfaces. Clean thepressure chamber of the nozzle with a0.043 inch reamer as shown in Fig. 97.Clean the spray holes with the proper

Paragraph 123

size wire probe held in a pin vise asshown in Fig. 98. To prevent breakageof wire probe, the wire should protrudefrom pin vise only far enough to passthrough the spray holes. Rotate pin vise

1

NOZZLE NUTREMOVER ANDiNSTAlLER

NOZZLERETAININGHUT

^HOLDINGFIXTURE

TORQUEWRENCH

Fig. 95—View showinig irt-jector assembly mountedon holding fixture; nozziaretaining nut is baing tight-anad using spadai wranch

and torqua wrench.

Fig. 96A-Explodad viaw of aarty injactor.Rafar also to Fig. 105.

1. Leak-off bolt2. Washer3. Leak off hose4. Cap5. Seal washer6. Adjusting screw7. Spring plate8. Spring9. SpindTe

10. Adapter washer11. Connector12. Holder assembly13. Shim14. Dowel15. Nozzle assembly16. Nozzle nut17. Seal18. Sealing washer

13

1. Copper washer2. No2zlebody3. Nozzle holder

NOZZLEPRESSURECHAMBER

PRESSURECHAMBERDRILL

Fig, 96--Explodad view of lata model injector.

4. Washer5. Adjusting screw6. Cap nut

7. Leak off Unewashers

8. Leak off line fitting9. Washer

10. Spring11. SpindTe12. Needle valve13. Nozzle retaining nut

Fig. 97—Cleaning nozzie tip cavitypressure chambar drill.

with

39

Paragraph 123 Cont.

without applying undue pressure. Use a0.012-inch diameter wire probe.

The valve seats in nozzle are cleanedby inserting the valve seat scraper intothe nozzle and rotating scraper. Refer toFig. 99. The annular groove in top ofnozzle and the pressure chamber arecleaned by using (rotating) the pressurechamber carbon remover tool as shownin Fig. 100.

When above cleaning is accomplishedback flush nozzle and needle by installingreverse flushing adapter (8124) on thenozzle tester and inserting nozzle andneedle assembly tip end first into theadapter and secure with knurled nut asshown in Fig. 101. Rotate the needle innozzle while operating tester lever.After nozzle is back flushed, the seat canbe polished by using a small amount of

FORD

Fig. 101 —A back flushattachment is installed onnozzie tester to dean noz-zle by reverse flow offiuid; note proper instaii-ation of nozzia in tha

adaptar.

NOZZLECLEANINGWIRE

tallow on.the end of a polishing stick androtating stick in nozzle as shown in Fie.102.

If the leak-back test time was greaterthan 40 seconds (refer to paragraph 121),or if needle is sticking in bore of nozzle,correction can be made by lapping theneedle and nozzle assembly. This is ac-complished by using a polishing com-pound (Bacharach No. 66-0655 is sug-gested) as follows: Place small diameterof nozzle in a chuck of a driU having amaximum speed of less than 450 rpm.

Fig. 98—Cleaning nozzie spray holes withwire proba hald in pin vise.

VALVESEATSCRAPER NOZZLE

Fig. 99—Use scraper to dean carbon fromvalva seat in nozzia body.

Fig, 102—Polishing naadia vaive seat witntaitow and polishing stick.

Fig. 100—Pressure chambar carbon removeria usad to dean annular groove as waii asdaan carbon from prassura chamber in

nozzia.

Fig. 103—Chuck small diameter of nozzie inslow speed eiectric drili to iap needie tonozzle if leak back time is excessive or ifneedle sticks in nozzie, Hoid pin end of

needie with vise grip piiers.

Apply a small amount of polishingcompound on barrel of needle takingcare not to allow any compound on tip orbeveled seat portion, and insert needlein rotating nozzle body. Refer to Fig.103.

NOTE: Do not iap vaive for more thanfive seconds at a time and aliow parts tocooi between iapping. it is usuallynecessary to hold upper pin end ofneedle with vise-grip piiers to keep theneedle from turning with the nozzie.Work the needle in and out a few timestaking care not to put any pressureagainst seat, then withdraw the needie,remove nozzie from chuck and thorough-iy ciean the nozzie and needle assemblyusing back fiush adapter and testerpump.

Prior to reassembly, rinse all parts inclean fuel oil or calibrating fluid andassemble while still wet. Position thenozzle and needle valve on injector bodyand be sure dowel pins in body arecorrectly located in nozzle as shown inFig. 104.

NOTE: Piace injector in hoiding fixture(1719) and tighten nut and new washerwith socket (8126).

Install the spindle, spring, upperspring disc and spring adjusting screw.Connect the injector to tester and adjustopening pressure as in paragraph 118.Use a new copper washer and install capnut. Recheck nozzle opening pressure to

Fig. 104—Be sure dowei pins in nozzle holderenter mating holes in nozzie body.

40

SHOP MANUAL

be sure that installing nut did not changeadjustment. Retest injector as outlinedin paragraphs 119 through 121; renewnozzle and needle if still faulty. If theinjectors are to be stored after overhaul,it is recommended that they be thor-oughly flushed with calibrating fluidprior to storage.

FUEL INJECTION PUMP

125. LUBRICATION. The Minimec orSimms fuel injection pump is lubricatedby oil sump in the pump cambox. Aftereach 300 hours of Simms pump opera-tion, the pump should be drained, thecambox breather cleaned and thecambox refilled to proper level withnew, clean engine oil. Periodic oil changeis not required on Minimec pump. Use

NOZZLEHOLDERBODY

NOZZLE

NOZZLE RETAININGNUT

SHIMWASHER(2701E-9K548)

Fig, 105—CrosS'Sactionai viaw showing shimwaahar {13—Fig. 96A} inatailad batwaan noz-

zia body and nozzia rataining nut.

same weight and type oil as for enginecrankcase; refer to Fig. 106 for locationof drain plug, oil level plug and fillerplug.

Whenever installing a new or rebuiltfuel injection pump, be sure the camboxis filled with engine oil before attempt-ing to start engine. There will be someoil dilution with diesei fuel during engineoperation and after engine is stopped,some of the fuel-oil mixture may runfrom overflow tube.

126. PUMP TIMING. To check andadjust pump timing, proceed as follows:Remove Proof-Meter drive cable, coverand gasket from rear end of fuelinjection pump. Remove cover platefrom front side of engine timing gearcover and remove the flywheel timinghole cover plate from right rear side ofengine. Turn engine clockwise untilpunch marked V-notch in rear end ofinjection pump camshaft points towardtiming mark on pump housing (Fig. 107),then continue to turn engine slowly untilthe 23** BTDC timing mark on flywheel(Fig. 108) is aligned with arrow at edgeof timing hole. The timing marks on fuelinjection pump- should then be exactlyaligned as shown in Fig. 109; if not,loosen the three cap screws that retaingear to fuel injection pump drive huband rotate the pump camshaft untilmarks are aligned. Tighten the capscrews to a torque of 20-25 ft.-lbs.Recheck timing marks and if aligned,reinstall the injection pump timing gearcover and reconnect Proof-Meter drive.

127. R&R FUEL INJECTION PUMP.Thoroughly clean the pump, lines andconnections and the area around thepump. Proceed as outlined in paragraph126 to bring the flywheel and pumptiming marks into alignment and shut offthe fuel. Remove the pump to injectorlines, disconnect the fuel inlet and outlet

Paragraphs 125-127

lines from fuel lift pump and the filter toinjection pump line and immediately capall openings. Disconnect the throttle andfuel shut-off controls. Remove the threecap screws retaining gear to injectionpump drive hub and remove the gearclamping plate. Remove the cap screwsretaining pump to engine front plate andremove the pump assembly. The pumpdrive gear will remain in the enginetiming gear cover and cannot becomeout-of-time; however, the engine shouldnot be turned with pump removed.Remove excess leak-off line from pumpand plug the opening.

To reinstall the fuel injection pump,reverse the removal procedures andtime the pump as outlined in paragraph126. Tighten the fuel injection pumpretaining cap screws to a torque of 26-30ft.-lbs. and the gear to drive hubretaining cap screws to a torque of 20-25ft.-lbs. Bleed fuel injection pump asoutlined in paragraph 114A or 115A.

PROOF-METgRCABLE CONNECTION

Fig. 108—View with cover plata ramovadshowing timing pointer on angina raar plate

and timing marks on ftywhaal.

Fig. 106—View showing fiiier plug {1), levelplug {2) and drain plug {3) for fuel injection

pump cambox and governor lubricating oii.

Fig. 107—View of fual injection pump withProof-Meter drive covar removed, "V" notchwith two punch marks on rear end of pumpcamshaft should align with timing mark onhousing when No. 1 piston is at 23** BTDC

on compression stroke.

Fig. 109—Pump drive gear cover is removedto show timing marks on drive gear adapter

hub and on pump housing.

41

Paragraphs 128-130 FORD

FUEL LIFT PUMP

128. The fuel lift pump is mounted onthe outside of the fuel injection pumpand is driven from a cam on the injectionpump camshaft. The fuel pump is of thediaphragm type, and the componentparts are available for service. Refer toexploded view of the fuel pump assemblyin Fig. 110. The inlet and outlet valves(4) are staked into the outer body (3);when renewing valves, insert in body asshown and carefully stake in position.The primer lever retaining pin (12) mustbe installed with outer end below flushwith the machined surface of inner body(7), to prevent damage to diaphragm (5).After inserting pivot pin (10) in innerbody, securely stake pin in place.

To test pump, operate the primerlever with lines disconnected and withfingers closing the inlet port; pumpshould hold vacuum after releasingprimer lever. With finger closing outletport, there should be a weU definedsurge of pressure when operatingprimer lever.

INJECTION PUMP DRIVE GEAR

129. To remove the fuel injectionpump drive gear, first remove theengine timing gear cover as outlined inparagraph 86. Then, remove the threecap screws, retainer plate and the fuel

injection pump drive gear.Prior to installing gear, turn engine

crankshaft so that timing marks oncrankshaft gear and camshaft gear pointtowards center of idler (camshaft drive)gear. Then, remove the self-locking capscrew retaining idler gear to front face ofcylinder block, remove the idler gearand reinstall with timing marks alignedwith marks on crankshaft gear andcamshaft gear. Tighten idler gear capscrew to a torque of 100-105 ft.-lbs.

Place the pump drive gear on adapterhub with timing mark aligned withtiming mark on idler gear. Place retainerplate on gear, install socket wrench onnut on front end of pump camshaft andturn pump camshaft until timing markon adapter is aligned with timing mark(pointer) on pump front plate. Then,turn the pump slowly in a counter-clock-wise direction (as viewed from front ofengine), if necessary, so that the capscrews can be installed through retainerplate and drive gear into the pump driveadapter. Turn the engine clockwise untilNo. 1 piston is at the 23 degrees BTDCmark on flywheel, on compressionstroke. With pump drive gear retainingcap screws loose, turn the pumpcamshaft with socket wrench so thatpump timing marks are aligned (Fig.109), then tighten the drive gearretaining cap screws to a torque of 20-25ft.-lbs.

Fig. 110—Expiodad viaw ofdiaphragm type fual lift

pump,1. Cover2. Pulsator diaphragm3. Outer body4. Valves5. Pump diaphragm6. Diaphragm spring7. Inner body8. Cam lever spring9. Cam lever

10. Pivot pin11. Diaphragm lever12. Retaining pin13. Return spring14. "O"rine15. Primer lever

U 19

Fig. Ill—Adjusting pointsfor throttia linkaga arashown for ail modais ax-capt TW-10, TW-20 andTW-30. Unkaga is ad-juatad to obtain daairadangina high idle speed;pump is not fitted withhigh idle speed stop screw.

GOVERNOR AND THROTTLELINKAGE ADJUSTMENT

130. Idle speed must be adjusted withengine at normal operating tempera-ture. High idle speed for Models 9000,9600, 9700, TW-20 and TW-30 is2420-2470 rpm. High idle speed for aUother models is 2530-2580 rpm. Low idlespeed for all models is 700-800 rpm. Toadjust low idle speed on all models,readjust stop screw on fuel injectionpump, (4-Fig . 90or 3 - F i g . 112).

To adjust high idle speed on ModelsTW-10, TW-20 and TW-30, disconnectthrottle linkage and turn maximum noload stop screw (1—Fig. 112), untilspecified idle speed is obtained. Toadjust high idle on other models, discon-nect throttle rod (POINT "A"-Fig.I l l ) , loosen jam nut (6) and shorten rodto increase speed or lengthen rod todecrease speed. Push hand throttle leverforward against stop and check high idlespeed. If not within recommended speedrange, loosen rear clip (1) and whileholding foot pedal depressed againstplatform and hand throttle forwardagainst stop, tighten clip. Measuredistance between front clip (2) and rearclip; if not within 4.44 to 4.70 inches,loosen front clip, reposition so thatdistance measures 4V2 inches andtighten clip. Recheck high idle speed forboth foot throttle and hand throttleoperations and readjust if necessary.

On models with hand throttle only,check high idle speed with throttle leveragainst forward stop. If high idle speedis not within recommended range,disconnect throttle rod (POINT "A"),loosen jam nut (6) and shorten throttlerod to increase speed or lengthen rod todecrease speed. Reconnect throttle rodand tighten jam nut. Recheck high idlespeed and readjust if necessary.

Fig. 112—Pump spaed adjustmants forModeis TW-10, TW-20 and TW-30.

I. Maximum no loadstop screw

2. Control stop3. Low idle speed stop

42

SHOP MANUAL

TURBOCHARGER134. 9000, 9600, TW-2() and TW-30

models are equipped with a turbo-charger. These models will have either aSchwitzer Model 3LD or AiResearchturbocharger. Refer to Figs. 115 or 117for identification. Major componentsconsist of turbine, turbine housing,compressor, compressor housing andbearing housing. Model TW-30 isequipped with an intercooler as noted inparagraph 142.

TROUBLESHOOTING

ia5. If turbocharger malfunctions,review following troubleshootingseetions to determine cause:

TURBOCHARGER NOISY. If turba-charger is noisy check the following:

Dirty air cleaner.Foreign material or object in compres-

sor to intake manifold duct.Foreign object in engine exhaust

system.TURBOCHARGER BINDING OR

DRAGGING. If turbocharger binds ordrags check the following:

Damaged compressor wheel.Damaged turbine wheel.Worn bearings, shaft journals or

bearing bores.Excessive dirt buOd up in compressor.Excessive carbon build up behind

turbine wheel.SEAL LEAKS AT COMPRESSOR

END OF TURBOCHARGER. Check thefollowing:

Dirty air cleaner.Restricted duct between air cleaner

and turbocharger.Loose compressor-to-intake manifold

duct connections.Leaks at intake manifold.Restricted turbocharger oil drain line.Plugged crankcase breather.Worn or damaged compressor wheel.Exeessive engine blow-by.

SEAL LEAKS AT COMPRESSOREND OF TURBOCHARGER. Check thefollowing:

Excessive pre-oiling.Plugged engine crankcase breather.Restricted turbocharger oil drain Une.Worn bearings, bores or shaft jour-

nals.WORN TURBOCHARGER BEAR-

INGS, BORES OR JOURNALS. Checkfor:

Inadequate pre-oiling following turbo-charger installation or engine lubeservicing.

Contaminated or improper grade ofengine oil used in engine.

Restricted oil feed line.Plugged engine oil filter.Insufficient oil to turbocharger caused

by oil lag.Insufficient oil supply caused by oil

pump malfunction.

137. REMOVE AND REINSTALL.During removal procedure, be sure tocap or plug all manifold, turbochargerand oil tube openings to prevent dam-age to turbocharger due to foreignmatter.

To remove turbocharger, removehood side panels, exhaust extension,hood top panel, exhaust pipe, exhaustpipe flange and sealing ring. Removefuel tank on TW-20 models and intercool-er on TW-30 models. Disconnect aircleaner and intake manifold tubes fromturbocharger. Disconnect oil supply andoil return tubes from turbocharger.Remove oil supply tube adapter. Re-move four nuts and lockwashers secur-ing turbocharger to exhaust manifoldadapter and remove turbocharger.

To reinstall, place turbocharger onexhaust manifold adapter with a newgasket, use new tabbed lockwashers andtighten nuts to 30-35 ft.-lbs. Install oilsupply tube adapter and new gasket andconnect oil supply tube. Do not connectoil return tube at this time. Positionexhaust seal ring in turbocharger.Install exhaust pipe flange and secure to

1. Compressor housing2. Nut3. Compressor wheel4. Snap ring5. Insert6. "O"ring7. Flinger sleeve8. Seal ring9. Oil deflector

10. Thrust ring11. Thrust plate12. Bearing13. Bearing housing14. Clamp band15. Nut16. Seal ring17. Turbine wheel &

shaft18. Turbine housing1,9. Clamp plate20. Cap screw

Fig. 115-Exptoded view of Schwitzer Model 3LD turbocharger used on 9000, 9600, 9700tractors.

Paragraphs 134-138

exhaust manifold adapter. Connectintake manifold tubes to turbochargerand tighten clamp bolts to 15-20 in.-lbs.Be sure there is no strain on compressorcover from intake manifold tube. Ifnecessary, loosen compressor coverbolts and realign cover with intakemanifold. Be sure compressor cover isseated properly and tighten cover boltsto 60 in.-lbs. Tighten air cleaner toturbocharger clamp bolts to 15-20in.-lbs. Install exhaust pipe and tightenexhaust pipe flange bolts to 20-26 ft.-lbs.and the support bracket nuts to 8-12ft.-lbs.

To prime turbocharger, proceed asfollows: With oil return tube disconnect-ed, place a container under the oil returnpassage of the turbocharger bearinghousing and crank engine with dieseiengine stop control out until there is asteady flow of oil from oil return passageof bearing housing. Connect oil returntube to turbocharger, install top hoodpanel, hood side panels and exhaustextension. Retighten all bolts afterseveral hours of operation.

138. OVERHAUL (Schwitzer). Re-move turbocharger as outlined inparagraph 137. Before disassembling,mark relative positions of compressorcover, bearing housing and turbinehousing to aid in reassembly. Removecompressor cover and note that bolts areof a special design and same type mustbe used if the bolts are to be renewed.Remove clan\p band (14—Fig. 115) andseparate core assembly from turbinehousing. It may be necessary to taplightly on turbine housing to dislodgecore assembly. The turbine wheel andshaft can be conveniently held bymounting a 5/8-inch 12-point box endwrench in a vise, so that turbine shaftcan be inserted into wrench, withcompressor wheel up. Remove compres-sor wheel retaining nut (2) being carefulnot to apply pressure to turbine or

7 Fig. 116—Thrust plate (T) is instailad ondowal pins {D) with bronze face up. Notecut-out {N) in thrust piata for Up of oil

deflector.

43

Paragraphs 139-140

compressor wheel fins. Remove com-pressor wheel (3) and withdraw turbinewheel (17) and shaft assembly. Removebearing (12) and mark bearing so it canbe reinstalled in its original position.Remove bearing housing snap ring (4)and using two screwdrivers, lift insert(5) and "0" ring (6) from housing.Remove remainder of components inbearing housing. If sealing rings (8 and16) are removed, note that they aredifferent in diameter and should bemarked to prevent incorrect assembly.

Soak turbocharger components in asuitable solvent and clean using a softbrush, plastic blade or compressed air.

CAUTION: Do not use a wire brush,steel scraper or caustic solution forcleaning as this will damage turbo-charger parts.

139. Inspect turbine wheel andcompressor wheel blades, which shouldbe renewed if any blades are broken,bent or cracked. If any one blade is bentless than 20**, wheel may be used. Ifmore than one blade is bent discardwheel. Do not attempt to straightenblades.

Inspect all bearing and thrust surfacesfor wear, excessive scoring, grooves orheavy scratch marks. Inspect seal ringsand grooves, inspect bearing housing forcracks and wear in bearing bore. Inspectoil supply holes in housing and be surethey are clear of obstacles.

To assemble, refer to exploded view inFig. 115. Install copper-coated seal ring(16) on turbine wheel. Be sure correctsealing ring is installed. Lubricatesealing ring and turbine shaft withengine oil and install in bearing housing,being careful not to damage seal ring re-cess in bearing housing or bearing bore.Lubricate bearing (12) and install inbearing housing or turbine wheel shaft.If original bearing is being used, itshould be reinstalled in its originalposition* Install thrust plate (11) ondowel pins with bronze face up as shownin Fig. 116. Lubricate and install thrustring (10—Fig. 115). Install oil deflector(9) on dowel pins so that lip is in towardshousing. Install seal ring (8) on flingersleeve (7) and install flinger sleeve andseal ring in insert (5) so that flat side ofsleeve (7) is flush with flat side of insert(5). Lubricate "0" ring and place ingroove of insert (5). Install insert (5) inbearing housing with flat side out andpress into counterbore until snap ringgroove in bearing housing is clear. Besure flinger sleeve remains in placewhen installing insert. Install snap ring(4) with beveled side out, and placecompressor wheel on turbine wheelshaft. Coat the threads of a new locknutwith graphite grease and install locknuton turbine wheel shaft and tighten to 156

in.-lbs. Spin compressor wheel and noteany binding or rubbing of components.Assembly must spin freely. Check forturbine wheel shaft end play. Normalend play is 0.006 inch. If end play isexcessive, check for abnormal wear onthrust surfaces. If there is no end play,check for carbon build-up on turbinewheel surface.

Reassemble remainder of assembly byreversing disassembly procedure. Tight-en clamp band nut to 120 in.-lbs. Wheninstalling compressor cover, align coverwith reference marks made duringdisassembly. Tighten compressor coverbolts using a diagonal pattern to 60in.-lbs. Check that assembly wiH spinfreely and disassemble if any drag is felt.To reinstall turbocharger, refer toparagraph 137.

140. OVERHAUL (AiResearch). Re-move turbocharger as outlined inparagraph 137. Clean housing and markfor proper alignment during reassembly.Bend lockplate tabs (3 and 20—Fig. 117),remove bolts (4 and 19), clamps (2 and21) and carefully separate housingassemblies. Remove locknut (18) whilesupporting center housing in a verticalposition. Avoid bending turbine wheelshaft (5) while removing compressorwheel (17) from turbine wheel assembly.Turn over housing and withdraw turbinewheel assembly with piston ring (6).Bend locktabs on lockplate (23) andremove remaining bolts, lockplate (23)and backplate assembly (16). Do not dis-assemble backplate assembly. Centerhousing pins (14) should not be removedunless renewal is required.

Fig. 117—Exploded view of AiRaaaarch turbo-chargar.

1. Turbine housing2. Clamp3. Lockplate4. Bolt5. Turbine wheel assembly6. Rear piston ring7. Wheel shroud8. Snap ring9. Bearing

10. Thrust collar11. Front piston rinir12. Seal ring

13. Thrust bearing14. Spring pin15. Center housing16. Backplate assembly17. Compressor wheel18. IxK:knut19. Bolt20. Lockplate21. Clamp22. Compressor housing23. Ix>ckplate24. Bolt

FORD

Small parts should be inspected forburns, rubbing, scoring and otherdamage before cleaning, then clean partsin a non-caustic solution using a softbristle brush, plastic scraper and drycompressed air. To make sure oil squirthole (1—Fig. 118) isn't plugged, insert a0.053-0.060 inch diameter wire into oilsquirt hole of center housing. Refer toparagraph 139 for component inspectionprocedure.

The following parts should be renewedwhenever turbocharger is overhauled ordisassembled: Bolts (4, 19 and 24—Fig.117), lockplates (3, 20 and 23), sealingring (12), piston rings (6 and 11), snaprings (8), and bearings (9).

Refer to Fig. 117 to assembleturbocharger. Reassembly procedure isthe reverse of disassembly, however thefollowing steps should be taken: Fillpiston ring groove with high vacuumsilicon grease manufactured by Dow-Corning or equivalent. Install piston ring(6) and shroud (7) on turbine wheelassembly (5), then g iide wheel assemblyshaft through bearings (9). Slide shaftinto center housing (15) as far as it willgo. Place serrated end of turbine wheelassembly in a suitable socket or box endwrench clamped in a vise. Install thrustcollar (10) on turbine wheel assembly (5)and slide the assembled parts downagainst center housing (15) so pins (14)engage thrust bearing holes. Installbackplate (16) over turbine wheel shaft(5) and guide piston ring (11) intobackplate bore. Install screws (24) andlockplate (23) then tighten screws to atorque of 75-90 in.-lbs. Install compres-sor wheel (17) on turbine wheel shaft.

Fig. 118—Sectionai view of turbochargercanter housing.

1. Oil sauirt hole2. Turbine end oil

cavity

44

SHOP MANUAL

After oiling washer face and threads oflocknut (18), install locknut on shaft andtighten to a torque of 18 in.-lbs. thenturn nut an additional 90 degrees. Applyhigh temperature sealer to threads ofhousing screws and attach turbinehousing (1) to center housing (15).Tighten screws (4) tight enough to pre-vent turbine wheel from contactinghousing. Install compressor housing (22)on backplate (16) and install clamps (21),lockplates (20) and screws. Tightenscrews only enough to prevent housingcontact with compressor wheel. If align-ment marks are positioned properly,tighten screws to a torque of 100-130in.-lbs. and bend lockplate tabs.

INTERCOOLER142. Model TW-30 is equipped with a

turbocharger intercooler. Air from theturbocharger is cooled before it entersthe intake manifold. This processincreases air density and permitsincreased fuel delivery to the engine,resulting in an increase in horsepower.Main parts of the intercooler are: Tipturbine fan and housing, pre-cleaner andheat exchanger. Components may beremoved as necessary for repair aftertractor hood and side panels areremoved.

143. OVERHAUL TIP TURBINEFAN. Mark both housings for properalignment during reassembly. Remove

fan connector (4-Fig. 119), with checkvalve flapper (5) from turbine housing(8) then separate valve and connector.Remove gasket (6) and bridge (7) fromhousing. Remove baffle assembly (22)from inlet housing. Remove inlet hous-ing screws, lockwashers and separate in-let housing (21) from turbine fan assem-bly (8).

NOTE: It may be necessary to break

face of seal by tapping with a brass

mallet.

Remove locknut (20) while usingsuitable tools to keep the shaft fromturning. Remove cover (19) and fanwheel (18) from turbine and dischargehousing (1).

NOTE: It is not necessary to separatethe turbine housing and dischargehousing If there Is no damage.

To disassemble discharge housingshaft and bearing assembly remove snapring (9) and grease retainer (10) then re-move shaft far enough so "0" ring (14)can be removed. Remove "0" ring,withdraw retainer (11) and shims (12)from shaft. Remove bearing spacer (15).It is not necessary to remove washershields (16) and spring (17) unless springis damaged.

Inspect parts before cleaning, thenclean all parts in a non-caustic solutionusing a soft bristle brush, plastic scraperand compressed air.

2019

18

Fig, 119—Exploded viaw ofheat axchanger fan.

1. Fan discharge housing2. Snap ring3. Fan housing cup plug4. Fan connector5. Check valve flapper6. Housing gasket7. Bridge8. Turbine housing9. Snap ring

10. Grease retainer11. Bearing retainer12. Shim13. Baaring and shaft14. "O"ring15. Bearing spacer16. Washers17. Shaft spring18. Fan wheel19. Cover20. Locknut21. Inlet housing22. Baffle asseml>ly

Paragraphs 142-145

144. After cleaning, inspect housing(21), wheel (18), and turbine housing (8),for wheel rubbing. Turbine housingshould be inspected for nozzle blade ero-sion (both blade edges must be round).

Inspect shaft (13) for worn, crossed orstripped threads. Bearings and shaftassembly should be separated only ifinstallinf^ new components. Shaft diame-ter at bearing location should be 0.4725inch and at wheel location 0.4717 inch.Fan wheel (18) bore diameter shouldn'texceed 0.4724 inch and bearing bores ofdischarge housing assembly (1) shouldnot exceed 1.2604 inches.

Inspect turbine and cooling air pas-sages for salt build up and flapper valve(5) for dirt. Replace if outer rim is bentmore than 0.150 inch. Inspect bearingassemblies (13), snap ring and greaseretainer (10) for excessive wear. Renewparts as necessary.

145. Reassembly procedure is the re-verse of disassembly, however thefollowing steps should be taken: Installshaft and bearing components after firstapplying aU grease supplied in bearingand shaft kit. Ford part No. D8NN-6N839-AA, to free area between bear-ings.

Assemble discharge (1) and turbine (8)housings with marks aligned and tightenretaining screws to a torque of 100-120in.-lbs. Install locknut (20) but do nottighten until shim (12) thickness isdetermined. With fan, bearings andshaft components assembled, mount adial gage on mating surface of turbinehousing as shown in Fig. 120. Zero dialgage on mating surface (M) thenreposition dial gage'to read difference inheight between housing mating surfaceand fan wheel at surface (F). Rotate fanwheel and take at least four readings.Average the readings and the result willbe thickness of shim (12-Fig. 119).

8 18

Fig. 120—View showing dial gage piacementto determine fan wheel shim size as outltnad

in taxt.

D. Dial gageF. Fan wheel surfaceM. Housing mating surface

8. Turbine housing18. Fan wheel

45

SHOP MANUAL

After oiling washer face and threads oflocknut (18), install locknut on shaft andtighten to a torque of 18 in.-lbs. thenturn nut an additional 90 degrees. Applyhigh temperature sealer to threads ofhousing screws and attach turbinehousing (1) to center housing (15).Tighten screws (4) tight enough to pre-vent turbine wheel from contactinghousing. Install compressor housing (22)on backplate (16) and install clamps (21),lockplates (20) and screws. Tightenscrews only enough to prevent housingcontact with compressor wheel. If align-ment marks are positioned properly,tighten screws to a torque of 100-130in.-lbs. and bend lockplate tabs.

INTERCOOLER142. Model TW-30 is equipped with a

turbocharger intercooler. Air from theturbocharger is cooled before it entersthe intake manifold. This processincreases air density and permitsincreased fuel delivery to the engine,resulting in an increase in horsepower.Main parts of the intercooler are: Tipturbine fan and housing, pre-cleaner andheat exchanger. Components may beremoved as necessary for repair aftertractor hood and side panels areremoved.

143. OVERHAUL TIP TURBINEFAN. Mark both housings for properalignment during reassembly. Remove

fan connector (4-Fig. 119), with checkvalve flapper (5) from turbine housing(8) then separate valve and connector.Remove gasket (6) and bridge (7) fromhousing. Remove baffle assembly (22)from inlet housing. Remove inlet hous-ing screws, lockwashers and separate in-let housing (21) from turbine fan assem-bly (8).

NOTE: It may be necessary to break

face of seal by tapping with a brass

mallet.

Remove locknut (20) while usingsuitable tools to keep the shaft fromturning. Remove cover (19) and fanwheel (18) from turbine and dischargehousing (1).

NOTE: It is not necessary to separatethe turbine housing and dischargehousing If there Is no damage.

To disassemble discharge housingshaft and bearing assembly remove snapring (9) and grease retainer (10) then re-move shaft far enough so "0" ring (14)can be removed. Remove "0" ring,withdraw retainer (11) and shims (12)from shaft. Remove bearing spacer (15).It is not necessary to remove washershields (16) and spring (17) unless springis damaged.

Inspect parts before cleaning, thenclean all parts in a non-caustic solutionusing a soft bristle brush, plastic scraperand compressed air.

2019

18

Fig, 119—Exploded viaw ofheat axchanger fan.

1. Fan discharge housing2. Snap ring3. Fan housing cup plug4. Fan connector5. Check valve flapper6. Housing gasket7. Bridge8. Turbine housing9. Snap ring

10. Grease retainer11. Bearing retainer12. Shim13. Baaring and shaft14. "O"ring15. Bearing spacer16. Washers17. Shaft spring18. Fan wheel19. Cover20. Locknut21. Inlet housing22. Baffle asseml>ly

Paragraphs 142-145

144. After cleaning, inspect housing(21), wheel (18), and turbine housing (8),for wheel rubbing. Turbine housingshould be inspected for nozzle blade ero-sion (both blade edges must be round).

Inspect shaft (13) for worn, crossed orstripped threads. Bearings and shaftassembly should be separated only ifinstallinf^ new components. Shaft diame-ter at bearing location should be 0.4725inch and at wheel location 0.4717 inch.Fan wheel (18) bore diameter shouldn'texceed 0.4724 inch and bearing bores ofdischarge housing assembly (1) shouldnot exceed 1.2604 inches.

Inspect turbine and cooling air pas-sages for salt build up and flapper valve(5) for dirt. Replace if outer rim is bentmore than 0.150 inch. Inspect bearingassemblies (13), snap ring and greaseretainer (10) for excessive wear. Renewparts as necessary.

145. Reassembly procedure is the re-verse of disassembly, however thefollowing steps should be taken: Installshaft and bearing components after firstapplying aU grease supplied in bearingand shaft kit. Ford part No. D8NN-6N839-AA, to free area between bear-ings.

Assemble discharge (1) and turbine (8)housings with marks aligned and tightenretaining screws to a torque of 100-120in.-lbs. Install locknut (20) but do nottighten until shim (12) thickness isdetermined. With fan, bearings andshaft components assembled, mount adial gage on mating surface of turbinehousing as shown in Fig. 120. Zero dialgage on mating surface (M) thenreposition dial gage'to read difference inheight between housing mating surfaceand fan wheel at surface (F). Rotate fanwheel and take at least four readings.Average the readings and the result willbe thickness of shim (12-Fig. 119).

8 18

Fig. 120—View showing dial gage piacementto determine fan wheel shim size as outltnad

in taxt.

D. Dial gageF. Fan wheel surfaceM. Housing mating surface

8. Turbine housing18. Fan wheel

45

Paragraphs 147-153 FORD

Shims are available in thicknesses of0.002, 0.005 and 0.01() inch. With fanwheel properly positioned on shaft,tighten locknut (2()) to 140-160 in.-lbs. Ifwheel drag is noticed when turning byhand, recheck clearance. Replace fan ifhousing rub can't be eliminated byshimming. Press bridge (7—Fij?. 119 and121) into turbine housing (8) so top ofbridge is 0.05-0.06 inch below surface(M-Fig. 121). Reinstall aU remainingcomponents.

147. OVERHAUL HEAT EXCHANG-ER. General maintenance may beperformed with unit on engine. Removetip turbine fan for inspection of fan sideof intercooler. Accumulated dirt and oilshould be removed. Replace gasketswhenever heat exchanger is removed.Before disassembly, mark top of coolercore for proper alignment during re-assembly.

Remove intercooler from intakemanifold to prevent dirt from enteringintake system. Remove old gaskets,steam clean, rinse with water and blowdry.

NOTE: Do not use petroleum basedsolvents for cleaning cooler on engine.

Clean any remaining gasket material

Fig. 121—Viaw showing bridge {7-Fig. 119)installation. Prass bridge {7) into turbine hous-ing so top of bridge is 0,05-0.06 inch below

surfaca M. Refer to text and Fig, 119.

from surface of unit. Use Dow-CorningNo. 732 or equivalent sealer to securenew gaskets. After gasket installation,let unit stand until sealer has cured.Reinstall intercooler assembly.

2 3 4

COOLING SYSTEMRADIATOR PRESSURE CAP

AND THERMOSTAT

151. A 7 psi radiator pressure cap isused on 8000, 9000, 8600 and 9600models. All other models use a 13 psiradiator cap. TW-10, TW-20 and TW-30models are equipped with two thermo-stats. All other models have one thermo-stat. Thermostats on Models TW-10,TW-20 and TW-30 are located in athermostat housing at front of cylinderhead, while the thermostat on all othermodels is located in front of cylinderhead. Thermostat opening temperatureon TW-10, TW-20 and TW-30 models is178**F. Thermostat opening temperatureon all other models is between 168°F.and 178**F. Thermostat(s) may beremoved after draining radiator andremoving water outlet connection.

RADIATOR

152. To remove radiator, first draincooling system and proceed as follows:Evacuate a/c system if so equipped, dis-connect lines to condenser then removegrille from radiator sheU for access tobolts. Remove engine hood side panelsand unbolt hood top panel and sidebraces from radiator shell. Disconnectradiator hoses, oil cooler and hydrauliclines then unbolt radiator shell fromfront support. Attach hoist to radiatorshell and lift the radiator, a/c condenser(if equipped) and shell unit from tractor.Remove shroud nut and radiator fromshell. Reinstall by reversing removalprocedure.

WATER PUMP

153. Water pump can be unbolted andremoved after draining cooling system.

5 6

8 ? 10 11 12 13 14 15

Fig, 122—Exploded view offan and bracket assembiy{top) and water pump as-

sembly {bottom).

1. Fan assembly2. Fan pulley3. Shaft & bearing assy.4. Fan bracket5. Fan support6. Brace7. Water pump pulley8. Pumphousmg9. Shaft & bearing assy.

10. Water slinger11. Water pump seal12. Water pump rotor13. Gasket14. Pump rear cover15. Gasket

removing pump and alternator orgenerator drive belt and disconnectinghose from pump.

Using standard two-bolt puller, re-move pulley from shaft. Remove rear

'JD

Fig. 122A—Exploded view of thermostat hous-ing and fan driva assambty on Modaia TW-10,

TW-20 and TW-30.1. Fan2. Pulley 4. ThermosUt housing3. Shaft and bearing 5. Thermostats

assy. 6. Outlet housing

BEARING SHAFT ANOSUNGEIt ASSSMSLY

HOUSING/

Fig. 123—Press bearing, shaft and siinger as-sembiy from rotor and pump housing.

SUNGER

Fig. 124—Press new slinger onto shaft sothat distance from edge of bearing outer

race to siinger is 0.55 inch.

Fig, 125—Press impeller onto shaft withV i.D. pipa so that impaiier is flush

with raar faca of housing.

46

Paragraphs 147-153 FORD

Shims are available in thicknesses of0.002, 0.005 and 0.01() inch. With fanwheel properly positioned on shaft,tighten locknut (2()) to 140-160 in.-lbs. Ifwheel drag is noticed when turning byhand, recheck clearance. Replace fan ifhousing rub can't be eliminated byshimming. Press bridge (7—Fij?. 119 and121) into turbine housing (8) so top ofbridge is 0.05-0.06 inch below surface(M-Fig. 121). Reinstall aU remainingcomponents.

147. OVERHAUL HEAT EXCHANG-ER. General maintenance may beperformed with unit on engine. Removetip turbine fan for inspection of fan sideof intercooler. Accumulated dirt and oilshould be removed. Replace gasketswhenever heat exchanger is removed.Before disassembly, mark top of coolercore for proper alignment during re-assembly.

Remove intercooler from intakemanifold to prevent dirt from enteringintake system. Remove old gaskets,steam clean, rinse with water and blowdry.

NOTE: Do not use petroleum basedsolvents for cleaning cooler on engine.

Clean any remaining gasket material

Fig. 121—Viaw showing bridge {7-Fig. 119)installation. Prass bridge {7) into turbine hous-ing so top of bridge is 0,05-0.06 inch below

surfaca M. Refer to text and Fig, 119.

from surface of unit. Use Dow-CorningNo. 732 or equivalent sealer to securenew gaskets. After gasket installation,let unit stand until sealer has cured.Reinstall intercooler assembly.

2 3 4

COOLING SYSTEMRADIATOR PRESSURE CAP

AND THERMOSTAT

151. A 7 psi radiator pressure cap isused on 8000, 9000, 8600 and 9600models. All other models use a 13 psiradiator cap. TW-10, TW-20 and TW-30models are equipped with two thermo-stats. All other models have one thermo-stat. Thermostats on Models TW-10,TW-20 and TW-30 are located in athermostat housing at front of cylinderhead, while the thermostat on all othermodels is located in front of cylinderhead. Thermostat opening temperatureon TW-10, TW-20 and TW-30 models is178**F. Thermostat opening temperatureon all other models is between 168°F.and 178**F. Thermostat(s) may beremoved after draining radiator andremoving water outlet connection.

RADIATOR

152. To remove radiator, first draincooling system and proceed as follows:Evacuate a/c system if so equipped, dis-connect lines to condenser then removegrille from radiator sheU for access tobolts. Remove engine hood side panelsand unbolt hood top panel and sidebraces from radiator shell. Disconnectradiator hoses, oil cooler and hydrauliclines then unbolt radiator shell fromfront support. Attach hoist to radiatorshell and lift the radiator, a/c condenser(if equipped) and shell unit from tractor.Remove shroud nut and radiator fromshell. Reinstall by reversing removalprocedure.

WATER PUMP

153. Water pump can be unbolted andremoved after draining cooling system.

5 6

8 ? 10 11 12 13 14 15

Fig, 122—Exploded view offan and bracket assembiy{top) and water pump as-

sembly {bottom).

1. Fan assembly2. Fan pulley3. Shaft & bearing assy.4. Fan bracket5. Fan support6. Brace7. Water pump pulley8. Pumphousmg9. Shaft & bearing assy.

10. Water slinger11. Water pump seal12. Water pump rotor13. Gasket14. Pump rear cover15. Gasket

removing pump and alternator orgenerator drive belt and disconnectinghose from pump.

Using standard two-bolt puller, re-move pulley from shaft. Remove rear

'JD

Fig. 122A—Exploded view of thermostat hous-ing and fan driva assambty on Modaia TW-10,

TW-20 and TW-30.1. Fan2. Pulley 4. ThermosUt housing3. Shaft and bearing 5. Thermostats

assy. 6. Outlet housing

BEARING SHAFT ANOSUNGEIt ASSSMSLY

HOUSING/

Fig. 123—Press bearing, shaft and siinger as-sembiy from rotor and pump housing.

SUNGER

Fig. 124—Press new slinger onto shaft sothat distance from edge of bearing outer

race to siinger is 0.55 inch.

Fig, 125—Press impeller onto shaft withV i.D. pipa so that impaiier is flush

with raar faca of housing.

46

SHOP MANUAL

cover (14—Fig. 122) and press the shaftand bearing assembly (9) out towardsfront of housing as shown in Fig. 123.Drive the seal (11-Fig . 122) outtowards rear of housing.

Using a length of 1-5/16-inch I.D.pipe, press new seal into housing. Checkto see that flange on water slinger (10) islocated 0.55 inch from edge of bearingrace as shown in Fig. 124, then pressshaft into front of housing until outerbearing race is flush with front end ofhousing. Using a lerigth of V4-inch I.D.pipe, press impeller onto shaft as shownin Fig. 125 so that impeller is flush withrear end of housing. Press pulley ontoshaft so that center of belt groove inpulley is 2Vz inches from rear face ofhousing as shown in Fig. 125A, for 8000,9000, 8600 and 9600 models and 3V2inches for all other models. Install rearcover with new gasket and tightenretaining cap screws to a torque of 18-22ft.-lbs.

Reinstall water pump by reversingremoval procedure and tighten retainingcap screws to a torque of 23-28 ft.-lbs.Drive belt is properly adjusted when aforce of 25 pounds applied midwaybetween pulleys will deflect belt 5/8 to7/8 inch.

ENGINE OIL COOLER

155. A water jacketed oil cooler(3—Fig. 126) is attached to top of powersteering motor behind the radiator on allmodels except 8700, 9700, TW-10,TW-20, and TW-30. OU flows to thecooler from the main oil gallery of engineand returns to the oil pan via right sideof cylinder block. On 8000 and 8600models only, the fitting (6) that connectsreturn tube (2) to cooler contains a reliefvalve to maintain oil pressure in theengine oil gallery at low engine speeds.This relief valve is not required on 9000and 9600 models.

Engine oil on Models 8700, 9700,TW-10 and TW-20 is cooled by an oilcooler located in the radiator lower tank.

Engine oil on TW-30 models is cooledby an oil cooler located on the left side ofcylinder block. Two spin on oO filters areattached to it.

FAN AND FAN BRACKET

All Models ExceptTW-10, TW-20 And TW-30

156. To remove fan and fan bracketassembly, unbolt fan from pulley (2—Fig. 122) hub, then unbolt bracket (4)from support (5) and remove thebracket, bearing and pulley as anassembly. Remove fan from radiatorshroud.

To renew fan bearing and shaftassembly (3), remove fan guide plug andinsert driver through pulley center holeto press bearing and shaft assemblyfrom pulley. Press bearing and shaftassembly from bracket. Reassemble andreinstall by reversing removal anddisassembly procedure.

Fan drive belt is properly adjustedwhen a force of 25 pounds appliedmidway between pulleys wiU deflect belt5/8 to 7/8 inch.

Models TW-10, TW-20 And TW-30

156A. The fan shaft and bearingassembly is carried in the thermostathousing (4—Fig. 122A), which is at-tached to front of the cylinder head.Refer to Fig. 122A for an exploded viewof thermostat housing and fan shaft andbearing. Adjust fan belt tension so beltwill deflect approximately 5/8 to 7/8inch when a force of 25 pounds is appliedmidway between pulleys.

Fig, 125A—Viaw showing water pump pulleyposition.

1. 3.5 inches—Models8700, 9700. TW-10.TW-20 and TW-302.5 inches—Models8000, 9000,8600.9600

Fig, 126—Engine oii cooler (3) is mountad onsteering motor and is connected by lowarradiator hose (1) to cooling system. Hose con-necting cooler to radiator is not shown. Notethat outlet fitting (6) contains a relief valve tomaintain engine oil pressure on 8000 and 8600

models only.

1. Cooler to engine hose2. Oil return line3. Oil cooler4. Oil pressure line

5. Inlet fitting6. Outlet fitting & relief

valve assembly

Paragraphs 155-157

ELECTRICALSYSTEM

GENERATOR AND REGULATOR

157. A Ford C7NN-10000-C 22-amperegenerator and a Ford DONN-10505-Aregfulator are used on earlier 8000 mod-els without cab. The generator is atwo-pole shunt wound type with type*'B" circuit; that is, one field coil termi-nal is grounded to generator frame andthe other field coil terminal is con-nected to armature terminal through theregulator. Output may be tested asfollows: Make sure belt is tight andterminals are tight and clean. Discon-nect the two wires from generator andconnect a jumper wire across the twoterminals. Run engine at idle, connectpositive lead of a voltmeter to eithergenerator terminal and the negative leadto the generator frame. As engine speedis increased, voltage should rise rapidly.Do not allow voltage to reach 20 volts.Overhaul generator if voltage will notrise, or is not steady. Specifications areas follows:

C7NN-10000-C GeneratorMax. output (hot) at 1350

Engine rpm and 15 volts 22 ampsRenew brushes if

shorter than 13/32-inchMin. brush spring tension

with new brushes 18 ouncesField coil current 2 ampsField coil resistance 6 ohms

Commutator min. diameter... 1.450 inchMax. commutator runout... 0.002 inchMax. armature shaft runout 0.002 inch

If generator output was tested andvoltage rise was rapid and steady, thevoltage regulator is probably defective.Regulator is a sealed unit and adjust-ment or disassembly is not recommend-ed.

ALTERNATOR ANDREGULATOR

CAUTiON: An aiternator (A.C. gener-ator) is used to suppiy charging currenton earlier 8000 models with steel cab,iater 8000 modeis without cab and aliother models. Due to the fact that certaincomponents of the aiternator can beseriously damaged by procedures thatwould not affect a D.C. generator, thefollowing precautions must be observed.

1. Always be sure that when install-ing batteries or connecting a boosterbattery, the negative posts of allbatteries are grounded.

2. Never short across any of thealternator or regulator terminals.

47

SHOP MANUAL

cover (14—Fig. 122) and press the shaftand bearing assembly (9) out towardsfront of housing as shown in Fig. 123.Drive the seal (11-Fig . 122) outtowards rear of housing.

Using a length of 1-5/16-inch I.D.pipe, press new seal into housing. Checkto see that flange on water slinger (10) islocated 0.55 inch from edge of bearingrace as shown in Fig. 124, then pressshaft into front of housing until outerbearing race is flush with front end ofhousing. Using a lerigth of V4-inch I.D.pipe, press impeller onto shaft as shownin Fig. 125 so that impeller is flush withrear end of housing. Press pulley ontoshaft so that center of belt groove inpulley is 2Vz inches from rear face ofhousing as shown in Fig. 125A, for 8000,9000, 8600 and 9600 models and 3V2inches for all other models. Install rearcover with new gasket and tightenretaining cap screws to a torque of 18-22ft.-lbs.

Reinstall water pump by reversingremoval procedure and tighten retainingcap screws to a torque of 23-28 ft.-lbs.Drive belt is properly adjusted when aforce of 25 pounds applied midwaybetween pulleys will deflect belt 5/8 to7/8 inch.

ENGINE OIL COOLER

155. A water jacketed oil cooler(3—Fig. 126) is attached to top of powersteering motor behind the radiator on allmodels except 8700, 9700, TW-10,TW-20, and TW-30. OU flows to thecooler from the main oil gallery of engineand returns to the oil pan via right sideof cylinder block. On 8000 and 8600models only, the fitting (6) that connectsreturn tube (2) to cooler contains a reliefvalve to maintain oil pressure in theengine oil gallery at low engine speeds.This relief valve is not required on 9000and 9600 models.

Engine oil on Models 8700, 9700,TW-10 and TW-20 is cooled by an oilcooler located in the radiator lower tank.

Engine oil on TW-30 models is cooledby an oil cooler located on the left side ofcylinder block. Two spin on oO filters areattached to it.

FAN AND FAN BRACKET

All Models ExceptTW-10, TW-20 And TW-30

156. To remove fan and fan bracketassembly, unbolt fan from pulley (2—Fig. 122) hub, then unbolt bracket (4)from support (5) and remove thebracket, bearing and pulley as anassembly. Remove fan from radiatorshroud.

To renew fan bearing and shaftassembly (3), remove fan guide plug andinsert driver through pulley center holeto press bearing and shaft assemblyfrom pulley. Press bearing and shaftassembly from bracket. Reassemble andreinstall by reversing removal anddisassembly procedure.

Fan drive belt is properly adjustedwhen a force of 25 pounds appliedmidway between pulleys wiU deflect belt5/8 to 7/8 inch.

Models TW-10, TW-20 And TW-30

156A. The fan shaft and bearingassembly is carried in the thermostathousing (4—Fig. 122A), which is at-tached to front of the cylinder head.Refer to Fig. 122A for an exploded viewof thermostat housing and fan shaft andbearing. Adjust fan belt tension so beltwill deflect approximately 5/8 to 7/8inch when a force of 25 pounds is appliedmidway between pulleys.

Fig, 125A—Viaw showing water pump pulleyposition.

1. 3.5 inches—Models8700, 9700. TW-10.TW-20 and TW-302.5 inches—Models8000, 9000,8600.9600

Fig, 126—Engine oii cooler (3) is mountad onsteering motor and is connected by lowarradiator hose (1) to cooling system. Hose con-necting cooler to radiator is not shown. Notethat outlet fitting (6) contains a relief valve tomaintain engine oil pressure on 8000 and 8600

models only.

1. Cooler to engine hose2. Oil return line3. Oil cooler4. Oil pressure line

5. Inlet fitting6. Outlet fitting & relief

valve assembly

Paragraphs 155-157

ELECTRICALSYSTEM

GENERATOR AND REGULATOR

157. A Ford C7NN-10000-C 22-amperegenerator and a Ford DONN-10505-Aregfulator are used on earlier 8000 mod-els without cab. The generator is atwo-pole shunt wound type with type*'B" circuit; that is, one field coil termi-nal is grounded to generator frame andthe other field coil terminal is con-nected to armature terminal through theregulator. Output may be tested asfollows: Make sure belt is tight andterminals are tight and clean. Discon-nect the two wires from generator andconnect a jumper wire across the twoterminals. Run engine at idle, connectpositive lead of a voltmeter to eithergenerator terminal and the negative leadto the generator frame. As engine speedis increased, voltage should rise rapidly.Do not allow voltage to reach 20 volts.Overhaul generator if voltage will notrise, or is not steady. Specifications areas follows:

C7NN-10000-C GeneratorMax. output (hot) at 1350

Engine rpm and 15 volts 22 ampsRenew brushes if

shorter than 13/32-inchMin. brush spring tension

with new brushes 18 ouncesField coil current 2 ampsField coil resistance 6 ohms

Commutator min. diameter... 1.450 inchMax. commutator runout... 0.002 inchMax. armature shaft runout 0.002 inch

If generator output was tested andvoltage rise was rapid and steady, thevoltage regulator is probably defective.Regulator is a sealed unit and adjust-ment or disassembly is not recommend-ed.

ALTERNATOR ANDREGULATOR

CAUTiON: An aiternator (A.C. gener-ator) is used to suppiy charging currenton earlier 8000 models with steel cab,iater 8000 modeis without cab and aliother models. Due to the fact that certaincomponents of the aiternator can beseriously damaged by procedures thatwould not affect a D.C. generator, thefollowing precautions must be observed.

1. Always be sure that when install-ing batteries or connecting a boosterbattery, the negative posts of allbatteries are grounded.

2. Never short across any of thealternator or regulator terminals.

47

Paragraphs 158-159 FORD

3. Never attempt to polarize thealternator.

4. Always disconnect all batteryground straps before removing orreplacing any electrical unit.

5. Never operate the alternator on anopen circuit; be sure that all leads areproperly connected and tightened beforestarting the engine.

158. A Motorola alternator (Ford partNo. C7NN-10300-B 55 amp, D5NN-10300-D 51 amp or D7NN-10300-B 72amp), and transistorized voltage regula-tor (Ford part No. C7NN-10316-A,D1NN-10316-A, D7NN-10316-B orD8NN-1()316-AA) are used. Servicespecifications foUow:

All AlternatorsMax. output at 160®F.,

2400 engine rpm and14.4 volts ^47 amps

Minimum brush length 3/16-inchMin. brush spring tension

with new brush 4 ouncesField current 1.8-2.4 ampsField resistance 6 ohms

•Max. output for D7NN-10a00-B alter-nator is 67 amps.

All RegulatorsVoltage regulation with 10 ampere load:

Ambient Output TerminalTemperature Voltage40°F 14.2-15.060*'F 14.1-14.980°F 13.9-14.7

lOO^F 13.8-14.6120*>F 13.6-14.4

STARTING MOTOR

159. Engine is equipped with a Fordstarting motor and relay assembly.Closing the starter switch energizes thesolenoid; movement of the solenoidplunger engages the drive pinion andcloses a two-stage switch. If the teeth ofthe drive pinion butt against teeth onflywheel, only the first stage of the

POWER STEERINGRESERVOIR SWITCH

TEMPERATURESENDING UNIT

FIELD

COMIINH> WORK A TAIl UGHT

i ^ I

WORK UGHT R H . ^ j ^ j f J

TAIL UOHT R.H.

Fig, 128—Wiring diagram for modeis with generator. Refar to Fig, 130 for modeis with aitarna-tor. Coda for reguiator connactions are as foiiows: (£) ground, (D) armatura, {WL) warning

light, {F) fiaid and (B) battery. Color code for wiring is given in iegend.

1. Brown2A. Red3. Yellow-black stripe4. Blue

5. Brown-white stripe6. YeUow-black stripe7A. White8. Red-white stripe9. Orange

lOA. Green-blue stripellA. Black-green strme

12. Yellow13. Green

14. Red15. Blue white stripe16. Blue-red stripe17. Black

48

SHOP MANUAL

switch is closed which will allow currentto flow to one field coO. This will provideenough power to turn starter until drivepinion is in position to engage flywheelring gear teeth; then, full engagement ofdrive pinion wiU close second stage ofswitch energizing all four field coils.

When drive pinion is in engaged posi-tion, there should be a clearance of0.010-0.012 inch between drive pinionand thrust collar. To check clearance,first energize solenoid with 12-voltpower source, then check clearance with

feeler gage as shown in Fig. 133. Ifclearance is not within 0.010 to 0.020inch, refer to Fig. 134, loosen locknutand turn eccentric pivot pin as requiredto obtain proper clearance. Then,tighten locknut and recheck clearance.

Service specifications are as follows:

Starting Motor And Relay AssemblyBrush spring tension (min. with

new brushes) 42 ouncesMin. brush length . . . : 5/16-inch

Paragraph 159 Cont.

Commutator min.diameter 1.50 inches

Max. armature shaft end play. 0.025 inchMax. armature shaft runout .. 0.005 inchDrive pinion clearance

(engaged) 0.015-0.025 inchNo-load test:

Volts 12Amps 117Rpm 5500-8000

Loaded test (with warm engine):Amps 250-300Engine rpm 150-200

POWER STKRINGRESERVOIIt SWITCH

TEMPERATURESENDING UNIT

Fli lD

ALTERNATOR

5:

-l'ij

COMHNED WORK A TAIL UOHT

WORK UGHT R.H.

TAIL UGHT R.H.

Fig 130-Wiring diagram for tractor equipped with aitarnator; rafar to Fig. 128 for models withgenerator. Voltaga raguiator is pra-wired with piug-in typa pigtaii. Color coda for wiring is

givan in legend.

1.2A3.4.5.

Brown. RedYellowGreenRed

5A6.7A8.

. Brown white stripeYellow-black stripe. WhiteRed white stripe

9. OrangelOA. Green blue stripellA. Black-green stripe

12. YeUow

13. Green14. Red15. Blue-white stripe16. Blue red stripe17. Black

49

Paragraph 159 Cont. FORD

^^L7J^ J^ ^u^^^ '"®*'*'* * ' • eflu/pped wit/i a temperature gage and warning iights. Component {52} is a diode on 8700-9700models and an oil prassura sandar on TW modais. Modais 8700 and 9700 aren't equipped with corriponents {77, 78 or 79).

B. BlackG. Green

GR. GrayN. Brown0. OrangeR. RedU. BlueV. Violet

W. WhiteY. Yellow1. Battery2. Regulator3. Fuse link4. Starter motor5. Alternator6. Ether solenoid7. Horn8. Tempermture sender9. Main fuel level

sender

10. Air cleanerrestriction switch

11. Oil pressure sender12. Air compressor

clutch13. De-icing switch14. Auxiliary fuel level

sender15. Front main harness

connector16. Rear main harness

connector17. Ignition switch18. Safety start switch19. Ether start button20. Condenser21. Cigar lighter22. Horn button23. Implement/hazard

light switch

24. Tum signal switch25. Flasher unit26. Ignition relay27. Fuse block28. Dome light switch29. Cab roofharness

connector30. Hi-lo beam lamp.

L.H.31. Work lamp, L.H.32. Work & headlamp

connector33. Implement & flasher

lights connector,rear

34. Main extensionharness connector

35. Instrument clusterconnector

36. Instrument cluster

37. Turn signalindicator, R.H.

38. Temperature gage39. Panel light40. Alternator warning

light or gage41. Panel Ught42. Hi-b beam indicator43. Air cleaner warning

light44. Panel Ught45. Oil pressure

warning light or gage46. Panel Ught47. Fuel gage48. Turn signal

indicator. L.H.49. Fuse50. Headlight switch51. Fuel selector switch

52. Diode or oil sender53. Work lamp, R.H.54. Hi-lo beam lamp,

R.H.55. Work & headlamp

connector56. Speaker57. Radio58. Radio dial light59. Blower motor switch60. Blower motor

connector61. Blower motor62. Flasher connector,

R.H.63. Implement lamp

connector, R.H.64. Flasher Ught, R.H.65. Implement lamp.

66. Wiper motor67. Wiper/washer

switch68. Dome light69. Washer pump motor70. Washer pump

connector71. Implement lamp,

L.ft.72. Implement lamp

connector, L.H.73. Flasher light, L.H.74. Flasher Ught

connector, L.H.75. Trailer socket76. Tail light77. Trans, oil pressure

switch78. Trans, oil pressure

warning Ught79. Front hood R.H. support

CLUTCH

Fig. 133—Measuring starting motor driva pin-ion daaranca. Rafar to text for procedure and

to Fig, 134 for adjustment of dearanca.

50

Fig. 134—Adjusting drive pinion clearance;refer also to Fig, 133 and to taxt.

All except TW-20 and TW-30 modelsare equipped with a 13-inch diametersingie plate ciutch assembly; TW-20 andTW-30 modeis are equipped with a14-inch diameter clutch. The clutchfriction disc on 8000 modeis is fitted withfive cera-metailic pad inserts, whiie 8600,9000 and TW-10 modeis have sixcera-metailic pad inserts. 8600 modeldiscs can be used on prior 8000 modeis.The disc used on 8700, 9600 and 9700modeis is equipped with nine pad insertsand can be used on eariier 9000 models.The disc used on TW-20 and TW-30modeis has eight cera-metailic padinserts. Ciutch disc is renewable as anassembly only. The clutch cover, thrustplates, pressure springs and adjustingnuts are avaiiabie separateiy. There are12 pressure springs in pressure plate and

Paragraph 159 Cont. FORD

^^L7J^ J^ ^u^^^ '"®*'*'* * ' • eflu/pped wit/i a temperature gage and warning iights. Component {52} is a diode on 8700-9700models and an oil prassura sandar on TW modais. Modais 8700 and 9700 aren't equipped with corriponents {77, 78 or 79).

B. BlackG. Green

GR. GrayN. Brown0. OrangeR. RedU. BlueV. Violet

W. WhiteY. Yellow1. Battery2. Regulator3. Fuse link4. Starter motor5. Alternator6. Ether solenoid7. Horn8. Tempermture sender9. Main fuel level

sender

10. Air cleanerrestriction switch

11. Oil pressure sender12. Air compressor

clutch13. De-icing switch14. Auxiliary fuel level

sender15. Front main harness

connector16. Rear main harness

connector17. Ignition switch18. Safety start switch19. Ether start button20. Condenser21. Cigar lighter22. Horn button23. Implement/hazard

light switch

24. Tum signal switch25. Flasher unit26. Ignition relay27. Fuse block28. Dome light switch29. Cab roofharness

connector30. Hi-lo beam lamp.

L.H.31. Work lamp, L.H.32. Work & headlamp

connector33. Implement & flasher

lights connector,rear

34. Main extensionharness connector

35. Instrument clusterconnector

36. Instrument cluster

37. Turn signalindicator, R.H.

38. Temperature gage39. Panel light40. Alternator warning

light or gage41. Panel Ught42. Hi-b beam indicator43. Air cleaner warning

light44. Panel Ught45. Oil pressure

warning light or gage46. Panel Ught47. Fuel gage48. Turn signal

indicator. L.H.49. Fuse50. Headlight switch51. Fuel selector switch

52. Diode or oil sender53. Work lamp, R.H.54. Hi-lo beam lamp,

R.H.55. Work & headlamp

connector56. Speaker57. Radio58. Radio dial light59. Blower motor switch60. Blower motor

connector61. Blower motor62. Flasher connector,

R.H.63. Implement lamp

connector, R.H.64. Flasher Ught, R.H.65. Implement lamp.

66. Wiper motor67. Wiper/washer

switch68. Dome light69. Washer pump motor70. Washer pump

connector71. Implement lamp,

L.ft.72. Implement lamp

connector, L.H.73. Flasher light, L.H.74. Flasher Ught

connector, L.H.75. Trailer socket76. Tail light77. Trans, oil pressure

switch78. Trans, oil pressure

warning Ught79. Front hood R.H. support

CLUTCH

Fig. 133—Measuring starting motor driva pin-ion daaranca. Rafar to text for procedure and

to Fig, 134 for adjustment of dearanca.

50

Fig. 134—Adjusting drive pinion clearance;refer also to Fig, 133 and to taxt.

All except TW-20 and TW-30 modelsare equipped with a 13-inch diametersingie plate ciutch assembly; TW-20 andTW-30 modeis are equipped with a14-inch diameter clutch. The clutchfriction disc on 8000 modeis is fitted withfive cera-metailic pad inserts, whiie 8600,9000 and TW-10 modeis have sixcera-metailic pad inserts. 8600 modeldiscs can be used on prior 8000 modeis.The disc used on 8700, 9600 and 9700modeis is equipped with nine pad insertsand can be used on eariier 9000 models.The disc used on TW-20 and TW-30modeis has eight cera-metailic padinserts. Ciutch disc is renewable as anassembly only. The clutch cover, thrustplates, pressure springs and adjustingnuts are avaiiabie separateiy. There are12 pressure springs in pressure plate and

SHOP MANUAL

cover assembly on 8000, 8600 and 8700modeis, while 9000, 9600, 9700 andTW-10 models have 16 pressure springs.TW-20 and TW-30 models have 15pressure springs. The clutch pressureplate and release levers are available as asub-assembly or In complete ciutchcover and pressure plate assembly only.

PEDAL FREE TRAVELADJUSTMENT

All Models Except 8700, 9700,TW-10, TW-20 And TW-30

160. Clutch pedal free play ismeasured at pedal as shown in Fig. 135.Clutch pedal free travel should be1-3/8-1-5/8 inches. To adjust free travel,disconnect clutch pedal rod from releaselever, loosen locknut and turn clevis tolengthen rod until correct free travel isobtained. Left hood panel on sometractors must be removed for access toclevis. On tractors with cabs, removeleft step assembly, tool box side paneland door, and cab support bracket inorder to adjust clevis.

Models 8700, 9700, TW-10, TW-20And TW-30

161. Measure clutch pedal free play atpedal as shown in Fig. 136. Clutch pedalfree play should be 13/8-1-5/8 inches.To adjust free play, loosen locknut (L)and rotate turnbuckle (T) on clutch pedalcontrol rod (R).

NOTE: if the difference between clutchcontroi rod exposed threads exceeds0.010 inch, clutch controi rod is notassembled properly. See Fig. 137.

R&R CLUTCH ASSEMBLY

162. SPLIT TRACTOR. To split trac-

tor for clutch removal, proceed as fol-lows: On tricycle models, attach supportbraces to keep front end assembly fromtipping. On wide front axle models,drive wood wedges between front axleand front support. Remove tool box andbattery covers and disconnect batterycables from battery, ground cable first.Remove hood side panels, air pre-clean-er, exhaust pipe and hood top panel.Disconnect clutch pedal return spring,then unbolt and remove side plates.Disconnect throttle linkage from bell-crank at instrument panel support.Disconnect electrical wiring, engine stopcable, fuel supply line and Proof-Metercable at engine. On models withpressure lubricated transmissions dis-connect lines to oil cooler. Unbolt andremove starting motor. Disconnectpower steering fluid lines from steeringmotor and unbolt hood side braces frominstrument panel (rear hood) support.

On wide front axle or front wheeldrive models, support rear end of enginewith rolling floor jack and front end oftransmission with safety stand. Ontricycle models, place the rolling floorjack under front end of transmission.Unbolt engine from transmission andseparate tractor.

163. To reconnect tractor, firstremove clutch shaft from transmissionand insert it into clutch friction disc andpilot bearing, then complete reassemblyby reversing split procedures. Tightenthe 5/8-inch engine to transmission boltsto a torque of 95-130 ft.-lbs. and the3/4-inch bolts to a torque of 180-220ft.-lbs. Bleed the fuel injection system asoutlined in paragraph 114A or 115A andbleed power steering system as in para-graph 7 or 34.

164. R&R CLUTCH. With tractor splitas outlined in paragraph 162, alternately

4 CLUTCH RELEASELEVER

Paragraphs 160-164

and evenly loosen the cap screws retain-ing clutch cover to flywheel to avoid dis-tortion of cover. Remove clutch coverand pressure plate assembly, taking carenot to drop the clutch friction disc.

The clutch shaft pOot bearing can nowbe removed from flywheel by removingthe two cap screws and flat washers;refer to Fig. 84.

To reinstall clutch assembly, lightlylubricate splines with a high tempera-ture silicone grease and align clutch discto pilot bearing with transmission inputshaft. Determine which is the larger

CLUTCH PEDAL <FREETRAVEL "

{3.49-4.13 cm)

Fig, 136—Clutch padai fraa play on 8700,9700, TW-10, TW-20 and TW-30 modaia should^ 1.t/8—T-5/a inchas. Rotata turnbuckia <T)

to adjust fraa play.

Fig. 135—Ciutch pedai freetravel shouid be 1-3/8 to1-5/8 inch when measuredat pedai. Adjust by turningdevis on pedal to dutch

rataasa lever rod.

Fig, 137—If control rod and adjusting nut arepropariy assembled, the difference betweenaxposad threads of upper and iower rods wilt

be 0.010 inch or less. See abova axampla.

51

Paragraph 165

dowel pin in flywheel so clutch cover canbe installed correctly. Alternately andevenly tighten clutch cover retaining capscrews, taking care that the cover seatscorrectly on the dowel pins in flywheel,unto cover contacts flywheel. Then,alternately and evenly tighten cover capscrews to 26-35 ft.-lbs. on TW-10. 20-30ft.-lbs. on TW-20 and TW-30, or 20-27ft.-lbs. on all other models. Reconnectengine to transmission as outlined inparagraph 163.

NOTE: if a new ciutch disc is instaiiedon 8000, 8600 or 8700 model tractor,place new disc on fiywheei to be sure hubrivets on disc do not contact innerdiameter of fiywheei. if contact exists,fiywheei must be removed and machinedout to 6.44 inch i.D. to clear hub rivets.

OVERHAUL CLUTCH

165. With clutch cover and pressureplate assembly removed as outlined inparagraph 164, place assembly in pressand position a square, flat steel plateover cover so that adjusting nuts andthrust plates are accessible (Fig. 138).Compress the assembly until releaselevers are free, then unbolt and removethe thrust plates and unscrew theadjusting nuts from the finger yokestuds. Release cover assembly andremove cover and springs from thepressure plate and release lever assem-bly. Note positions of springs on 8000,8600 and 8700 models, before removingsprings.

Inspect all parts and renew asnecessary. Heat discoloration of theclutch disc friction pads is normal;friction pad thickness (new) is 0.463 inchfor Models TW-20 and TW 30, or 0.405inch for all other models. Renew thepressure plate and release lever assem-bly if levers are damaged or excessivelyworn, or if pressure plate is cracked,distorted or excessively scored. Checkthe clutch springs against the followingspecifications:

Models TW-2a & TW-30Part number D8NN-7572-AAColor code NoneLbs. pressure at 1.539 in 220-210

AU Other ModelsPart number C7NN-7572-CColor Code Pink with black stripeFree length, inches 2 4Lbs. pressure at

1.539 inches 135.5-145.5

When reassembling clutch on 8000,8600 and 8700 models, refer to Fig. 138for placement of springs on the pressureplate and note that second boss ("X") inclockwise direction from each releaselever is not fitted with a spring. On all

other models, there is an equal numberof springs and locating bosses. See Fig.139 for view of clutch and flywheel usedon Models TW-20 and TW-30. Reassem-ble by reversing disassembly procedure,but on all models except TW-20 andTW-30. tighten thrust plate retainingcap screws finger tight only until therelease levers are adjusted. To adjustrelease levers, mount cover and pres-sure plate assembly on flywheel withnew friction disc or with several equallyplaced 0.405 inch thick spacers betweenpressure plate and flywheel. ModelsTW-20 and TW-30 wiU require 0.463 inchspacers. Release lever height on ModelsTW-20 and TW-30 is adjusted by turningadjusting screws at lever ends, whilelever height on all other models isadjusted by turning adjusting nuts (Fig.

FORD

138). Adjust release lever height abovefriction surface of flywheel to 1.969-2.031 inches on 8000, 8600 and 8700models, 2.125-2.187 inches on 9000,9600. 9700 and TW-10 models and2.26-2.56 inches on TW-20 and TW-30models. On all models except TW-20 andTW-30, stake adjusting nuts in positionand tighten thrust plate retaining capscrews to a torque of 15 ft.-lbs.

DUAL POWERDual Power consists of a planetary

gear set and two clutch assembliesenclosed in a housing and mounted inforward compartment of transmissioncase. Dual Power is hydraulicallyactuated to provide either direct drive or

Fig.138—Expioded view of the dutch pressure piate and covar assambiy, Nota that on 80008600 and 8700 modeis, second boss ("X") in a dockwise rotation from each reieasa lavar is notfittad with a prassure spring. Prassure piate and ralease levers ara serviced as an assambiy oniy

Fig, 139—Assambled viewof dutch and fiywheei usedon Modeis TW-20 and

TW-30,

1. Flywheel2. Clutch disc3. Clutch cover4. Cover to flywheel bolts

52

Paragraph 165

dowel pin in flywheel so clutch cover canbe installed correctly. Alternately andevenly tighten clutch cover retaining capscrews, taking care that the cover seatscorrectly on the dowel pins in flywheel,unto cover contacts flywheel. Then,alternately and evenly tighten cover capscrews to 26-35 ft.-lbs. on TW-10. 20-30ft.-lbs. on TW-20 and TW-30, or 20-27ft.-lbs. on all other models. Reconnectengine to transmission as outlined inparagraph 163.

NOTE: if a new ciutch disc is instaiiedon 8000, 8600 or 8700 model tractor,place new disc on fiywheei to be sure hubrivets on disc do not contact innerdiameter of fiywheei. if contact exists,fiywheei must be removed and machinedout to 6.44 inch i.D. to clear hub rivets.

OVERHAUL CLUTCH

165. With clutch cover and pressureplate assembly removed as outlined inparagraph 164, place assembly in pressand position a square, flat steel plateover cover so that adjusting nuts andthrust plates are accessible (Fig. 138).Compress the assembly until releaselevers are free, then unbolt and removethe thrust plates and unscrew theadjusting nuts from the finger yokestuds. Release cover assembly andremove cover and springs from thepressure plate and release lever assem-bly. Note positions of springs on 8000,8600 and 8700 models, before removingsprings.

Inspect all parts and renew asnecessary. Heat discoloration of theclutch disc friction pads is normal;friction pad thickness (new) is 0.463 inchfor Models TW-20 and TW 30, or 0.405inch for all other models. Renew thepressure plate and release lever assem-bly if levers are damaged or excessivelyworn, or if pressure plate is cracked,distorted or excessively scored. Checkthe clutch springs against the followingspecifications:

Models TW-2a & TW-30Part number D8NN-7572-AAColor code NoneLbs. pressure at 1.539 in 220-210

AU Other ModelsPart number C7NN-7572-CColor Code Pink with black stripeFree length, inches 2 4Lbs. pressure at

1.539 inches 135.5-145.5

When reassembling clutch on 8000,8600 and 8700 models, refer to Fig. 138for placement of springs on the pressureplate and note that second boss ("X") inclockwise direction from each releaselever is not fitted with a spring. On all

other models, there is an equal numberof springs and locating bosses. See Fig.139 for view of clutch and flywheel usedon Models TW-20 and TW-30. Reassem-ble by reversing disassembly procedure,but on all models except TW-20 andTW-30. tighten thrust plate retainingcap screws finger tight only until therelease levers are adjusted. To adjustrelease levers, mount cover and pres-sure plate assembly on flywheel withnew friction disc or with several equallyplaced 0.405 inch thick spacers betweenpressure plate and flywheel. ModelsTW-20 and TW-30 wiU require 0.463 inchspacers. Release lever height on ModelsTW-20 and TW-30 is adjusted by turningadjusting screws at lever ends, whilelever height on all other models isadjusted by turning adjusting nuts (Fig.

FORD

138). Adjust release lever height abovefriction surface of flywheel to 1.969-2.031 inches on 8000, 8600 and 8700models, 2.125-2.187 inches on 9000,9600. 9700 and TW-10 models and2.26-2.56 inches on TW-20 and TW-30models. On all models except TW-20 andTW-30, stake adjusting nuts in positionand tighten thrust plate retaining capscrews to a torque of 15 ft.-lbs.

DUAL POWERDual Power consists of a planetary

gear set and two clutch assembliesenclosed in a housing and mounted inforward compartment of transmissioncase. Dual Power is hydraulicallyactuated to provide either direct drive or

Fig.138—Expioded view of the dutch pressure piate and covar assambiy, Nota that on 80008600 and 8700 modeis, second boss ("X") in a dockwise rotation from each reieasa lavar is notfittad with a prassure spring. Prassure piate and ralease levers ara serviced as an assambiy oniy

Fig, 139—Assambled viewof dutch and fiywheei usedon Modeis TW-20 and

TW-30,

1. Flywheel2. Clutch disc3. Clutch cover4. Cover to flywheel bolts

52

SHOP MANUAL

underdrive to transmission input shaft.Dual Power is controlled by pedals andlinkage from operator's position tohydraulic control valve on side of DualPower housing.

LUBRICATION

167. Dual Power assembly is used onpressure lubricated transmissions. Onall models except TW-10, TW-20 andTW-30, lubricating oil is directed fromtransmission oil cooler to control valveon side of Dual Power housing and intooil passages of housing. Oil exits intotransmission by tube connecting DualPower housing and transmission caseand through common passages. Lubrica-tion pressure for Models TW-10, TW-20and TW-30 is provided by the lowpressure oil system. Refer to paragraph174.

HYDRAULIC OIL PRESSURE

168. Clutch assemblies of Dual Powerunit are engaged by hydraulic pressureagainst their repective pistons. To checkhydraulic oil pressure, first operatetractor until oil is at normal operatingtemperature (120° F.). Stop engine andtee a pressure gage into the V4-in.pressure line at the hydraulic pumpcover and hydraulic system oil filteradapter plate. Start engine and setengine speed at 1000 rpm. Engage directdrive of Dual Power then engageunderdrive. On models except TW-10,TW-20 and TW-30, pressure gageshould read 150-180 psi with Dual Powerin direct drive and 155-185 psi when inunderdrive. Pressure gage readings onTW-10 and TW-20 models should be be-tween 185-220 psi. The difference inreadings should not exceed 10 psi.

On TW-30 models, check pressurereading with dual power in direct driveand pto engaged. Apply left brake,check pressure then apply right brakeand check pressure. Gage reading at2200 rpm with dual power in direct driveshould be 185-235 psi.

Fig. 140Spadal Nuday tool No. 1312 isusad to praaa against spring ratatnar (27) toraduca spring tansion on snap ring (26) sothat it may ba ramovad, Rafar to Fig. 142 for

idantification.

If pressure is as stated and troubleexists, the hydraulic system and DualPower control valve can be consideredsatisfactory and Dual Power assemblyshould be inspected.

If pressure is higher than specified inboth direct drive and underdrive opera-tion, then remove hydraulic pumpadapter plate as outlined in paragraph233, remove Dual Power regulatingvalve and inspect valve for stickingduring operation. The regulating valvethreads into inner side of adapter plate.If unable to free up valve, renew as anassembly. A cross section of valve isshown in Fig. 144A. Valve is also shownin Hydraulic Section (10—Fig. 212). If oOpressure is lower than specified in bothdirect drive and underdrive operation,inspect hydraulic pump and pto systemrelief valve. Also check for a weak orbroken spring in Dual Power regulatingvalve, or valve stuck open. If oilpressure is below specified pressure ineither direct drive or underdrive. butnormal for the other operation, check fora leaking control valve spool or for aleaking gasket between control valveand Dual Power housing. If direct driveoperation has low oil pressure, dis-assemble Dual Power unit as outlined inparagraph 171 and inspect direct driveclutch assembly for leaking seals or abroken or cracked piston. If underdriveoperation has low oil pressure, dis-assemble Dual Power unit and inspectunderdrive clutch assembly for leakingseals or broken or cracked piston.

LINKAGE

169. Dual Power pedal or buttons areconnected by a control rod to the controlvalve on the Dual Power housing.Length of control rod is adjusted bydisengaging clevis end of rod, backingoff locknut and turning clevis. Length ofcontrol rod should be adjusted so thatboth underdrive and direct drive opera-tion is obtained when the correspondingoperator's pedal is depressed. Adjustcontrol rod on Models 8700, 9700,TW-10, TW-20 and TW-30 so controlpedal heel is 3/8-5/8 inch from floorwhen in Low range. If control rod lengthis improperly adjusted, either under-drive or direct drive operation will beabsent. If rod is too long, underdrive willnot function. If rod is too short, directdrive will not function. If rod adjustmentwill not cure problem, refer to controlvalve, paragraph 173, or to Dual Powerparagraph 171, for overhaul of defectiveassembly.

R&R DUAL POWER

170. To remove Dual Power assembly,drain lubricant from transmission and

Paragraphs 167-170

rear axle center housing (approxi-mately 17 to 23 gallons depending onmodel; see paragraph 176) and splittractor between engine and transmissionas outlined in paragraph 162. Disconnectclevis pin from yoke on Dual Powercontrol pedal linkage. Mark and removelubrication (upper) and hydraulic pres-sure (lower) tubes from control valve.Unplug transmission oil switch wires onTW-10, TW-20 and TW-30 models. Oilreturn tube has been eliminated on thesemodels. Remove clevis pins from clutchrelease fork and remove clutch forkcross shaft, clutch release bearing andclutch fork. Disconnect and removecontrol valve control rod.

To remove Dual Power housing fromtransmission, proceed as follows; Re-move housing cover (41—Fig. 143). ringgear (36), planetary gear set (33). shaft(31) and sun gear (29). Remove directdrive clutch assembly (18) and thrustwasher (16).

NOTE: Do not ailow transmissionmainshaft (16—Fig. 160) to move forwardwhen removing Dual Power housing orthrust bearing (38) may disiodge. Fabri-cate a tool made of pipe which bearsagainst mainshaft and is secured to ptoshaft.

Remove five retaining bolts andseparate Dual Power housing fromtransmission case. Lubrication supplytube from housing to transmission casemay be removed by pulling straight out.

To reassemble Dual Power unit, re-verse disassembly procedure. Installlubricating tube (2—Fig. 143) with new"0" rings on tube and a new gasket onhousing before attaching housing totransmission case. Be sure housingoutlet is aligned with tube when install-ing housing. Tighten Dual Power hous-ing-to-transmission case bolts in adiagonal pattern to 65-90 ft.-lbs. onTW-10, TW-20 and TW-30. or to 50-60ft.-lbs. on all other models. Tighten lub-rication inlet tube (upper tube) fitting to8-10 ft.-lbs. Tighten pressure inlet tube(lower tube) fitting to 50-67 inch-pounds.Tighten housing cover (41) bolts in a

S F S F F 24

Fig. 141—Viaw of diract drive clutch packshowing order of friction platas {F), steelplates {S), featharing spring {22), plate (24) and

snap ring (25).

53

Paragraphs 171-172

diagonal pattern to 27-37 ft.-lbs. Beforeinstalling control valve actuating rod,check length of rod to be sure there is7V2 inches from center to center ofattaching points. Place thrust washer(16) in housing (1) with tab up andtoward rear. Hold new gasket (40) tohousing with grease and be sure drilledoil passage in cover (41) is up wheninstalled. With installation complete,refer to paragraph 169 for furtheradjustment if required.

OVERHAUL DUAL POWER

171. To overhaul Dual Power unit,remove unit as outlined in paragraph170. separate major assemblies andproceed as follows: Disassemble directdrive clutch by removing snap ring(25-Fig. 143) and withdraw plate (24).clutch pack (23) and feather spring (22).

NOTE: To reduce a complexity of DualPower drive ciutch, feathering spring wasdeleted and piston modified starting inNovember, 1979.

Note order of plates in clutch packwhen removing. Place housing in a press

and using Ford tool No. 1312 or equiva-lent, compress the piston return spring(26—Fig. 140) and remove retainingsnap ring (28). Gradually release springpressure making sure spring retainer(27) does not catch in snap ring groove,and remove retainer and spring. Re-move piston (19—Fig. 143) by applyingair pressure to hole between second andthird sealing rings (17) on clutch housinghub. Carefully clean and inspect allparts. Inspect sealing rings for imperfec-tions. Inspect sealing ring bore fordamage. Check splines for cracked,broken or missing teeth. Renew anyparts not suitable for further service.

To disassemble underdrive clutch, re-move outer snap ring (15—Fig. 143) andclutch pack components (8 through 14).Note position of clutch pack plates.Remove piston (5) and seal rings. Cleanand inspect all parts for wear. Check forbroken clutch springs. Renew any partnot suitable for further service. Duringassembly, the locating dowel pins (10)must be evenly spaced and installed sothere is a dowel pin in every fifth notch.

Use a suitable puller to remove pilotbearing (34) from shaft (31) and separate

14 15

Fig. 143—Expioded view of Dual Power assembly. Refer to Fig. 141 for view of direct drive dutchpack assambiy. Note: dutch featharing spring {22) dalatad in Nov., 1979,

1. Dual Power housing2. Lubrication tube3. "O"ring4. Piston seal5. Piston6. Piston seal7. Clutch feathering

spring8. Pressure plate9. Spring

10. Locating pin

11. Clutch plate12. Center plate13. Pressure plate14. Front plate15. Snap ring16. Thrust washer17. Seal rings18. Direct arive housing19. Piston20. Seal21. "O"ring

22. Clutch featheringg)ring

irect drive dutchassembly

24. t>late25. Snap ring26. Spring27. Spring retainer28. Snap ring2i». Sun gear31. Input shaft

32. Washer33. Planetary gear34. Bearing35. Seal36. Ring gear37. Shims38. Bearing39. Seal40. Gasket41. Cover

FORD

planetary gear assembly (33) from shaft.Planetary gear assembly (33) is availableas a unit only and should be serviced as aunit assembly. Using a suitable puller,remove bearing (38) from ring gear (36)being careful not to damage shims (37).Shims are used to adjust ring gear shaft(36) end play.

172. To reassemble Dual Power unit.lubricate components with transmissionoil and proceed as follows: Installunderdrive piston and clutch pack inhousing being sure not to damage pistonseals. Refer to Fig. 143 for sequence ofclutch^plates. InstaU locating dowel pins(10) in every fifth notch of housing.

To assemble direct drive clutch,reverse disassembly procedure. Refer toFig. 141 for view of clutch pack. Becareful not to damage seal rings of pistonwhen installing. Renew main bearing inhousing (1—Fig. 143) if worn. Installthrust washer (32) and planetary gearassembly (33) on shaft (31) and pressbearing (34) on shaft (31).

To determine correct size of shims (37)to obtain correct end play of 0.004-0.020inch for ring gear shaft (36), assemble allcomponents except ring gear and coverin housing (1) without attaching housingto transmission. Install ring gear with-out shim (37) and bearing (38). Place toolNo. 1303 on step of ring gear shaft inplace of shims and bearing. Make sure allcomponents are properly seated inhousing and place cover (41) on housing.At three equi-distant points, measuregap between cover and housing andaverage the three measurements. Ifaverage dimension is 0.046-0.060 inch,no shims are needed. If gap is less than0.046-0.060 inch, refer to following tablefor correct shim size. (Dimensions are ininches.)

Average GapMeasurement0.001-0.0130.014-0.0260.027-0.0320.033-0.045

RequiredShim Thickness

0.041-0.0490.030-0.0340.022-0.0300.011-0.015

If tool No. 1303 is not available,assemble Dual Power unit with bearing(38) and original shim (37) on ring gearshaft (36). Install cover (41) being surecomponents are seated in housing andmeasure end play of ring gear shaft (36).End play should be 0.004-0.020 inch.Install needed size of shims (37) to obtaincorrect end play. Shims are available insizes of 0.013 and 0.032 inch.

To reinstall Dual Power unit on trans-mission, remove cover, ring gear, shaftand planetary gear assembly, sun gearand direct drive assembly. Dual Powerunit may now be installed as outlined inparagraph 170.

54

SHOP MANUAL

CONTROL VALVE

173. The Dual Power control valvedirects flow of lubricating oil and oil fromthe pto hydraulic pump to engage eitherdirect drive clutch pack or underdriveclutch pack.

To remove control valve on ModelsTW-10. TW-20 and TW-30. disconnecthydraulic line and remove access plateon right side of transmission centerhousing just forward of transmissionshift cover. On all other models, accessto control valve is obtained aftersplitting tractor between engine andtransmission as outlined in paragraph162.

With control valve removed, pullvalve spool (2—Fig. 144) to full out

position. Unscrew sleeve (9) from valvebody (7) and puU sleeve from end of spool(2) being careful not to lose detent cups(4) and spring (3) in end of spool.Remove valve spool (2) by pulling frombottom of valve body. Remove "0" rings(5) and (8).

Inspect spool (2), body (7) and sleeve(9) for scratches, wear or other damage.Inspect "0" rings, detent cups andspring. To reassemble, reverse disas-sembly procedure. Tighten sleeve (9) toa torque of 25-30 ft.-lbs. Tighten controlvalve mounting bolts to a torque of 27-37ft.-lbs.

LOW PRESSUREOIL SYSTEM

174. AU TW-10, TW-20 and TW-30models are equipped with a low pressureoil system. An eight gpm gerotorhydraulic pump supplies low pressureoU. drawn from the rear axle centerhousing, to aU tractor hydrauUc func-tions except the hydrauUc power Uft aiidremote cylinders. See schematic in Fig.145. The pump also provides low

5

9 H9Fig. 144—Explodad viaw of Duai Powar con-

trol vatva.

1. Boot2. Spool3. Spring4. Detent cups5. "O"ring

6. Gasket7. Body8. "O"ring9. Sleeve

Paragraphs 173-175

pressure oil to operate the power assistbrakes on the TW-30 models. The pump(71—Fig. 160) is mounted on the trans-mission rear cover and is driven by themain pto shaft. If the pump is damagedor worn excessively, it must be replacedas a complete unit. Pressure is regulatedby a pressure regulating valve mountedon the transmission housing just abovethe shift cover. The pressure valve usedon TW-30 models differs from the valveused on TW-10 and TW-20 models asTW-30 models are equipped with powerbrakes and the TW-30 pressure valveuses a brake priority valve (2—Fig.145B) that maintains a minimum pres-sure of 150 psi to the power assist brakevalve. Refer to Fig. 183.

174A. PRESSURE TESTING (ALLMODELS). Refer to paragraph 213 forlow pressure system pressure testing.

GEROTOR PUMP

175. R&R AND OVERHAULGEROTOR PUMP. Refer to paragraph191 for removal of gerotor pump. If

Fig. 145—Viaw showing low prassura hydraulic systam for TW-10, TW-20 and TW-30 modats.

1. Power brake valve(TW 30 only)

2. Pressure regulatingvalve

3. Brake priority valve(TW 30 only)

4. Differential lockvalve (TW 30)

5. Dual power clutchpack

6. Gerotor pump

7. Pto clutch8. Pto brake9. Pto shaft

10. Axle housing11. Brakes

12. Differential13. Differential lock

valve (TW-10 andTW-20)

14. Pto valve

Fig. 144A —Cross-sectional viaw of DuaiPowar regulating vaiva.

Fig, 145A—Explodad viawof hydraulic system regu-lating valve used on TW-10

and TW-20 modeis.

1. Valve springs2. System pressure valve3. Housing4. Plugs and seals5. Lubrication pressure valve6. "0" ring seals

1. Snap ring2. Washer3. Spring

4. Valve5. Body

55

SHOP MANUAL

CONTROL VALVE

173. The Dual Power control valvedirects flow of lubricating oil and oil fromthe pto hydraulic pump to engage eitherdirect drive clutch pack or underdriveclutch pack.

To remove control valve on ModelsTW-10. TW-20 and TW-30. disconnecthydraulic line and remove access plateon right side of transmission centerhousing just forward of transmissionshift cover. On all other models, accessto control valve is obtained aftersplitting tractor between engine andtransmission as outlined in paragraph162.

With control valve removed, pullvalve spool (2—Fig. 144) to full out

position. Unscrew sleeve (9) from valvebody (7) and puU sleeve from end of spool(2) being careful not to lose detent cups(4) and spring (3) in end of spool.Remove valve spool (2) by pulling frombottom of valve body. Remove "0" rings(5) and (8).

Inspect spool (2), body (7) and sleeve(9) for scratches, wear or other damage.Inspect "0" rings, detent cups andspring. To reassemble, reverse disas-sembly procedure. Tighten sleeve (9) toa torque of 25-30 ft.-lbs. Tighten controlvalve mounting bolts to a torque of 27-37ft.-lbs.

LOW PRESSUREOIL SYSTEM

174. AU TW-10, TW-20 and TW-30models are equipped with a low pressureoil system. An eight gpm gerotorhydraulic pump supplies low pressureoU. drawn from the rear axle centerhousing, to aU tractor hydrauUc func-tions except the hydrauUc power Uft aiidremote cylinders. See schematic in Fig.145. The pump also provides low

5

9 H9Fig. 144—Explodad viaw of Duai Powar con-

trol vatva.

1. Boot2. Spool3. Spring4. Detent cups5. "O"ring

6. Gasket7. Body8. "O"ring9. Sleeve

Paragraphs 173-175

pressure oil to operate the power assistbrakes on the TW-30 models. The pump(71—Fig. 160) is mounted on the trans-mission rear cover and is driven by themain pto shaft. If the pump is damagedor worn excessively, it must be replacedas a complete unit. Pressure is regulatedby a pressure regulating valve mountedon the transmission housing just abovethe shift cover. The pressure valve usedon TW-30 models differs from the valveused on TW-10 and TW-20 models asTW-30 models are equipped with powerbrakes and the TW-30 pressure valveuses a brake priority valve (2—Fig.145B) that maintains a minimum pres-sure of 150 psi to the power assist brakevalve. Refer to Fig. 183.

174A. PRESSURE TESTING (ALLMODELS). Refer to paragraph 213 forlow pressure system pressure testing.

GEROTOR PUMP

175. R&R AND OVERHAULGEROTOR PUMP. Refer to paragraph191 for removal of gerotor pump. If

Fig. 145—Viaw showing low prassura hydraulic systam for TW-10, TW-20 and TW-30 modats.

1. Power brake valve(TW 30 only)

2. Pressure regulatingvalve

3. Brake priority valve(TW 30 only)

4. Differential lockvalve (TW 30)

5. Dual power clutchpack

6. Gerotor pump

7. Pto clutch8. Pto brake9. Pto shaft

10. Axle housing11. Brakes

12. Differential13. Differential lock

valve (TW-10 andTW-20)

14. Pto valve

Fig. 144A —Cross-sectional viaw of DuaiPowar regulating vaiva.

Fig, 145A—Explodad viawof hydraulic system regu-lating valve used on TW-10

and TW-20 modeis.

1. Valve springs2. System pressure valve3. Housing4. Plugs and seals5. Lubrication pressure valve6. "0" ring seals

1. Snap ring2. Washer3. Spring

4. Valve5. Body

55

Paragraphs 175A-176

pump is worn or damaged, it must bereplaced as a complete unit.

PRESSURE REGULATOR VALVE

175A. R&R AND OVERHAUL PRES-SURE REGULATOR VALVE. Valve islocated above transmission shift cover.To remove valve, first remove oil lines tovalve then remove cap screws retainingvalve to tractor. Refer to Fig. 145A forexploded view of regulating valve usedon TW-10 and TW-20 models and to Fig.145B for exploded view of valve used onTW-30 models.

When overhauling valve, tag spoolsand springs for later identification. Notethat spool (2—Fig. 145A or 5—Fig.145B) has an 0.031 inch orifice whileremaining valve spool(s) does not havean orifice. The lubrication pressurevalve spring is 1.30 inches long with 7V2coils while the system pressure valvespring is 2.09 inches long with 9V2 coils.The brake priority valve spring used on

Model TW-30 is 1.37 inches long with 8 Vzcoils.

Inspect components for excessivewear, scoring, burrs and binding invalve bores and renew as necessary.Clean valve housing and componentswith a suitable solvent and blow dry.Make sure aU orifices and passage-ways are clean. Reassembly procedure isreverse of disassembly procedure. In-staU new "0" rings in valve, then instaUvalve assembly onto tractor and tightencap screws to a torque of 20-26 ft.-lbs.Reconnect oil lines to valve.

TRANSMISSiONThe gear type duai range transmission

provides eight forward and two reversespeeds. Refer to Fig. 146 for viewshowing aii transmission gears exceptreverse idler. On Models 8700, 9700,TW-10, TW-20 and TW-30 transmissionspeeds are seiected using shift ievers

Fig. 145B—Exploded viewof iow pressure hydrauUcsystem reguiating vaive

used on TW-30 modeis.

1. Valve spring2. Brake prionty valve3. Housing4. Plugs and seals5. System pressure valve6. Lubrication pressure valve7. "0" ring seals

FORD

which actuate shift forks on a shift raii.On all other models, transmissionspeeds are selected by shift rails beingmoved by a cam wheel (see Fig. 156). Anindexing roiier holds the cam wheei inselected gear, but does not provide aneutral position. Neutrai is provided byhoiding the range shift coilar (109—Fig.146) disengaged from both the low range(111) and high range (106) gears. A pawitype transmission braice (see Fig. 161)can be engaged with teeth on range shiftcollar to hoid tractor stationary.

LUBRICATION

176. Transmission on later 8000models and aU other models is pressurelubricated and an oU cooler is located infront of engine radiator. The oilreservoir is common with oU reservoir inrear axle center housing. On aU modelsexcept TW-10. TW-20 and TW-30. oU ispumped from rear axle center housingby the main hydrauUc pump to the oilcooler then to the transmission or to theDual Power housing on models soequipped. TW-10, TW-20 and TW-30models are equipped with a low pressureoil system which uses a gerotor pumpmounted on transmission rear cover anddriven off pto mainshaft. Refer toparagraph 174.

Lubricant capacity for transmissionand rear axle is as foUows: Modelsexcept TW-10, TW-20 and TW-30 withDual Power. 69 quarts, without DualPower. 64 quarts; Models TW-10 andTW-20 with Dual Power, 79 quarts,without Dual Power, 73 quarts; AUTW-30 models require 92 quarts.Recommended lubricant is Ford lubri-cant No. ESN-M2C53-A or M-2053-B andshould be changed every 1200 hours ofoperation (or once every 12 months).

Transmissions on earUer 8000 modelsare splash lubricated and have an

66. Input shaft72. Mainshaft75. Sliding gear/coupling78. Secondary counter-

shaft94. 2nd/6thgear95. Sliding coupling97. lst/5thgear99. Reverse gear

101, Sliding coupling103. 3rd/7thgear106. Main countershaft109. Sliding coupling110. Output shaft111. Output shaft gear

106 94 95 97 99 m 103 tOfi

Fig, 146—View showing aii transmission gears except reverse idler. Refer also to axpfodedview in Fig. 160. Siiding coupling (109) incorporates dog teeth for transmission brake pawi.Front end of main countershaft {106) and top shafts and gears ara supported in needie roller

bearings.

Fig. 147—On 8000—9000 modeis, adjustlength of transmission brake rod assembiy{3) so that lever (1) dears ends of slot in con-sole in both "ON" and "OFF" detent posi-tions. Disconnect rod at point "A" {2) to maka

adjustment.

56

Paragraphs 175A-176

pump is worn or damaged, it must bereplaced as a complete unit.

PRESSURE REGULATOR VALVE

175A. R&R AND OVERHAUL PRES-SURE REGULATOR VALVE. Valve islocated above transmission shift cover.To remove valve, first remove oil lines tovalve then remove cap screws retainingvalve to tractor. Refer to Fig. 145A forexploded view of regulating valve usedon TW-10 and TW-20 models and to Fig.145B for exploded view of valve used onTW-30 models.

When overhauling valve, tag spoolsand springs for later identification. Notethat spool (2—Fig. 145A or 5—Fig.145B) has an 0.031 inch orifice whileremaining valve spool(s) does not havean orifice. The lubrication pressurevalve spring is 1.30 inches long with 7V2coils while the system pressure valvespring is 2.09 inches long with 9V2 coils.The brake priority valve spring used on

Model TW-30 is 1.37 inches long with 8 Vzcoils.

Inspect components for excessivewear, scoring, burrs and binding invalve bores and renew as necessary.Clean valve housing and componentswith a suitable solvent and blow dry.Make sure aU orifices and passage-ways are clean. Reassembly procedure isreverse of disassembly procedure. In-staU new "0" rings in valve, then instaUvalve assembly onto tractor and tightencap screws to a torque of 20-26 ft.-lbs.Reconnect oil lines to valve.

TRANSMISSiONThe gear type duai range transmission

provides eight forward and two reversespeeds. Refer to Fig. 146 for viewshowing aii transmission gears exceptreverse idler. On Models 8700, 9700,TW-10, TW-20 and TW-30 transmissionspeeds are seiected using shift ievers

Fig. 145B—Exploded viewof iow pressure hydrauUcsystem reguiating vaive

used on TW-30 modeis.

1. Valve spring2. Brake prionty valve3. Housing4. Plugs and seals5. System pressure valve6. Lubrication pressure valve7. "0" ring seals

FORD

which actuate shift forks on a shift raii.On all other models, transmissionspeeds are selected by shift rails beingmoved by a cam wheel (see Fig. 156). Anindexing roiier holds the cam wheei inselected gear, but does not provide aneutral position. Neutrai is provided byhoiding the range shift coilar (109—Fig.146) disengaged from both the low range(111) and high range (106) gears. A pawitype transmission braice (see Fig. 161)can be engaged with teeth on range shiftcollar to hoid tractor stationary.

LUBRICATION

176. Transmission on later 8000models and aU other models is pressurelubricated and an oU cooler is located infront of engine radiator. The oilreservoir is common with oU reservoir inrear axle center housing. On aU modelsexcept TW-10. TW-20 and TW-30. oU ispumped from rear axle center housingby the main hydrauUc pump to the oilcooler then to the transmission or to theDual Power housing on models soequipped. TW-10, TW-20 and TW-30models are equipped with a low pressureoil system which uses a gerotor pumpmounted on transmission rear cover anddriven off pto mainshaft. Refer toparagraph 174.

Lubricant capacity for transmissionand rear axle is as foUows: Modelsexcept TW-10, TW-20 and TW-30 withDual Power. 69 quarts, without DualPower. 64 quarts; Models TW-10 andTW-20 with Dual Power, 79 quarts,without Dual Power, 73 quarts; AUTW-30 models require 92 quarts.Recommended lubricant is Ford lubri-cant No. ESN-M2C53-A or M-2053-B andshould be changed every 1200 hours ofoperation (or once every 12 months).

Transmissions on earUer 8000 modelsare splash lubricated and have an

66. Input shaft72. Mainshaft75. Sliding gear/coupling78. Secondary counter-

shaft94. 2nd/6thgear95. Sliding coupling97. lst/5thgear99. Reverse gear

101, Sliding coupling103. 3rd/7thgear106. Main countershaft109. Sliding coupling110. Output shaft111. Output shaft gear

106 94 95 97 99 m 103 tOfi

Fig, 146—View showing aii transmission gears except reverse idler. Refer also to axpfodedview in Fig. 160. Siiding coupling (109) incorporates dog teeth for transmission brake pawi.Front end of main countershaft {106) and top shafts and gears ara supported in needie roller

bearings.

Fig. 147—On 8000—9000 modeis, adjustlength of transmission brake rod assembiy{3) so that lever (1) dears ends of slot in con-sole in both "ON" and "OFF" detent posi-tions. Disconnect rod at point "A" {2) to maka

adjustment.

56

SHOP MANUAL

independent oil reservoir within thetransmission case. Splash lubricatedtransmissions are identified by anexternal fUler plug in the top cover, avent plug in the side of the case and anoil level plug in the cam cover. Trans-mission lubricant capacity is 12 quarts.Recommended lubricant is SAE 80-EPgear lube (Ford specification No.M-4864-A or ESN-M2C77-A); lubricantshould be changed after each 1200 hoursof operation. On splash lubricatedtransmissions, oU level plug is located ingearshift cover plate; refer to Fig. 154.On early models, a pipe (5—Fig. 157) ex-tended fUler opening plug (4) to hole inoperator's platform. On later models.fiUer plug (4A) threads directly into topcover (8) and is accessible afterremoving center plate from platform. Onpressure lubricated transmissions, fiUerplug for hydraulic system commonreservoir is located at top rear center ofhydraulic lift cover. Drain plug is locatedin center rear of transmission housing.

LUBRICATION PRESSURE

177. To check oil pressure of pressurelubricated transmissions, proceed asfoUows: Operate tractor until hydraulicoil is at normal operating temperature.Stop engine and connect 0-150 psi gageto outlet tube from oU cooler located infront of radiator. Start engine and setspeed at 1000 rpm. 00 pressure for aUmodels except TW-10. TW-20 andTW-30 tractors should be 20-35 psi.Pressure for TW-10. TW-20 and TW-30models should be 130 psi. If pressure istoo low cause may be clogged or restrict-ed oil cooler or a weak oU pressureregulating valve spring. Regulatingvalve (10—Fig. 212) for aU modelsexcept TW-10. TW-20 and TW-30threads into back of hydraulic pumpadapter plate (39—Fig. 216). Regulatingvalve for TW-10. TW-20 and TW-30

models is located on the right hand sideof the transmission; refer to paragraph175A for service.

PARKING BRAKEModeis 8000 and 9000 are equipped

with a separate parking brake lever, whiie8600, 8700. 9600, 9700, TW-10. TW-20and TW-30 modeis have the parking brakeand High-Low shift iever on the sameiever. Modeis 8000 and 9000 must havethe High-Low shift iever in neutrai beforeparking iever can be engaged. Modeis8600, 8700, 9600, 9700, TW-10. TW-20and TW-30 can not be shifted to "PARK"uniess High-Low shift lever is in neutral.Refer to appropriate following paragraphfor linkage adjustments.

178. 8000-9000 MODELS. The pawltype parking brake can be engaged onlywhen the tractor is stopped and range(high/low) shift lever is in neutralposition. The brake detent baU (15—Fig.153 or 10—Fig. 157) should engagedetent hole in transmission cover in boththe "ON" and "OFF" position. Also, shiftlever should clear end of slot in consolein both detent positions. If necessary toadjust parking brake linkage, removeright fender and refer to Fig. 147.Disconnect rod assembly from lever at"point A" and adjust length of rod sothat when disconnected, detent wiU befuUy engaged and lever wUl not contact

Fig. 149—Exptoded view of8000—9000 transmissionshift tevers and Unkaga.Shift iever pivot pin (1) ismounted in power steeringHydramotor support brac-ket. Controi tevers aresynchronized to detentpositions of shift ievers{47 and 52) by adjustinglength of lower rods (17

and 20).

1. Pivot pin2. High/low lever3. Main shift lever

Paragraphs 177-179

end of slot in both the "ON" and "OFF"positions. ReinstaU right fender.

Any necessary overhaul of the parkingbrake external Unkage can be made afterremoving right fender and center platefrom operator's platform. Overhaulprocedure is obvious from inspection ofunit.

179. 8600-9600 MODELS. The park-ing brake lever is also the High-Lowshift lever. When tractor is stopped andlever is moved to "PARK" position,parking brake actuating lever (Fig. 148)moves parking pawl (23—Fig. 157) intoengagement with lugs on sliding coupler(51__Fig. 160). If parking pawl contactsthe top of a lug on sliding coUar, springon parking brake rod (12—Fig. 150) wiUcompress until tractor moves far enoughto allow parking pawl to drop into fuUengagement with sUding coUar.

To adjust for internal parking brakeengagement, remove right hood panel,floor mat and center platform onoperator's platform. One rear wheel (orboth) must be jacked up enough torotate. Rotate rear wheel untO parkinglever can be moved into "PARK" posi-tion without fuUy engaging parking pawlinside transmission. When proper ad-justing position has been reached, theparking brake actuating lever stop arm(Fig. 148) should align with index Une onpivot bracket, with spring on parking

Snap ringF l t asher

Fig, 148—On 8600—9600 models, parkingbraka is property adjustad whan stop arm isaligned with index iine as shown {with park

pawl not engaged). Refer to paragraph 179,

Flat wa6. Wave (spring) washers7. Main shftt rod (21.4 in.)8. High/low shift rod

{20.3 in.)9. Snap ring

10. Washers11. Bushings12. High/low beUcrank

{4.2x4.2 in.)13. Main shaft beUcrank

(3x5>^in.)14. BeUcrank pivot15. Yoke, high/low shift rod16. Jam nut17. High/low shift rod (28.5

inches)18. Yoke, main shift rod19. Jam nut20. Main shift rod (21.88

in.)47. Main shift lever52. High/low shift lever 15 16 17

57

Paragraphs 180-181

brake control rod compressed. Whenrear wheel is rotated, parking pawlshould drop into fuU engagement andstop wheel from rotating further. Springon parking brake control rod MUST becompressed with index line and stop armaUgned, and parking pawl on top of lugon sUding coupler. To adjust to indexline, alternately loosen one adjustingbolt on actuating lever then tighten theother until stop arm is aUgned withindex line on pivot bracket. Thisadjustment must be made anytimetransmission cover is removed.

If necessary to adjust the parkingbrake rod so that the neutral-park lever(1—Fig. 150) wiU be centered in theneutral slot of quadrant on instrumentpanel, loosen the two adjusting nuts (13)and adjust rod (12) longer or shorter as

'^/

r- . " - ^11

14 5. ' ^

Fig. 150—Expiodad viaw of 8600—9600transmission shift Unkaga and parking brakalinkaga. Bushings in iavars {1, 3 and 4} ara notsarvicad saparately, Controi iever {2) mustangaga either parking brake lever (f) orhIgh-iow range iever {3), Parking pawi over-ride spring on end of rod {12) was insidetransmission on 8000—9000 modeis. Items(15 and 16) replace itam {I—Fig. 157), on8000—9000 models, {Item 16 is shown re-varsad.) Itam (15) waa not uaad on aoma aarly

modais.1. Park lever2. Park, high/k>w

shifter3. High/low lever4. Gear shift lever5. Spring6. Snap ring7. Washer8. Gear shift rod

9. High/low shift rod10. High/low arm11. Gear shift arm12. Parking brake rod13. Adjustmgnut14. Pivot bracket15. Brake shaft hub16. Actuating lever17. Adjusting nut

necessary. When properly adjusted, thespring on end of rod (12) should measure1V8-1% inches, with park lever inneutral position. Nut (17) can beadjusted to obtain proper length.

On aU models, the parking brakedetent can be serviced after removingtransmission top cover as outlined inparagraph 184. To renew parking brakepawl or the high-low shift coupling, referto transmission overhaul procedure.

R C

Fig. 151—Viaw of Modal 8700, 9700, TW-10,TW-20 and TW-30 parking braka Unkaga. Rafar

to taxt for adjuatmant.

FORD

180. 8700-9700, TW-10, TW-20 andTW-30 MODELS. The High-Low shiftlever on Models 8700, 9700, TW-10,TW-20 and TW-30 is also used to engageparking brake in transmission. Whenlever is moved to park position, parkpawl (23—Fig. 157) engages lugs onsUding coupler (51—Fig. 160).

To adjust parking brake linkage, jackup rear of tractor so one or both rearwheels may be rotated. Remove trans-mission access cover. Move shift lever topark position so that park pawl rests ontop of a tooth on sUding coupler. Rotate arear wheel if necessary to position pawlon coupler. Index mark (M—Fig. 151)should be aUgned with inside edge ofstop arm (A). If not, alternately loosenthen retighten each adjusting bolt (B)until stop arm (A) is aligned with indexmark (M). Move shift lever out of parkposition. Detach control rod (R) fromlever (L) and turn clevis (C) to obtainmaximum rod length but stiU be able toattach rod (R) to lever (L).

TRANSMISSION SHIFTLEVERS AND UNKAGE

181. 8000-9000 MODELS. Refer toFig. 149 for exploded view of transmis-sion shift levers and linkage on 8000 and

14 15 \ / T - |35/

Fig. 152—Exploded viaw of ahift linkaga on Modais 8700, 9700, TW-10,1. High/low shift lever2. Gearshift lever3. Pivot pin4. Pin6. High/low shift

finger6. Trunnion7. Washer8. Shim9. Park bellcrank

10. Yoke11. High/low beUcrank12. Pin13. Interlock pin14. Pivot shaft15. Gearshift beUcrank16. Yoke17. Pin18. Gearshift rod

19. Gearshift arm20. High/low arm21. High/low rod22. Interlock arm23. Interlock rod24. Shift bracket25. Park arm26. Bushing27. Support

TW-20 and TW-30,28. Pin29. Detent ball30. Spring31. Park brake

beUcrank32. Washer33. Snap ring34. Interlock arm35. Park brake rod36. Washer

58

SHOP MANUAL Paragraph 182

9000 models. The high-low shift lever (2)should be aligned with neutral (N)position and main shift lever should be at4th-8th gear position when the levers ontransmission are aUgned with referencemarks on transmission housing asshown in Fig. 154. Also, the high-lowshift lever should not strike end of slot ininstrument panel when in either high (H)or low (L) position; main shift levershould not strike end of slot when ineither reverse or 4-8th speed position. Ifnecessary to adjust shift linkage,remove the pins connecting yokes (15and/or 18—Fig. 149) on lower shift rodsto beUcranks (12 and/or 13) and loosenjam nut (16 and/or 19). Shorten orlengthen lower rods as necessary toobtain proper shift action, then secureyoke pins with cotter pins and tightenjam nuts.

If shift linkage cannot be properlyadjusted, either the linkage has beenimproperly assembled or overhaul oflinkage is indicated. Wear of pins and pinholes in shift levers, shift rod endsand/or beUcranks. or bearing wear inshift levers and/or beUcranks wiU causeimproper shift action. Bushings (11) inbellcranks are renewable.

When assembling linkage, note themeasurements of shift rods given inlegend of Fig. 149 and observe thefoUowing: Early models were not fittedwith wave (spring) washers (6); instaU-ing the wave washers on models not soequipped will help eliminate free play ofshift arms. The high-low shift beUcrank(12) arms are the same length. On mainshift beUcrank (13), connect the 3-incharm to upper shift rod (7) and the5V4-inch long arm to lower rod yoke (18).Pivot (14) is instaUed on instrumentpanel support with pin side to rear(against support); foot throttle beU-crank pivots in the hollow bracket pin.

182. 8600-9600 MODELS. Refer toFig. 150 for exploded view of transmis-sion shift levers and linkage for8600-9600 models. High-low shift lever(2) engages high-low intermediate lever(3) when shift lever is in the high-lowslot in instrument panel. When shiftlever (2) is moved through neutral andover to the park slot, intermediate lever(1) is engaged. Gear shift lever (4) andthe two intermediate levers (1 and 3) areequipped with non-renewable bushings.When adjusting shift levers on linkage,the reference marks on transmissioncase must NOT be used. Fig. 155 showsdimensions for instalUng high-low leverarm and gearshift cam lever arm if armswere removed or if they are out ofadjustment. After lever arms arepositioned correctly, tighten retainingbolts to 11-15 ft.-lbs. torque. Adjust theforward yokes on rods (8, 9 and 12—Fig.

Fig. 153—Viaw of transmis-sion with top covar ra-movad. Braka lavar (14)and rod (7) ara ramovadwith covar and ara showninstailad for illustrationoniy, Nota that a apacarring Is instailad at (S) onsptash tubrlcatad trans-missions or at (P) on pres-sure iubricatad transmis-sions. Refer to taxt. Num-bers foliowing iegend indi-cate identicai parts in Fig.

157.

1. Index lever spring {27)2. Index lever (33)3. Spring (hair) pins

{15 & 22)4. Brake pawl (23)5. Sleeve {18)6. Washer {16)7. Brake rod (14)8. Index arm retaining nut

{30)

Fig. 154—On 8000—9000modais, raference marks(3) on transmission hous-ing and dot mark (7) oncam driva gear shaft arenecessary for proper reas-sembiy of shift cam andshift ievers. Note casevent piug; inspect vent tobe sure that it is notplugged whenever servicingtransmission. Refer to Fig,155 for 8600—9600 modets.

Fig, 155—On 8600—9600modeis, DO NOT use refer-ence marks on transmis-sion housing. Adjust ieversto dimensions shown, withgearshift cam iever in firstgaar position and high-lowlever in neutral. Refer toFig. 154 for 8000-9000

modeis.

9. Brake lever shaft (3)10. Pivot bolt {37)11. Cotter pin12. Mainshaft

13. Flat washer14. Brake lever {1)15. Detent baU {10)16. Reverse idler

CONTROL ARM SHAFT

HIGH LOW LEVER

59

Paragraphs 183-184 FORD

150) so gearshift lever (4) is in lst-5thposition and intermediate levers (1 and3) are exactly in neutral position in slotsin instrument panel.

183. 8700, 9700, TW-10, TW-20 andTW-30 MODELS. Refer to Fig. 152 forexploded view of transmission shiftlevers and linkage used on Models 8700,9700. TW-10, TW-20 and TW-30.

To remove shifter assembly, unscrewboot retaining screws. sUde boot up shiftlevers (1 and 2) and detach shift levers.Disconnect shift rods; unbolt and

remove shift bracket (24). Remainder ofdisassembly is evident after inspectionof shift assembly. Do not lose shims (8),detent baU (29) or spring (30).

Renew any components causing slop-piness or binding in shift action. Usetrial assemblies to locate shifting mal-functions.

Reverse disassembly procedure toassemble shifter components. InstaUsufficient shims so end play of beU-cranks (9 and 11) in shift bracket (24) is0.000-0.009 inch.

To adjust shift Unkage, proceed as

Fig. 156—When installingshift cam, align lobe "X"with fork baaring "B";refar to text for completefork and index lever align-ment procedure and forcovar plate and cam drive

gaar instaliation.

foUows: Detach shift rod (21-Fig. 152)from high/low shift arm (20) and placeshift arm in neutral. Center high/lowshift lever (11) over interlock pin (13)then adjust length of shift rod (21) byturning clevis so clevis pin wiU fit easilythrough clevis and shift arm (20). Adjustlength of interlock control rod (23) byturning clevis so center to centerdistance between rod ends is 11-3/8inches. Adjust length of gearshiftcontrol rod (18) by turning clevis socenter to center distance between rodends is 13-7/8 inches. Check clearancebetween gearshift lever (2) and guardwith lever in 4th gear. Minimumclearance is V2 inch; loosen gearshiftlever and rotate lever to obtainclearance. Clearance between high/lowshift lever (1) and guard should be atleast V2 inch whUe in high range and V*inch when in park position. Loosen leverclamp and rotate lever to obtain desiredclearance.

TRANSMISSION TOP COVER

184. 8000-9000 MODELS. To remove

1 1 —1 2 - -1 3 ^14-^

Iii'

17

18

2928

<'

Fig. 157-^Expiodad viaw showing transmission housing, top cover and brake linkage, shift cover, shift cam, shift forks and raits. Refer to Fig. 160for axpiodad viaw of gaars and shafts with rear cover, bearings and sea is and front bearing supports, index iever {33) acts as detent for shift cam{40); thara is no nautrai datant position for tha shift cam. Thraa detent notches in high-tow shift raii (55) provides transmission neutrai position as

well as high and iow ranga detent positions.1. Brake lever2. Flat washer3. Brake lever shaft4. Filler cap (early)

4A. FUler plug (late)5. Extension {early)6. Gasket7. "O"ring8. Top cover9. Gasket

10. Detent ball

11. Detent spring12. Brake lever13. Roll pin14. Brake rod15. Spring {hair) pin16. Flat washer17. Spring18. Sleeve19. lst/2nd gear fork20. 3rd/reverse shift

fork

21. 4th gear shift fork22. Spring (hair) pin23. Brake pawl24. Set screw25. High/low shift fork26. High/low shift lever27. Index arm spring28. Transmission

housing29. Shift rail bore plug

30. Nut31. Flat washer32. Pivot bushing33. Index arm34. Thrust washer35. Cam roller bearing36. Transmission vent37. Index arm pivot

bolt38. Bushing

39. Thrust washer40. Shift cam41. Gasket42. Inner cover43. Shift cam drive gear44. Dowel pin45. Shift cam cover46. Seal47. Main shift lever48. PI1lug49. Oil level plug

51. Thrust washer52. High/low shift lever53. "Oaring54. Bushing55. High/low shift rail56. Detent ball57. Detent spring58. Gasket59. Detent plug60. Main shift rail61. Snap ring

60

SHOP MANUAL

transmission top cover, first removecenter plate from operator's platform,then proceed as follows: Disconnecttransmission brake Unkage rod fromlever (1—Fig. 157) on top of transmis-sion cover.

NOTE: Some 8000—9000 models mayhave been changed over to the laterparking brake lever assembly, similar toItems 14 and 16 (Fig. 150); Item 15 wasnot used In the changeover.

Unbolt cover from transmission hous-ing, pivot front end of cover to left onlyfar enough to gain access to right end ofbrake rod (14—Fig. 157). Pivotingcenter too far will disengage detent baU(10). Remove the spring (hair) pin (15)and slide washer (16), spring (17) andsleeve (18) towards left end of rod, thenreinstall pin (15) in rod. Remove outerpin (22) and flat washer (16), dis-engage the brake rod from brake pawl(23) and lift cover from transmission.

Drive roU pin from lever (1) and shaft(3) and remove shaft and lever (12) outbottom of cover; take care not to losedetent baU (10) and spring (11). InstaUnew "0" ring (7) in groove on shaft andrenew detent baU and/or spring ifnecessary. Lubricate shaft. "0" ring andbore in cover and install shaft and lowerlever (12) with detent spring and baU.Place flat washer (2) on shaft, instaUlever (1) aligned with detent arm of lever(12) and secure with roU pin.

ReinstaU cover with new gasket asfollows: Insert left end of rod (14)through pawl and instaU flat washer and"hairpin" (22). Remove "hairpin" (15),slide spring, sleeve and washer againstpawl and reinstall "hairpin" (15) throughhole in rod. Swing cover back intoposition, taking care not to dislodgedetent baU, and tighten retaining capscrews to a torque of 12-18 ft.-lbs. Rein-staU center plate in operator's platform.

185. 8600-9600 MODELS. To removetransmission top cover, remove opera-tor's platform mat and center platform,then proceed as foUows: Shift high-lowrange shift lever to neutral. sUghtlyloosen the two bolts on pivot bracket(Fig. 148). Shift high-low lever to parkposition, use a suitable pry bar oradjustable wrench on pivot bracketwhUe front bolt is removed.

CAUTiON: Spring on pivot bracket isunder tension and may jump out ifbracket is removed without hoidingbracket against spring pressure.

Shift high-low lever to neutral andremove the other bolt on pivot bracketand remove spring and spacer. Removethe two adjusting bolts holding actuatinglever to brake lever shaft, removeactuating lever and lay lever aside with-

out disturbing adjustment on spring endof lever. Unbolt cover from transmissionhousing, pivot front end of cover to theleft far enough to remove "hairpin"spring clip (22—Fig. 158), and washerfrom end of brake rod (14). Cover andbrake rod may now be removed. Withcover off, drive out roU pin at top ofbrake lever shaft (3) and removeactuating lever hub from top of shaft.Tap shaft (3) out bottom of cover. "0"ring (7) should be renewed at this timeand brake lever (12), brake rod (14) andshaft (3) inspected for wear, as weU asshaft bore in transmission cover. Lubri-cate shaft, bore and "0" ring beforereinstalling in cover. Reinstall actuatinglever hub on top of shaft (3) and reinstaUroUpin.

Install a new cover gasket, insert endof brake rod (14) into parking brake pawl(23) and reinstaU washer and "hairpin"(22). Swing cover back into position,instaU aU but the two center bolts on leftside of cover and tighten to a torque of12-18 ft.-lbs. Place the pivot bracketstrap spacer over the two remaining boltholes, so that the offset holes align

Paragraphs 185-186

properly and loosely instaU actuatinglever adjusting bolts onto hub on top ofbrake shaft (3). Start rear bolt into pivotbracket, swing pivot bracket away fromtransmission and instaU spring. Using asuitable pry bar or adjustable wrench,force pivot bracket against spring pres-sure until front bolt hole aligns withstrap spacer and transmission cover, andinstaU front bolt.

NOTE: To avoid excessive springtension when instaiiing pivot bracket,place high-low shift iever in park positionand make sure parking brake pawl (23)fails into full engagement in collar intransmission.

Tighten the two pivot bracket bolts toa torque of 24-30 ft.-lbs. Adjust park-ing brake linkage as outlined in para-graph 179.

186. 8700, 9700, TW-10, TW-20 ANDTW-30 MODELS. To remove transmis-sion top cover, remove operator'splatform mat and center platform, thenproceed as foUows: On TW-30 models,disconnect brake system return to sump

28

Fig. 158—View showing transmission housing, gearshift and parking brake components.

1. Brake actuator hub2. Washer3. Brake lever shaft4. Filler plug5. Parking brake lever6. Gasket7. "O"ring8. Top cover9. Gasket

10. Detent ball11. Spring12. Brake lever

14. Brake rod16. Washer19. lst/2nd gear fork20. 3rd/reverse shift

fork21. 4th gear shift fork22. Pin23. Brake pawl24. Set screw25. High/low shift fork26. High/low shift lever

28. Transmissionhousing

30. Detent ball31. Spring32. Interlock33. Gearshift finger34. Interlock finger35. Shaft36. Interlock lever41. Gasket45. Shift cover46. Seal47. Gearshift shaft

48. Gearshift arm49. Support50. Clevis pin52. High/low shift lever53. "Oaring54. Bushing55. High/low shift rail56. Detent ball57. Spring58. Gasket59. Detent plug60. Main shift rail61. Snap rings

61

Paragraphs 187-188 FORD

hydraulic Une and rear axle lubricationline, cap lines and fittings, then on aUmodels, detach parking brake controlrod clevis (C—Fig. 151) from lever (L).Use a suitable pry bar or wrench againstanchor (N) and remove anchor retainingscrews.

CAUTION: Spring on stop arm (A) isunder tension and may Jump out ifanchor is removed without hoidingagainst spring pressure.

Unscrew bolts (B) and remove actua-tor assembly. Unbolt transmission hous-ing cover, pivot front end of cover to theleft far enough to remove pin (22—Fig.158) and washer (16) from brake rod(14). Cover and brake rod may now beremoved. With cover off. drive out roUpin at top of brake lever shaft (3) andremove actuating lever hub from top ofshaft. Tap shaft (3) out bottom of cover."0" ring (7) should be renewed at thistime and brake lever (12), brake rod (14)and shaft (3) inspected for wear, as weUas shaft bore in transmission cover. Lub-ricate shaft, bore and "0" ring beforeinstalling in cover. ReinstaU actuatinglever hub (1) on top of shaft (3) andreinstaU roU pin.

Install a new cover gasket, insert endof brake rod (14) into parking brake pawl(23) and reinstall washer (16) and pin(22). Swing cover back into position.instaU aU but the two center bolts on leftside of cover and tighten bolts on 8700-9700 models to a torque of 12-18 ft.-lbs.Tighten cover bolts on TW-10, TW-20and TW 30 models to a torque of 27 37ft.-lbs. Install actuating lever assemblyonto hub (1). Start rear bolt into anchor(N—Fig. 151), swing anchor away fromtransmission and instaU spring. Using asuitable pry bar or adjustable wrench,force anchor against spring pressureuntil front bolt hole aligns with strapspacer and transmission cover, andinstall front bolt.

NOTE: To avoid excessive springtension when Installing anchor, makesure parking brake pawl (23—Fig. 158)falis into fuil engagement in coiiar intransmission.

Tighten the two anchor bolts to atorque of 24-30 ft.-lbs. On TW-30 modelsreconnect brake hydrauUc line and rearaxle lubrication line. Adjust parkingbrake linkage as outlined in paragraph180.

R&R TRANSMISSIONASSEMBLY

All Models Except 8700, 9700,TW-10, TW-20 And TW-30

NOTE: The foliowing transmission

removai procedure, bv deieting removalof rear hood (instrument panel) supportand operations outlined in paragraph162, wili aiso apply to spiitting tractorbetween transmission and rear axiecenter housing.

187. To remove transmission, drainlubricant (approximately 17 gallons)from transmission and rear axle centerhousing, split tractor between engineand transmission as outlined in para-graph 162, then proceed as foUows:

Disconnect lower shift rods at forwardend and the clutch rod at crossshaftend. Remove center plate from opera-tor's platform and disconnect the fourbrake lines at top of transmission; plugall openings and identify lines forreasssembly. Disconnect wiring at dis-connect plug at left side of transmission.Remove tool box, battery and batterybox. Unbolt instrument panel (rearhood) support and remove the supportassembly from tractor. On models withDual Power, control pedal assembly andlinkage should be removed and discon-nected to prevent damage. Disconnectlower shift rods from transmission andbrake rod from lever on top of trans-mission cover, on 8000 and 9000 models.On 8600-9600 models, do not removepark brake rod at end of actuating lever,to prevent disturbing adjustment. Makea reference mark across actuating leverand hub and remove adjusting bolts toparking brake hub. Lay actuating leveraside. To avoid possible breakage of ptoclutch locating pin (18-Fig. 197), re-move pin from upper left side of rear ax-le center housing.

Support rear axle center housing,both under front end next to transmis-sion housing and under drawbar to keeprear unit from tilting backward orforward when transmission is removed.Attach hoist to transmission, unbolttransmission from rear axle centerhousing and remove the transmissionassembly or separate tractor betweentransmission and rear axle centerhousing.

To facUitate reconnecting transmis-sion to rear axle center housing, removethe hydraulic pump and adap-ter plate assembly following procedureoutlined in paragraph 233. Place newgasket on face of rear axle centerhousing and be sure that pto clutch hubis fuUy engaged in the clutch discs. Lifttransmission into position with hoist andworking through hydraulic pump open-ing, guide pto input shaft into clutch huband coupling and onto output shaft oftransmission. Tighten the V2-inch capscrews at each side of housing to atorque of 50-65 ft.-lbs. and the 5/8-inchcap screws at top and bottom of housingto a torque of 95-130 ft.-lbs. InstaU ptoclutch locating pin with new "0" ring and

tighten pin to a torque of 70-95 ft.-lbs.ReinstaU hydraulic pump as outlined inparagraph 234 or 235, reconnect engineto transmission as in paragraph 163.Reinstall 8600-9600 park brake actuatinglever on brake shaft hub on top oftransmission cover, with reference markaligned. If unable to match referencemark to obtain original adjustment ofparking brake, adjust as outlined inparagraph 179.

Complete remainder of assembly byreversing disassembly procedure.

Models 8700, 9700, TW-10, TW-20And TW-30

188. Prior to transmission removal,drain transmission lubricant (approxi-mately 17 gaUons on 8700-9700 models,20 gaUons on TW-10 and TW-20 modelsand 23 gallons on TW-30 models) andsplit tractor between engine and trans-mission as outlined in paragraph 162.

Remove screws retaining gearshiftboot, raise boot, loosen gearshift leverclamps and detach gearshift levers. Onmodels with Dual Power, control pedalassembly and Unkage should be removedand disconnected to prevent damage.Disconnect and cap brake lines. Detachengine clutch linkage. It is not necessaryto remove the cab or cabless platform inorder to remove the transmission if thesides of cab or platform are properlysupported. If cab or platform removal isdesired, disconnect wires, hoses, tubingor linkage which wiU interfere withseparation of platform or cab fromtractor. On cab equipped models,remove scuff plates in door openings,remove access plates and unscrew frontcab mounting bolts being careful not tolose shims. Remove bolts securing frontof platform on models not equipped withcab. Unscrew bolts securing rear of cabor platform to rear axle housings and usea suitable hoist to lift cab or platformaway from tractor.

Remove brake lines from transmis-sion housing. Detach shift rods andremove gearshift assembly from hous-ing. Remove Dual Power oil tube.Support front of rear axle center housingto prevent tipping. Attach hoist to trans-mission, unbolt transmission from rearaxle center housing and remove trans-mission.

If transmission or pto shafts wiU notengage during reassembly, removehydraulic pump and adapter plateassembly as outlined in paragraph 233.Tighten V2-inch cap screws on each sideof housing to 65-90 ft.-lbs. and 5/8-inchcap screws at top and bottom of housingto 140-170 ft.-lbs. Tighten platformretaining bolts to 100-120 ft.-lbs. Tight-en cab retaining bolts to 200-220 ft.-lbs.

62

SHOP MANUAL Paragraphs 189-191

TRANSMISSION OVERHAUL

All Models

189. SHIFT CAM, INDEX ARMAND SfflFT COVER (ALL MODELSEXCEPT 8700, 9700, TW-10, TW-20AND TW.30). Shift cam, index arm,shift fork roUers and shift cover can beremoved without removing transmissionfrom tractor; proceed as foUows:

Remove battery cover, disconnectground cable and remove battery,battery box and center plate from opera-tor's platform. Drain transmission lubri-cant. Remove transmission top cover asoutlined in paragraph 184 or 185. Discon-nect lower shift rod from gearshift camlever; refer to Fig. 154. Unbolt andremove the shift cover (45—Fig. 157),then unbolt inner cover (42), removegearshift cam lever (47) and withdrawcam drive gear (43). Remove seal (46)from cover.

Remove washer (51) from cam (40),remove cam from transmission andremove inner washer (39). Remove theroUers (35) from index arm (33) and shiftforks (19,20 and 21).

CarefuUy clean and inspect aU parts,renewing any that are excessively wornor damaged. Bushing (38) in transmis-sion housing may be renewed ifexcessively worn. After installing newbushing, it must be line reamed to aninside diameter of 1.5020-1.5045 inches.The index arm can be removed afterremoving arm pivot bolt; refer to Figs.153 and 156.

To reinstaU shift cam and cover, pro-ceed as foUows: InstaU index arm andtighten pivot bolt nut to a torque of 48-64 ft.-lbs. Using proper size driver,instaU new seal in cover with Up of sealinward. Lubricate cam drive gear and

Fig. 159—View showing rear of transmissionon Modeis TW-10, TW-20 and TW-30.

1. Jack screw holes2. Low pressure pump3. Pump retaining

screws

4. Pto shaft5. Output shaft bearing

retainer6. Rear cover

carefully install gear shaft throughhousing bore and seal. InstaU innercover and tighten retaining cap screwsto a torque of 20-27 ft.-lbs. Place the twosUding couplings (95 and 101—Fig. 146)in neutral position and engage sUdinggear (75) with secondary countershaft.Refer to Fig. 156 and place inner washeron cam and the bearings on shift forksand index arm. Working through topcover opening, move upper end of indexarm rearward to align index roUer withcam, then instaU cam with lobe (X)engaging rear shift fork and releaseindex arm when cam is properly seated.Using new gasket, install cover. On8000-9000 models, be sure to have dot(or stake mark) on outer end of camdrive gear shaft pointing up as shown inFig. 154. Tighten cover retaining capscrews to a torque of 27-32 ft.-lbs.foUowing a diagonal pattern. InstaUgearshift cam lever so that it is alignedwith reference mark on transmissionhousing; refer to Fig. 154. On 8600-9600models, place transmission main coun-tershaft front coupling to the rear andhigh-low coupling in neutral. Tightencover retaining cap screws to a torque of27-32 ft.-lbs. following a diagonalpattern. Refer to Fig. 155 and instaUlevers to dimensions shown. DO NOTuse reference marks on outside of hous-ing. Tighten lever clamp bolts to atorque of 11-15 ft.-lbs. RefUl transmis-sion and complete remainder of reas-sembly by reversing disassembly pro-cedure.

190. SfflFT LEVER, INTERLOCKAND SfflFT COVER (MODELS 8700,9700, TW-10, TW-20 AND TW-30). Shiftcover with shift lever and interlock canbe removed without removing transmis-sion from tractor by using foUowingprocedure:

Drain transmission lubricant andremove battery and box. Shift transmis-sion to neutral. Remove oil cooler inlettube and torque amplifier tube. OnTW-30 models, remove Dual PowerhydrauUc oU pressure line from regu-lating valve and "tee" fitting. Disconnectlube cooler inlet line from regulatingvalve, loosen clamps and reposition line.On aU models, plug openings to preventcontamination. Detach lower ends ofinterlock rod (23—Fig. 152) and gear-shift rod (18). Be sure transmission is inneutral, remove shift cover screws andremove shift cover.

Remove interlock finger (34—Fig.158) and key from shaft (35) then with-draw shaft from shift cover. Removegearshift arm (48) and key from shaft(47). Extract clevis pin (50) from support(49) and pull out shaft (47) just enough toremove shift control finger (33). Do notpuU out shaft more than necessary toremove finger as shaft splines may

damage bushing and seal in cover.Remove shift control finger (33) thenwithdraw shaft (47) from inside of shiftcover being careful not to lose detentbaU (30) or spring (31). Remove interlock(32) and support (49).

Inspect components for damage orexcessive wear which may affect func-tion of gearshift or interlock mecha-nisms. Inspect shift cover for cracks anddistortion.

To assemble gearshift, interlock andshift cover components, reverse disas-sembly procedure while noting the fol-lowing: InstaU shift control finger (33)with chamfer in bore towards shiftcover. Finger (33) should travel an equalamount forward and rearward of fingerson interlock (32). If travel is unequal,reposition finger (33) on shaft (47)splines. Tighten interlock finger (34)clamp bolt and gearshift arm clamp boltto 20-26 ft.-lbs. Tighten shift coverscrews to 20-27 ft.-lbs. in a diagonalpattern on 8700-9700 models. Shift coverbolts on Models TW-10, TW-20 andTW-30 should be tightened to a torque of27-37 ft.-lbs.

191. OIL PUMP, REAR COVER,REAR OIL SEALS AND fflGH-LOWGEARS. The low pressure oil pump,transmission rear cover, high-low gearsand shift rail can be removed aftersplitting tractor between transmissionand rear axle center housing or withtransmission removed as outlined inparagraph 187 or 188.

On TW-10, TW-20 and 'rW-30 models,remove four screws (3—Fig. 159) secur-ing low pressure oO pump to rear cover(6). CarefuUy withdraw pto shaft (4) and

Fig, 159A —View showing transmission raarcovar with two rataining cap screws threadedinto jack scraw holas. Pto shaft is ramovadwith raar cover {secondary countarahaft baar-

ing ratainar).

63

Paragraph 192 FORD

oil pump. Remove outer snap ring anddrive pto shaft and bearing out of pumphousing. OU pump is available as a unitonly and must be serviced as anassembly.

On aU models, refer to Fig. 159 or159A and unbolt then carefuUy pryoutput shaft bearing retainer off rearcover to avoid damaging output shafti^earing adjustment shims. Remove thecap screws retaining rear cover to trans-mission housing and thread two of thecap screws into jacH screw locationsshown. Evenly tighten the two capscrews to force rear cover from housing,then remove the rear cover and, on aUmodels except TW-10, TW-20 andTW-30, the pto shaft assembly. Removejack screws from cover. On splashlubricated transmissions pry oil seal(68—Fig. 160) from retainer {10} and onall models, if bearing cup (61) is scoredor otherwise damaged, remove the cup.Remove snap ring (66) and bump ptoshaft (42) and bearing (65) out rear ofcover, then remove pto shaft oil seal (63)(splash lubricated transmissions only).Inspect bearing (45) in rear cover andremove the needle roUer bearing if wornor damaged. Withdraw output shaft (52)with gear (58) out rear of transmission;press shaft from gear and rear bearingcone (60) and remove front bearing cone(50) if worn or scored. Shift high-lowsliding coupUng (51) to rear and removecoupling from shift fork. Withdrawsecondary countershaft (41) from rear oftransmission, taking care not to dropthrust bearing (38). Inspect needle roUerbearing (39) in web of transmissionhousing; if bearing is excessively wornor damaged, it can be removed and anew bearing instaUed providing care istaken to remove any dislodged needleroUers from housing when removing oldbearing. Inspect bearing cup (49) in rearend of main countershaft (47) andremove if scored or excessively worn.Inspect baU bearing (65) on pto shaft(42); remove snap ring (67) and pressbearing from shaft if bearing is worn orrough.

To remove high-low shift fork, removedetent plug (59—Fig. 157), spring (57)and baU (56) and unscrew set screw (24)from fork (25). Remove shift raU (55) outrear of transmission housing, then disen-gage fork from transmission brake pawl(23) and remove fork from housing.

Excessive wear of gears, bearings andother components in rear section oftransmission would indicate that thetransmission should be completely dis-assembled and inspected.

192. To reassemble transmission, pro-ceed as foUows: Using suitable drivers,instaU new needle roller bearing (39—Fig. 160) in transmission web and new

bearing cup (49) in rear end of maincountershaft (47). Place high-low shiftfork (25—Fig. 157) on pin in transmis-sion brake pawl (23), then insert shiftrail (55) and fork retaining set screw(24). AUgn single indentation in shaftwith screw, then tighten screw andlocknut to 23-30 ft.-lbs. on ModelsTW-10, TW-20 and TW-30 and 12-18ft.-lbs. on all other models. Install detentbaU (56), spring (57) and retaining plug(59) with new gasket (58). Place high-lowsUding coupling (51—Fig. 160) in forkwith brake teeth to rear, then shiftcoupling forward to engage with dogteeth on main countershaft (47). Referalso to Fig. 161.

NOTE: Transmission gear shift slidingconnector and coupiing assemblies arefurnished as matched sets on TW-10,TW-20 and TW-30 models. When remov-ing countershaft, make sure forward

1 2 3 4

connector and coupling assembly andrearward connector and coupiing assem-bly each remain together as matchedsets, if Instaiiing new connectors andcoupiings, make sure etched timingmarks are aligned. During transmissionreassembly, position connector andcoupiing assembiies with chamfered endof connector bores facing rearward forease of countershaft instailation.

NOTE: When instaiiing new coupling(51—Fig. 160) on 8000—9000 modeis,instaii spacer C9NN—7N445—A betweencountershaft gear dog teeth and gearface.

Using grease, stick thrust bearing(38—Fig. 160) to front end of secondarycountershaft (41). On pressure lubri-cated transmission, except TW-10, TW-20 and TW-30, instaU spacer ring (20) ingroove adjacent to sliding couplingsplines on secondary countershaft as

69 70Fig. 160- Exploded view of transmission gears, shafts and bearings with rear cover and bearingsupports. Refer to Fig. 157 for exploded view showing transmission housing, top and shift covers, shiftforks and rails and transmission brake linkage. Note rear cover differences in Figs. 159 and 159A. Onlater modeis except TW-10, TW-20 or TW-30, third gear (35) face is recessed and a thrust washer isfitted. Seais (63 and 68) are not used in pressure lubricated transmissions. Snap ring (64) is not used insplash lubricated transmissions. "O" ring (16A) is instaiied in mainshaft (16) on models without Dual

Power. Oil pump (71) is oniy used on TW-W, TW-20 and TW-30,

1. Oil inlet tube2. "Cring3. Spacer4. Manifold5. Tube fitting6. Pto drive flange7. Pilot bearing8. Clutch release

bearing support9. Gasket

10. Input shaft11. Snap ring12. Pto shaft seal13. Mainshaft seal14. Needle roller

bearing15. Thrust washer16. Mainshaft

16A. '•O*' ring17. Needle roller

bearing

18. Spacer19. Sliding gear/

coupling20. Spacer21. Bearing support22. Gasket23. Needle roller

bearing24. Snap ring25. Thrust washer26. Second gear27. Sliding coupling28. Connector29. First gear30. Thrust washer31. Reverse gear32. Thrust washer33. Sliding coupling34. Connector35. Third gear

36. Bearing cup37. Bearing cone38. Thrust bearing39. Needle roller

bearing41. Secondary counter

shaft42. Pto shaft43. Washer44. Thrust washer45. Needle roller

bearing46. Dowel pin47. Main countershaft

47A. Main countershaft48. Key49. Bearing cup50. Bearing cone51. Sliding coupling52. Output shaft

53. Thrust washer54. Bearing55. Reverse idler56. Idler shaft bolt57. Idler shaft58. Output shaft gear59. Thrust washer60. Bearing cone61. Bearing cup62. Rear cover63. Oil seal64. Snap ring65. Ball beamg66. Snap ring67. Snap ring68. Oil seal69. Shim70. Bearing retainer71. Low pressure oil

pump

64

SHOP MANUAL Paragraphs 194-195

shown at (P—Fig. 153). Note shape ofspacer in Fig. 162. Lubricate needlebearing in housing and position second-ary countershaft in the needle bearing inhousing. Install new bearing cone(5O.-Fig. 160) on front end of outputshaft (52), place gear (58) on shaft withdog teeth forward, then instaU thrustwasher (59) and rear bearing cone (60)on rear end of shaft. Insert output shaftassembly so that splines on front end ofshaft enter sUding coupling (51) andbearing cone is seated in cup in maincountershaft.

Using suitable drivers, instaU newneedle roUer bearing in rear cover andbearing cup in bearing retainer (70). Onsplash lubricated transmissions, renewseals (63 and 68). These seals are notused on pressure lubricated transmis-sion, since a common reservoir is used.Drive or press new bearing onto ptoshaft and secure with snap ring.Lubricate shaft and oil seal if soequipped, in rear cover, then instaUshaft and bearing assembly, taking carenot to damage oil seal. InstaU snap ringin rear cover at rear side of pto shaftbearing. Position new gasket on dowelpins on rear face of housing. InstaU steelwasher (43) and thrust washer (44) onrear end of secondary countershaft (41)with tab on thrust washer (44) pointingto rear and up. Note that on early 8000models, steel washer (43) is absent. OnaU models except TW-10, TW-20 andTW-30, insert pto shaft through second-ary countershaft, taking care not todamage oil seal (12) in front end of mainshaft (16) as pto shaft is moved forward.Turn shaft as necessary to aUgn splineswith drive plate (6) at flywheel and besure dowel holes are aligned as covercontacts rear face of housing. Tightenrear cover retaining cap screws alter-nately and evenly to a torque of 20-27ft.-lbs.

On Models TW-10, TW-20 and TW-30,instaU bearing (65) and snap ring (67) onpto shaft (42) then instaU oil pump (71)on shaft and bearing and instaU snapring (66). Install rear cover on transmis-sion housing and tighten rear coverretaining screws alternately and evenlyto 27-35 ft.-lbs. Insert pto shaft with oilpump into transmission and tighten oilpump retaining screws to 21-29 ft.-lbs.

On aU models, instaU output shaftbearing retainer (70) with sufficientthickness of shims (69) to adjust outputshaft bearing preload. With retainer capscrews tightened to the proper torque,measure torque required to turn outputshaft with pull scale attached to cordwrapped around shaft. Bearings arecorrectly adjusted when a puU of 12pounds or less is required to steadilyrotate shaft and there is no end play ofshaft in bearings. Remove shim thick-ness to remove end play or add shimthickness if puU required to turn shaft isgreater than 12 pounds. Shims areavailable in thicknesses of 0.002/0.006and 0.012/0.014 inch.

194. RENEW INPUT SHAFT OILSEALS. Oil leakage into clutch compart-ment can be from damaged or worn oilseal (13—Fig. 160) in clutch releasebearing support (8) or pto shaft oil seal(12) in front end of transmission mainshaft (16). The following procedure forinput shaft oil seal renewal does notapply to Dual Power as seal is not usedwith Dual Power unit. Refer to para-graph 195 for renewal of pto shaft oil sealon all models including Dual Powermodels.

OU seal (13) in release bearing supportcan be renewed after splitting tractorbetween engine and transmission hous-ing as outlined in paragraph 162;proceed as foUows: On pressure lubri-cated transmissions, disconnect oil sup-ply tube going to clutch release hub andcountershaft bearing retainer by puUingtube straight out. Withdraw input shaft(10), remove pins from clutch fork andremove cross shaft, fork and releasebearing, then unbolt and remove clutchrelease bearing support from transmis-sion. Take care not to lose thrust washer(15) from front end of mainshaft.

Remove and discard the needle roUerbearing and oil seal from rear end ofrelease bearing support. Refer to Fig.163 and install new oil seal with flat sidefirst (Up to rear); drive seal in until itUghtly contacts shoulder in support.InstaU new needle roUer bearing bydriving on lettered side of bearing (flatend) only until bearing is 1/8-inch belowflush with thrust face of support.

To reinstaU support, stick thrustwasher (15—Fig. 160) on front end ofmainshaft using grease and position tabon washer up and forward. Lubricateneedle bearing and oil seal, thencarefully instaU support with new gasket(9), placing flat side of gasket andsupport down, and tighten retaining capscrews to a torque of 20-27 ft.-lbs. onsplash lubricated transmissions, 27-37ft.-lbs. on TW-10, TW-20 and TW-30models and 30-40 ft.-lbs. on aU othermodels. Install cross shaft, clutchreleeise bearing and fork and inserttransmission input shaft into clutch discand flywheel. Reconnect engine totransmission as outlined in paragraph163.

195. To renew pto shaft oil seal intransmission mainshaft, first removeDual Power unit on models so equipped,as outlined in paragraph 170, or removeclutch release bearing support on aUother models as outlined in paragraph194. Remove transmission top cover asin paragraph 184, 185 or 186, thenproceed as foUows:

Remove cap screw (56—Fig. 160) andlocking washer, then sUde reverse idlershaft (57) rearward and remove theidler. Remove countershaft bearing

Fig. 161 —View of rear end of transmissionwith output shaft and secondary countershaftramoved. Note brake pawi engaged with high/

iow siiding coupting.

Fig. 162—Note difference in shape of spacerrings used on spiash tubricated (5) and pres-sure tubricated {P) transmissions, exceptTW-10, TW-20 and TW-30 which are notequipped with spacers {18 or 20-Fig. 160).Refer to paragraphs 192 and 195 and to Fig.

153 for piacement.

BEARING

ROUNDEND

FLAT END

OIL SEAL

SHOULDER

SUPPORT

Fig, 163—View showing proper instailation ofoil seai and needle roiter bearing in dutchretease bearing support, if bearing is driven intoo far on spiash tubricated transmissions, it

wiii dose off oii hoie in support.

65

Paragraph 195A FORD

support (21) from front end of transmis-sion housing to allow countershaft todrop down. Engage sUding gear/coup-Ung (19) with dog teeth on front end ofsecondary countershaft (41), then re-move the mainshaft (16) from front endof transmission. Splash lubricated trans-missions have a thrust washer (15) atfront of mainshaft. Refer to Fig. 164,remove old seal and instaU new seal (12)with Up towards bushing as shown.

CAUTiON: Take care not to damagebushing as it Is not avaiiabie separatelyfrom mainshaft.

NOTE: On spiash iubricated trans-missions, instaii spacer ring (18—Fig.160) on mainshaft between siiding coup-ling spiines and bearing (17) as shown at(S—Fig. 153). Spacer ring chamfershouid be towards front. Ring preventssUding coupling from contacting bearingweb and shouid be instaiied on aii spiashiubricated transmissions.

Lubricate bushing, oil seal and ptoshaft, then carefuUy reinstaU mainshaftover pto shaft and be sure it engageswith sUding gear. Working throughinput shaft opening in housing, prycountershaft gear up with screwdriver,then instaU countershaft bearing sup-port, oil screen up, with new gasket andtighten retaining cap screws to a torqueof 27-37 ft.-lbs. on TW-10, TW-20 andTW-30 or to 20-27 ft.-lbs. on aU othermodels. On pressure lubricated trans-missions, instaU thrust washers (53—Fig. 160) between reverse idler gear (55)and transmission case waUs. ReinstaUreverse idler with step in hub to frontand shaft with notch to rear and up.Tighten shaft retaining cap screw to atorque of 12-18 ft.-lbs. and secure withlocking washer. ReinstaU clutch releasebearing support or Dual Power assemblyand reassemble tractor.

195A. OVERHAUL COMPLETETRANSMISSION. With disassemblycompleted as outlined in paragraphs 189through 195, proceed as foUows:

Fig. 164—Cross-section of mainshaft {16)showing proper instaiiation of pto shaft oitsaal {12). Bushing is not avaiiabia separataiy

from mainshaft.

Refer to Fig. 165 and remove snapring and thrust washer from front end ofcountershaft. To remove countershaft(47A—Fig. 160) from 8000 models,withdraw countershaft from rear oftransmission and remove gears, spacers,couplings and connectors as counter-shaft is withdrawn.

To remove single key countershaft onTW-10, T;W-2O and TW-30 models,remove shift rail and shifter detent ballsand springs. Remove lst-5th, 2nd-6th,the 3rd-7th rev gear, shift fork and park-ing brake pawl from transmission. The4th-8th shift fork must be removedfoUowing countershaft removal. Rein-staU main countershaft bearing retainer(70—Fig. 160) loosely to support frontend of countershaft then instaU inretainer screw holes, substitute bolts orstuds that are at least V2 inch longerthan original. Extra length studs willaUow countershaft to move forward forkey (48) removal. Move front sUdinggear coupling (27) forward to engage dogteeth of 47 tooth gear (26). Using a longscrewdriver, move connector (28) for-ward so front countershaft key wiU beaccessible. Separate gears untU 55 toothgear (29) is fully rearward. Make sure 47tooth gear (26) is fully forward contact-ing front bulkhead. Rear face of 43 toothgear (35) should remain in contact withcountershaft bearing and rear bulkhead.Remove front countershaft key with amagnet. Move rear sUding gear coupler(33) forward to engage dog teeth of 51tooth gear (31). Move connector forwardusing a long screwdriver so rearcountershaft key wiU be accessible.Separate gears untU 43 tooth gear (35)contacts rear of bulkhead and counter-shaft bearing. Remove rear countershaftkey with magnet. Withdraw counter-shaft (47) through rear of transmission.

To remove countershaft (47—Fig. 160)on aU other models, sUde the 55 toothgear (26) as far forward as possible thensUde coupler forward to engage dogteeth of 55 tooth gear. With a longscrewdriver, evenly move the connector(28) until retaining keys (48) areremovable. Using same procedure, move49 tooth gear (31) forward and removegear keys (48) in countershaft by movingconnector (34). Withdraw countershaftthrough rear of transmission. Disengagesnap rings on shift rail and on 8700 and9700 models, turn shift rail so detentballs and springs may be removedthrough passages in shift forks. With-draw shift raU from rear of transmissionwhile removing shift forks and brakepawl from shift rail.

CarefuUy clean and inspect aU partsand thoroughly clean transmission hous-ing. Check all bearings and renew anyscored, excessively worn or damagedtapered roUer bearing cones and cups or

needle roUer bearing assembUes.

NOTE: When instaiiing new needieroiier bearing assembiies, be sure toselect size of driver that wili fuiiy contactfiat (lettered) face of bearing cage andtake care not to drive inner (rounded) endof cage against shouider in bearing bore.

Inspect aU gear teeth for chipping,excessive wear or scoring, and renewany not suitable for further service. Alsoinspect bearing and thrust surfaces ofgears and shafts for scoring or excessivewear.

Prior to reassembling transmission,temporarily assemble gears, thrustspacers, connectors and coupUngs inproper assembly order on the transmis^sion countershaft, then instaU frontthrust washer and snap ring; refer toFig. 160 for assembly guide. Checkclearance between front thrust washer(25) and snap ring (24); if clearance is notwithin Umits of 0.0073-0.0143 inch, selectnew thrust washer (25) of thickness toprovide proper clearance. Thrust wash-ers are available in thicknesses of 0.091/0.093, 0.101/0.103, 0.111/0.113 and0.121/0.123 inch. Then, with counter-shaft and gears disassembled, proceedas foUows:

On splash lubricated transmissions,turn transmission housing up on end,clutch housing end down. Place counter-shaft gears, connectors, couplings andthrust washers in housing in properorder. On later models, third gear (35)face is recessed and a thrust washer isfitted. Insert countershaft down throughthe gears until tapered roUer bearingcone is seated in cup in transmissionhousing web. It may be necessary torotate countershaft back and forth toalign aU splines on components. Care-fuUy turn housing back upright andinstaU previously selected thrust washerand snap ring on front end of thecountershaft.

Fig. 165—View showing front end of trans-mission with mainshaft and main countar-

shaft bearing retainer ramoved.

66

SHOP MANUAL

To instaU countershaft assembly inpressure lubricated transmissions, placecountershaft gears, connectors, coup-Ungs and thrust washers in proper orderin transmission case. On later models,third gear (35) face is recessed and athrust washer is fitted. Insert counter-shaft in gears until taper roUer bearingon shaft is seated in bearing cup in trans-mission case web. Position countershaftso that key ways are on top and bottom ofshaft. With transmission case positionedso that top cover opening is up, install atransmission cover bolt in opposite sidesof the cover opening so that the bolts areaUgned as close as possible with the rearkeyways on countershaft and keywaysare accessible. InstaU a key, bevelededge up, in the rear upper keyway.Move the sliding connector partiaUyover the key and rotate the countershaftuntil the instaUed key is on the underside of the shaft. Using a wire ofsufficient length, pass the wire underthe instaUed key and tie ends of wire tobolts in top cover opening.

Wire should hold key on shaft asconnector is slid off key. InstaU key withbeveled edge up, in upper keyway beingcareful not to dislodge previouslyinstaUed key. Slide coupUng connectorover instaUed keys. Repeat procedure toinstall keys in forward keyways of shaft.InstaU previously selected thrust washerand snap ring on front end of counter-shaft.

Insert shift rail through rear face oftransmission whUe installing snap rings,brake pawl and shift forks. On Models8700, 9700, TW-10, TW-20 and TW-30,align detent baU and spring holes in shiftrail and shift forks. InstaU detent baUsand springs then rotate shift raU sotapped hole in forward end of shift rail isat three o'clock position. Be sure theshift forks engage the two slidingcouplings on countershaft and the shiftfork for 4th-8th gear sUding gear/coup-ling is properly positioned, as shown inFig. 153. With snap ring at rear end ofshaft seated against housing, move thepawl snap rings until they engage propergrooves in rail to hold pawl in position.

Complete remainder of reassembly asoutlined in paragraphs 189 through 195.Fill transmission with lubricant desig-nated in paragraph 197. Oil level plug isfound on cam cover on splash lubri-cated transmissions as shown in Fig.154. Pressure lubricated transmissionshave common sump with rear axle. Oillevel plug for 9000 models is just forwardof left rear axle housing. Oil leveldipstick for 8600, 8700, 9600, 9700,TW-10, TW-20 and TW-30 models is atupper left rear axle housing.

TRANSMiSSiONHANDBRAKE

An auxiliary transmission handbrakeis optional on Models 8700, 9700, TW-10,TW-20 and TW-30 and standard on allmodels equipped with front wheel drive.The transmission handbrake is a parkingbrake only and should not be used toslow or stop tractor movement.

R&R AND OVERHAUL

196. To remove unit on modelsequipped with front wheel drive, refer toparagraphs 60 and 61 and remove trans-mission housing then separate hand-brake and transfer box assemblies. Onmodels not equipped with front wheeldrive, transmission handbrake compo-nents may be serviced with unitmounted on transmission housing. Priorto disassembly, raise left side of tractorto divert transmission oil away fromtransmission handbrake housing.

To overhaul transmission handbrake,remove rear cover (19—Fig. 167) andbrake shaft (15). Heat idler shaftretaining screw (21) to loosen Loctitethen remove screw. Withdraw idler

Paragraph 196

shaft (7) while removing idler gear (4),bearings (1) and shim (2). On models soequipped, remove front cover (12). OnaU models remove brake components (8through 10).

Inspect brake housing oil seal (22)renew as necessary. Coat outer edge ofnew seal with Ford sealer ESA-M4G-129-A or equivalent. Inspect and renewthe following components as necessary:Brake discs (10), actuators (11) andbraking surfaces in housing and rearface of transfer box. RoUer bearings,brake shaft assembly (15) and idler (4)should be inspected and renewed asnecessary.

NOTE: Lubricate components in re-duction gear side of transmission hand-brake housing before assembiy. Do notiubricate handbrake components.

InstaU bearing outer races on idlergear (4) if removed. InstaU inner races.InstaU idler gear assembly into housingwithout shaft or shim (2). Measure gapbetween idler gear bearing and housing.InstaU shim (2) to reduce end play tozero. Shim (2) is available in thicknessesfrom 1.00 mm to 1.50 mm in incrementsof 0.05 mm. ReinstaU idler gear andshaft assembly. Apply a suitable lockingcompound to shaft retaining screw (21).

1918

17

12

Fig, 167—Exptoded view of transmission handbrake.

1. Idler gear bearing2. Shim3. Bearing cup4. Idler gear5. Bearing cup6. Housing assembly

7. Idler shaft8. Brake actuating disc

Unk9. Disc return spring

10. Disc11. Brake actuating link

12. Front cover13. Housing gasket14. Bearing cone15. Brake shaft16. Rear cover shims17. Bearing cone

18. Bearing cup19. Rear cover20. Brake actuating ball21. Shaft retainer screw22. Oil seal

67

SHOP MANUAL

To instaU countershaft assembly inpressure lubricated transmissions, placecountershaft gears, connectors, coup-Ungs and thrust washers in proper orderin transmission case. On later models,third gear (35) face is recessed and athrust washer is fitted. Insert counter-shaft in gears until taper roUer bearingon shaft is seated in bearing cup in trans-mission case web. Position countershaftso that key ways are on top and bottom ofshaft. With transmission case positionedso that top cover opening is up, install atransmission cover bolt in opposite sidesof the cover opening so that the bolts areaUgned as close as possible with the rearkeyways on countershaft and keywaysare accessible. InstaU a key, bevelededge up, in the rear upper keyway.Move the sliding connector partiaUyover the key and rotate the countershaftuntil the instaUed key is on the underside of the shaft. Using a wire ofsufficient length, pass the wire underthe instaUed key and tie ends of wire tobolts in top cover opening.

Wire should hold key on shaft asconnector is slid off key. InstaU key withbeveled edge up, in upper keyway beingcareful not to dislodge previouslyinstaUed key. Slide coupUng connectorover instaUed keys. Repeat procedure toinstall keys in forward keyways of shaft.InstaU previously selected thrust washerand snap ring on front end of counter-shaft.

Insert shift rail through rear face oftransmission whUe installing snap rings,brake pawl and shift forks. On Models8700, 9700, TW-10, TW-20 and TW-30,align detent baU and spring holes in shiftrail and shift forks. InstaU detent baUsand springs then rotate shift raU sotapped hole in forward end of shift rail isat three o'clock position. Be sure theshift forks engage the two slidingcouplings on countershaft and the shiftfork for 4th-8th gear sUding gear/coup-ling is properly positioned, as shown inFig. 153. With snap ring at rear end ofshaft seated against housing, move thepawl snap rings until they engage propergrooves in rail to hold pawl in position.

Complete remainder of reassembly asoutlined in paragraphs 189 through 195.Fill transmission with lubricant desig-nated in paragraph 197. Oil level plug isfound on cam cover on splash lubri-cated transmissions as shown in Fig.154. Pressure lubricated transmissionshave common sump with rear axle. Oillevel plug for 9000 models is just forwardof left rear axle housing. Oil leveldipstick for 8600, 8700, 9600, 9700,TW-10, TW-20 and TW-30 models is atupper left rear axle housing.

TRANSMiSSiONHANDBRAKE

An auxiliary transmission handbrakeis optional on Models 8700, 9700, TW-10,TW-20 and TW-30 and standard on allmodels equipped with front wheel drive.The transmission handbrake is a parkingbrake only and should not be used toslow or stop tractor movement.

R&R AND OVERHAUL

196. To remove unit on modelsequipped with front wheel drive, refer toparagraphs 60 and 61 and remove trans-mission housing then separate hand-brake and transfer box assemblies. Onmodels not equipped with front wheeldrive, transmission handbrake compo-nents may be serviced with unitmounted on transmission housing. Priorto disassembly, raise left side of tractorto divert transmission oil away fromtransmission handbrake housing.

To overhaul transmission handbrake,remove rear cover (19—Fig. 167) andbrake shaft (15). Heat idler shaftretaining screw (21) to loosen Loctitethen remove screw. Withdraw idler

Paragraph 196

shaft (7) while removing idler gear (4),bearings (1) and shim (2). On models soequipped, remove front cover (12). OnaU models remove brake components (8through 10).

Inspect brake housing oil seal (22)renew as necessary. Coat outer edge ofnew seal with Ford sealer ESA-M4G-129-A or equivalent. Inspect and renewthe following components as necessary:Brake discs (10), actuators (11) andbraking surfaces in housing and rearface of transfer box. RoUer bearings,brake shaft assembly (15) and idler (4)should be inspected and renewed asnecessary.

NOTE: Lubricate components in re-duction gear side of transmission hand-brake housing before assembiy. Do notiubricate handbrake components.

InstaU bearing outer races on idlergear (4) if removed. InstaU inner races.InstaU idler gear assembly into housingwithout shaft or shim (2). Measure gapbetween idler gear bearing and housing.InstaU shim (2) to reduce end play tozero. Shim (2) is available in thicknessesfrom 1.00 mm to 1.50 mm in incrementsof 0.05 mm. ReinstaU idler gear andshaft assembly. Apply a suitable lockingcompound to shaft retaining screw (21).

1918

17

12

Fig, 167—Exptoded view of transmission handbrake.

1. Idler gear bearing2. Shim3. Bearing cup4. Idler gear5. Bearing cup6. Housing assembly

7. Idler shaft8. Brake actuating disc

Unk9. Disc return spring

10. Disc11. Brake actuating link

12. Front cover13. Housing gasket14. Bearing cone15. Brake shaft16. Rear cover shims17. Bearing cone

18. Bearing cup19. Rear cover20. Brake actuating ball21. Shaft retainer screw22. Oil seal

67

Paragraphs 197-200

Install oil seal (22) and bearing outerrace in housing. Press front and rearbearing inner races on brake shaft (15).Wrap tape around spUnes to avoiddamaging oil seal then instaU brake shaftassembly.

Install rear cover (19) without shims(16) located between cover flange andhousing. Rotate cover and apply pres-sure to seat bearing. Measure gapbetween cover and housing at threeplaces around circumference. Note aver-age measurement and select propershim(s) for installation. Refer to follow-ing chart to determine thickness andquantity of shims (16). Be sure tomeasure shim pack to verify actualthickness equals desired thickness.

MEASURINGGAP SHIMS[Inch] [Inch]

0.007 0.009 0.0120.009-0.011 10.012-0.013 1 10.014-0.015 20.016 1 ... 10.017-0.018 1 10.019-0.021 20.022-0.023 30.024-0.025 2 20.026 1 ... 20.027-0.029 1 20.030-0.031 30.032 2 ... 20.033 3 10.034 1 1 20.035 3 1 10.036 2 20.037 1 ... 30.038 3 ... 20.039 1 30.040 3 30.041 4 1

InstaU shims (16) and rear cover (19)so dipstick elbow tube on cover is atbottom then tighten cover retainingscrews to 32 ft.-lbs. InstaU remainder ofbrake assembly by reversing disassem-bly procedure. Refer to paragraph 176and refiU transmission oU as required.

If tractor is equipped with front wheeldrive and brake shaft (15), housing (6),cover (19) or shaft bearings wererenewed, then refer to paragraph 63 toadjust end play between brake andtransfer box shafts.

DiFFERENTiALAND BEVEL GEARS

NOTE: Aithough outward appearanceis similar, components may vary in sizebetween modeis due to differences inpower output. Service procedures are thesame except as caiied out in text.

LUBRICATION

197. Early model 8000 tractors areequipped with separate transmissionand rear axle lubricating oil sumps. Rearaxle lubricating oil capacity for thesemodels is 40 quarts. AU other models areequipped with pressure lubricated trans-missions having a common sump withthe rear axle housing. Rear axle oHcapacity for these models equipped withDual Power, except TW-10, TW-20 andTW-30, is 69 quarts; without DualPower capacity is 64 quarts. TW-10 andTW-20 models equipped with DualPower require 79 quarts; models with-out Dual Power require 73 qujuts.TW-30 models require 92 quarts.Recommended rear axle lubricant isFord specification No. ESN-M2C53-A.

DIFFERENTIAL LOCK

198. The differential lock consists of ahydraulically actuated multiple discbrake located in differential housing.When applied, the brake locks rightdifferential side gear to differentialhousing, causing both rear wheels to bedriven at the same speed, regardless oftraction. The fluid pressure for operat-ing the brake is taken from pto hydrauliccircuit; refer to paragraphs 212 and 213for troubleshooting information on thedifferential lock hydrauUc circuit. Serv-ice of the differential lock brakecomponents is covered by procedure forservicing the differential; refer toparagraph 199. Refer to paragraph 240for servicing differential lock valve andto 287,238 or 238A for pump.

DIFFERENTIAL AND BEVELRiNGGEAR

199. REMOVE AND REINSTALL.To remove the differential and bevelring gear assembly, first remove thehydraulic lift cover as outlined in para-graph 245, the pto drive shaft and gears

Fig. 169—Using feeier gage to determineproper shim pack thickness required for ad-justment of differential carrier bearings; refer

to text.

FORD

as in paragraph 217 and both rear axlehousing assembUes as in paragraph 204,then proceed as follows:

Disconnect differential lock hydraulicline from top of right differential bear-ing support (27—Fig. 170). Place a ropesling around differential housing, attachhoist to sling and take weight of differ-ential assembly on hoist. Unbolt andremove the differential bearing sup-ports, taking care not to damage shims(2 and 26) and to keep the shims fromunder each support separate and identi-fied for reassembly. Lift differentialassembly from rear axle center housing.

To reinstaU lower differential into rearaxle center housing, then reinstallbearing supports with same shims asremoved. Tighten support retaining capscrews to a torque of 50-60 ft.-lbs. andreconnect differential lock hydrauUc Uneto right bearing support. ReinstaU ptodrive shaft as outlined in paragraph 217,the hydraulic lift cover as in paragraph245 and the rear axle assembUes as inparagraph 204.

NOTE: if differentiai housing, carrierbearings, bearing supports, rear axlecenter housing or the bevei ring gear andpinion set have been renewed, it wiii benecessary to check and adjust carrierbearing preload and bevei gear backiashas in paragraph 200.

200. ADJUST CARRIER BEARINGPEE LOAD AND BEVEL GEARBACKLASH. Carrier bearing pre-load isadjusted by varying shim thickness be-tween bearing supports and rear axlecenter housing. Main bevel gear back-lash is adjusted by transferring shimsfrom under one bearing support to underopposite support. While some backlashmust be maintained whUe adjustingbearing preload, backlash should berechecked or adjusted after adjustingbearing preload as foUows:

Support differential assembly in rearaxle center housing with rope sUng andhoist. InstaU left bearing support withsame shims removed on disassembly andtighten retaining cap screws to a torqueof 50-60 ft.-lbs. InstaU right bearingsupport without shims and tighten capscrews only enough to remove end playof differential in carrier bearing, but donot preload the bearings. Measure gapat several points between right bearingsupport flange and rear axle centerhousing using feeler gage as shown inFig. 169. Loosen and tighten oppositecap screws until measurement is equal ataU points. Check to be sure some back-lash exists between bevel pinion andring gear; decrease shim thicknessunder left bearing support if no backlashis noted, then retighten right bearingsupport cap screws to just remove endplay of differential and obtain measure-ment between bearing support flange

68

Paragraphs 197-200

Install oil seal (22) and bearing outerrace in housing. Press front and rearbearing inner races on brake shaft (15).Wrap tape around spUnes to avoiddamaging oil seal then instaU brake shaftassembly.

Install rear cover (19) without shims(16) located between cover flange andhousing. Rotate cover and apply pres-sure to seat bearing. Measure gapbetween cover and housing at threeplaces around circumference. Note aver-age measurement and select propershim(s) for installation. Refer to follow-ing chart to determine thickness andquantity of shims (16). Be sure tomeasure shim pack to verify actualthickness equals desired thickness.

MEASURINGGAP SHIMS[Inch] [Inch]

0.007 0.009 0.0120.009-0.011 10.012-0.013 1 10.014-0.015 20.016 1 ... 10.017-0.018 1 10.019-0.021 20.022-0.023 30.024-0.025 2 20.026 1 ... 20.027-0.029 1 20.030-0.031 30.032 2 ... 20.033 3 10.034 1 1 20.035 3 1 10.036 2 20.037 1 ... 30.038 3 ... 20.039 1 30.040 3 30.041 4 1

InstaU shims (16) and rear cover (19)so dipstick elbow tube on cover is atbottom then tighten cover retainingscrews to 32 ft.-lbs. InstaU remainder ofbrake assembly by reversing disassem-bly procedure. Refer to paragraph 176and refiU transmission oU as required.

If tractor is equipped with front wheeldrive and brake shaft (15), housing (6),cover (19) or shaft bearings wererenewed, then refer to paragraph 63 toadjust end play between brake andtransfer box shafts.

DiFFERENTiALAND BEVEL GEARS

NOTE: Aithough outward appearanceis similar, components may vary in sizebetween modeis due to differences inpower output. Service procedures are thesame except as caiied out in text.

LUBRICATION

197. Early model 8000 tractors areequipped with separate transmissionand rear axle lubricating oil sumps. Rearaxle lubricating oil capacity for thesemodels is 40 quarts. AU other models areequipped with pressure lubricated trans-missions having a common sump withthe rear axle housing. Rear axle oHcapacity for these models equipped withDual Power, except TW-10, TW-20 andTW-30, is 69 quarts; without DualPower capacity is 64 quarts. TW-10 andTW-20 models equipped with DualPower require 79 quarts; models with-out Dual Power require 73 qujuts.TW-30 models require 92 quarts.Recommended rear axle lubricant isFord specification No. ESN-M2C53-A.

DIFFERENTIAL LOCK

198. The differential lock consists of ahydraulically actuated multiple discbrake located in differential housing.When applied, the brake locks rightdifferential side gear to differentialhousing, causing both rear wheels to bedriven at the same speed, regardless oftraction. The fluid pressure for operat-ing the brake is taken from pto hydrauliccircuit; refer to paragraphs 212 and 213for troubleshooting information on thedifferential lock hydrauUc circuit. Serv-ice of the differential lock brakecomponents is covered by procedure forservicing the differential; refer toparagraph 199. Refer to paragraph 240for servicing differential lock valve andto 287,238 or 238A for pump.

DIFFERENTIAL AND BEVELRiNGGEAR

199. REMOVE AND REINSTALL.To remove the differential and bevelring gear assembly, first remove thehydraulic lift cover as outlined in para-graph 245, the pto drive shaft and gears

Fig. 169—Using feeier gage to determineproper shim pack thickness required for ad-justment of differential carrier bearings; refer

to text.

FORD

as in paragraph 217 and both rear axlehousing assembUes as in paragraph 204,then proceed as follows:

Disconnect differential lock hydraulicline from top of right differential bear-ing support (27—Fig. 170). Place a ropesling around differential housing, attachhoist to sling and take weight of differ-ential assembly on hoist. Unbolt andremove the differential bearing sup-ports, taking care not to damage shims(2 and 26) and to keep the shims fromunder each support separate and identi-fied for reassembly. Lift differentialassembly from rear axle center housing.

To reinstaU lower differential into rearaxle center housing, then reinstallbearing supports with same shims asremoved. Tighten support retaining capscrews to a torque of 50-60 ft.-lbs. andreconnect differential lock hydrauUc Uneto right bearing support. ReinstaU ptodrive shaft as outlined in paragraph 217,the hydraulic lift cover as in paragraph245 and the rear axle assembUes as inparagraph 204.

NOTE: if differentiai housing, carrierbearings, bearing supports, rear axlecenter housing or the bevei ring gear andpinion set have been renewed, it wiii benecessary to check and adjust carrierbearing preload and bevei gear backiashas in paragraph 200.

200. ADJUST CARRIER BEARINGPEE LOAD AND BEVEL GEARBACKLASH. Carrier bearing pre-load isadjusted by varying shim thickness be-tween bearing supports and rear axlecenter housing. Main bevel gear back-lash is adjusted by transferring shimsfrom under one bearing support to underopposite support. While some backlashmust be maintained whUe adjustingbearing preload, backlash should berechecked or adjusted after adjustingbearing preload as foUows:

Support differential assembly in rearaxle center housing with rope sUng andhoist. InstaU left bearing support withsame shims removed on disassembly andtighten retaining cap screws to a torqueof 50-60 ft.-lbs. InstaU right bearingsupport without shims and tighten capscrews only enough to remove end playof differential in carrier bearing, but donot preload the bearings. Measure gapat several points between right bearingsupport flange and rear axle centerhousing using feeler gage as shown inFig. 169. Loosen and tighten oppositecap screws until measurement is equal ataU points. Check to be sure some back-lash exists between bevel pinion andring gear; decrease shim thicknessunder left bearing support if no backlashis noted, then retighten right bearingsupport cap screws to just remove endplay of differential and obtain measure-ment between bearing support flange

68

SHOP MANUAL Paragraphs 201-202

and center housing. Remove rightbearing support, then reinstaU supportwith shim pack of total thickness0.001-0.006 inch less than measured gap.Tighten retaining cap screws to a torqueof 50-60 ft.-lbs.

NOTE: Measure shim thickness withmicrometer; thickness of individuaishims may vary up to 0.004 inch. Shimsare avaiiabie In thicknesses of 0.002/0.006, 0.006/0.010, 0.010/0.014 and0.018/0.022 inch.

With carrier bearing preload properlyadjusted, measure backlash of bevel ringgear to bevel pinion with dial indicator.Make backlash measurement at severalpoints around ring gear to be surebacklash is within limits at aU points.

NOTE: Diai Indicator plunger shouldbe against outer ends of ring gear teethand at right angie to radius of ring gear.

Backlash should be within limits of0.010-0.020 inch; transfer shims fromunder left bearing support flange tounder right bearing support flange ifbacklash is less than 0.010 inch; or fromunder right support to under leftsupport if backlash is more than 0.020inch. Tighten bearing retaining capscrews to a torque of 50-60 ft.-lbs. beforerechecking backlash.

201. OVERHAUL DIFFERENTL4LOR RENEW BEVEL RING GEAR.With differential assembly removed asoutlined in paragraph 199, remove thecap screws retaining cover (22—Fig.170) to differential case (6) and ring gear(4). Separate cover from case andremove the differential lock discs (16 and17), thrust washer (15) and differ-ential side gear (14).

To renew ring gear, support outeredges of gear in bed of press and pressdifferential case out of the gear. ToinstaU new gear, support gear on woodblocks (Fig. 171) and insert differentialcase in gear with bolt holes in case andgear aligned. Thread aU retaining capscrews through case into gear as shown,then press case downward into gear.Remove assembly from press andremove the cap screws.

NOTE: When instaiiing new ring gear,refer to paragraph 202 and instail matingbevei pinion.

To remove differential pinions and leftside gear, drive the roU pin (13—Fig.170) out of case and pinion shaft (12).Remove the pinion shaft, pinions (10),pinion thrust washers (11), side gear (9)and the thrust washer (8). Bushings (7and 21) in case and cover may berenewed if excessively worn or scored.Bushings are pre-sized and should notrequire reaming if carefuUy instaUed.

Inspect the differential lock fluidsealing rings (23) on hub of cover (22)and renew if worn or broken. To removedifferential lock piston (18) from cover,apply air pressure to hole betweensealing ring grooves in hub of cover.Renew the piston seal "0" rings (19 and20) and inspect cover and piston for anydamage. Lubricate piston, rings andbore in cover before instalUng piston.Check differential lock friction discs (16and 17) for warpage or excessive wearand inspect friction surface of differ-ential case; renew case and/or discs if

necessary.To reassemble, lubricate aU parts and

reverse disassembly procedure. Refer toFig. 170 for installation of differentiallock discs; insert disc (16) with internalsplines first. Tighten cover retaining capscrews to a torque of 160-200 ft.-lbs.Renew carrier bearing cones and cups ifexcessively worn or scored.

MAIN DRIVE BEVEL PINION

202. REMOVE AND REINSTALL.To remove main drive bevel pinion.

21 2223 ^ 2?

1819 20

4 5 6 10 11Fig. 170—Expioded view of differentiat showing tock components and carrier bearings. Capscrews (30) retain cover {22) to differentiat case (6) and aiso retain main drive bevel ring gear (4) todifferentiat case; refer to Fig. 171 for installation of ring gear. Ftuid for operation of differentiaiiock piston {18) enters right carrier bearing support through fitting (28) and is transmitted tocover (22) through bore in hub of cover. Seating rings (23) fitted in grooves in cover hub are

tocated at each stde of ott passage in bearing support {27) and hub.

1. Left carrier bearingsupport

2. Shims3. Bearing cup4. Bevel ring gear5. Bearing cone6. Differential case7. Bushing8. Thrust washer

9. Left differential sidegear

10. Differential pinions(2)

11. Thrust washers (2)12. Pinion shaft13. RoUpin14. Right side gear &

disc hub15. Thrust washer

16. Differentiallockdiscs

17. Differentiallockplates

18. Differentiallockpiston

19. Inner "0" ring20. Outer "0" ring21. Bushing22. Cover plate

23. Sealing rings24. Bearing cone25. Bearing cup26. Shims27. Right carrier

bearing support28. Fitting29. Support cap screws30. Cover & case to

ring gear cap screws

Fig, 171—instatting bavetrtng gear to differantiaicase. Gear is atigned by in-staiiing aii retaining capscrews, then case is

pressed into gear.

69

Paragraph 203 FORD

rFig. 172—Remove ptodutch hub for access topto hydraulic line. Removelocating pin {cap scraw) toremove pto clutch and

vaive aaaambly.

remove differential as outlined inparagraph 199.

Straighten tabs on washer (3-Fig.173) and remove the pinion bearingadjusting nuts (2 and 4). Using a softdrift pin, drive pinion rearward untilfree of front bearing cone (5), thenremove pinion with rear bearing cone

1112

Fig. 173—Explodad viaw of bavai pinionassembly. Pinion bearing cups {6 and 10) arasupported in sleeves (7 and 8) which fit inbores of rear axia center housing. Bearings ara

adjustad by nuts {2 and 4); rafar to text.

1. Drive coupling2. Adjusting nut3. Locking washer4. Adjustmgnut5. Bearing cone6. Bearing cup

7. Bearing sleeve8. Bearing sleeve9. Shims

10. Bearing cup11. Bearing cone12. Bevel pinion

ADD (OR SUBTRACTITHIS TMtCKNESS

Fig. 174—Normai shim {9—Fig. 173) thick-nass for pinion mesh adjustmant is 0.041inch, if other than this thickness is required,it is indicatad by stamping on raar axia can-tar housing in location ahown. Rafar to taxt.

(11) from center housing.Inspect bearing cups (6 and 10) and

renew cups if excessively worn orscored. Note that cups are mounted inremovable sleeves (7 and 8). Pinion meshposition is controlled by shim spacers (9)between rear sleeve (8) and bearing cup(10); take care not to lose or damage thespacers when removing rear cup. If anew rear axle center housing is beinginstalled, or if spacers are lost ordamaged, refer to paragraph 203 forselection of new spacers.

To reinstaU bevel pinion, or instaUnew pinion and/or bearings, proceed asfoUows: InstaU rear bearing cup andsleeve in housing with same spacers aswere removed. Install front bearing cupand sleeve and instaU rear bearing coneon pinion. Insert pinion and rear bearingcone assembly through rear bearing cupand hold in position with hydraulic jackand two wood blocks as shown in Fig.175. Then, using a suitable sleeve, drive

front bearing cone onto pinion untilseated in front bearing cup. InstaU rearadjusting nut (4—Fig. 173) and tightento obtain proper bearing preload whenchecked as follows: Wrap a cord aroundpinion shaft between the front and rearbearings. Attach puU scale to cord andturn pinion steadily with cord and puUscale; bearing adjustment is correctwhen a steady puU of 10 to 20 pounds isrequired.

NOTE: If puii required is greater than20 pounds, it may be necessary to bumpfront end of pinion shaft after looseningthe adjusting nut, then re-tighten nut asrequired.

With bearings properly adjusted,instaU locking washer (3) and frontadjusting nut (2); tighten front nutsecurely and recheck bearing adjust-ment. If adjustment remains withinspecification, bend tabs of washer intonotches of adjusting nuts and instaUdrive coupling (1) on pinion shaft.

To reassemble tractor, reverse disas-sembly procedure. Do not instaU ptoclutch locating pin until splines oftransmission pto shaft and splines of ptoclutch are aligned. This will preventpossible shearing of locating pin ifspUnes do not match. Tighten V2-inchhousing cap screws to 50-65 ft.-lbs. and5/8 inch cap screws to 95-130 ft.-lbs.Tighten pto clutch locating pin to 70-95ft.-lbs.

203. PINION MESH POSITION.Mesh position of the main drive bevelpinion is controUed by shim spacers(9—Fig. 173) located between pinionrear bearing cup (10) and shoulder insidebearing sleeve (8). Thickness of spacers

Fig, 175—Hotd bevei pin-ion with hydrauUc jack andwood blocks as shownwhan installing front baar-ing cona {5—Fig. 173);

rafar to Fig, 176,

70

SHOP MANUAL Paragraphs 204-205

required is determined by measurementof rear axle center housing and piniongear shoulder at factory. NormaUy,required spacer thickness if 0.041 inch; ifrequired thickness is different than0.041 inch, difference is stamped on rearaxle center housing in location shown inFig. 174. In the example shown,required spacer thickness is 0.041+,0.012, or 0.053 inch. If a negative sign (-)appears in front of number, subtract thevalue from 0.041 inch.

NOTE: Number in parenthesis marks(.304 inch) beiow "0.12" marking shownin Fig. 174 is metric (mm) equivaient of0.012 inch; disregard number in paren-thesis when working with decimalinches. Rear axie center housingsrequiring spacer thickness of 0.041 inchare not marked.

Look at the front of pinion gear justbehind splines. If no mark appears ongear, no further spacer adjustment isrequire. If pinion gear is marked with afigure, such as +0.007 or MD+0.007, that thickness of spacer is to beremoved from between bearing cup andgear shoulder. If number on gear is-0.007 inch, that thickness of spacer is tobe added to basic (0.041 inch) spacerpack between bearing cup and gear.

Spacers are available in thickness of0.018/0.022, 0.022/0.026, 0.026/0.030,0.030/0.034 and 0.033/0.037 inch.

NOTE: As thickness of individuaispacer may vary up to 0.004 Inch, It wiiibe necessary to seiect spacers bymeasuring thickness with micrometer.

In the preceding example, total spacerthickness required was 0.053 inch; thiswould require a combination such as one0.033 inch thick spacer and one 0.020inch thick spacer or any other combina-tion of two spacers that would providetotal thickness of 0.053 inch.

FiNAL DRIVEAND REAR AXLESNOTE: Although outward appearance

is simiiar, components may vary in sizebetween models due to difference inpower output. Service procedures are thesame except as caiied out in text.

204. R&R REAR AXLE AND FINALDRIVE ASSEMBLY. If removing bothassembUes, provide adequate braces forfront end of tricycle model, or drivewood wedges between front axle andfront support on wide front axle models.Drain lubricant. On Models 8700, 9700,TW-10, TW-20 and TW-30 support rearof platform or cab. Support tractorunder rear axle center housing andremove the wheel, hub and tireassembUes from axle shafts. Attachhoist at a point which wiU balance rearaxle housing, then unbolt axle housingfrom center housing. Move housingoutward untO clear of dowel pins and theinner axle shaft (planetary drive sungear). Take care not to aUow brake discsor inner axle shaft to faU out as the axle,housing and final drive assembly isremoved.

To reinstaU, proceed as foUows: Insertinner axle shaft into the differen-tial side gear. Remove brake disc guidepins (17—Fig. 177) from rear axlehousing and insert them in holes in rearaxle center housing. Place the brake

discs on the inner axle shaft and guidepins as shown. Place new gasket on thedowel pins, then lift axle housingassembly into place with hoist, aUgnholes in axle housing with brake discguide pins and align teeth on planetarygears with sun gear teeth on inner axleshaft. InstaU the axle housing retainingcap screws and tighten to a torque of100-120 ft.-lbs. RefiU rear axle centerhousing with proper lubricant; refer toparagraph 197.

205. REAR AXLE SHAFT ANDBEARINGS. With the rear axle and finaldrive assembly removed as outlined inparagraph 204, remove axle shaft asfoUows:

DriU a hole in the flat outer face of axleshaft oil seal (25—Fig. 177) and pry sealout of housing; take care not to damagenew seal surface of shaft or seal bore inhousing. Remove the lock plate (6) fromrear axle cap screw (7), then remove thecap screw, retaining washer (5), shims(4) and planetary carrier (3) with gears.Bump axle shaft out towards outer endof housing and remove bearing cone (32)from inside housing. Remove bearingcups (28 and 31) from housing and outerbearing cone (27) from axle shaft.Inspect oil seal contact ring (26) andinstaU new ring if seal contact surface isscored or rough.

To reassemble, press new oU seal ringtightly against shoulder on axle shaft,then press outer bearing cone tightly

12 13 14

32Fig. 177—Exptodad viaw of finat driva and raar axta assembly. Hydrauttc braka piston (13) isfittad in side of rear axte center housing. Three pins (17) ara fittad in mating hoias in axiahousing {29) and rear axta center housing and hoid the pianetary ring gaar {8), braka outar disc{9) and brake inner disc {11) stationary. Pianetary sun gear teeth ara machinad on outar and ofinnar shaft (12). Ptanatary gear carriar {3) is spiinad to innar and of wheei axia shaft {24). TW-30

modats ara aquippad with four pianatary gears and two braka innar discs {11) and two brakafriction discs {10) par sida.

Fig. 176—With pinion supported as shown inFig, 175, instaii front bearing cone with

proper sized sieeve driver as shown.

1. Locking wire2. Retaining ring3. Planetary carrier4. Shims5. Retainer6. Cap screw lock7. Axle cap screw8. Planetary rin^ gear9. Brake outer disc

10. Brake friction disc11. Brake inner disc12. Axle inner shaft

(planetary sun gear)13. Brake piston14. Sealing ring, large15. Sealing ring, small16. Brake piston springs

17. Steel pins18. Thrust washers19. Planet gears20. Needle rollers21. Spacers22. Planet gear shafts23. Wheel hub snap ring24. Axle shaft

25. OUseal26. Oil seal ring27. Bearing cone28. Bearing cup29. Axle housing30. Gasket31. Bearing cup32. Bearing cone

71

SHOP MANUAL Paragraphs 204-205

required is determined by measurementof rear axle center housing and piniongear shoulder at factory. NormaUy,required spacer thickness if 0.041 inch; ifrequired thickness is different than0.041 inch, difference is stamped on rearaxle center housing in location shown inFig. 174. In the example shown,required spacer thickness is 0.041+,0.012, or 0.053 inch. If a negative sign (-)appears in front of number, subtract thevalue from 0.041 inch.

NOTE: Number in parenthesis marks(.304 inch) beiow "0.12" marking shownin Fig. 174 is metric (mm) equivaient of0.012 inch; disregard number in paren-thesis when working with decimalinches. Rear axie center housingsrequiring spacer thickness of 0.041 inchare not marked.

Look at the front of pinion gear justbehind splines. If no mark appears ongear, no further spacer adjustment isrequire. If pinion gear is marked with afigure, such as +0.007 or MD+0.007, that thickness of spacer is to beremoved from between bearing cup andgear shoulder. If number on gear is-0.007 inch, that thickness of spacer is tobe added to basic (0.041 inch) spacerpack between bearing cup and gear.

Spacers are available in thickness of0.018/0.022, 0.022/0.026, 0.026/0.030,0.030/0.034 and 0.033/0.037 inch.

NOTE: As thickness of individuaispacer may vary up to 0.004 Inch, It wiiibe necessary to seiect spacers bymeasuring thickness with micrometer.

In the preceding example, total spacerthickness required was 0.053 inch; thiswould require a combination such as one0.033 inch thick spacer and one 0.020inch thick spacer or any other combina-tion of two spacers that would providetotal thickness of 0.053 inch.

FiNAL DRIVEAND REAR AXLESNOTE: Although outward appearance

is simiiar, components may vary in sizebetween models due to difference inpower output. Service procedures are thesame except as caiied out in text.

204. R&R REAR AXLE AND FINALDRIVE ASSEMBLY. If removing bothassembUes, provide adequate braces forfront end of tricycle model, or drivewood wedges between front axle andfront support on wide front axle models.Drain lubricant. On Models 8700, 9700,TW-10, TW-20 and TW-30 support rearof platform or cab. Support tractorunder rear axle center housing andremove the wheel, hub and tireassembUes from axle shafts. Attachhoist at a point which wiU balance rearaxle housing, then unbolt axle housingfrom center housing. Move housingoutward untO clear of dowel pins and theinner axle shaft (planetary drive sungear). Take care not to aUow brake discsor inner axle shaft to faU out as the axle,housing and final drive assembly isremoved.

To reinstaU, proceed as foUows: Insertinner axle shaft into the differen-tial side gear. Remove brake disc guidepins (17—Fig. 177) from rear axlehousing and insert them in holes in rearaxle center housing. Place the brake

discs on the inner axle shaft and guidepins as shown. Place new gasket on thedowel pins, then lift axle housingassembly into place with hoist, aUgnholes in axle housing with brake discguide pins and align teeth on planetarygears with sun gear teeth on inner axleshaft. InstaU the axle housing retainingcap screws and tighten to a torque of100-120 ft.-lbs. RefiU rear axle centerhousing with proper lubricant; refer toparagraph 197.

205. REAR AXLE SHAFT ANDBEARINGS. With the rear axle and finaldrive assembly removed as outlined inparagraph 204, remove axle shaft asfoUows:

DriU a hole in the flat outer face of axleshaft oil seal (25—Fig. 177) and pry sealout of housing; take care not to damagenew seal surface of shaft or seal bore inhousing. Remove the lock plate (6) fromrear axle cap screw (7), then remove thecap screw, retaining washer (5), shims(4) and planetary carrier (3) with gears.Bump axle shaft out towards outer endof housing and remove bearing cone (32)from inside housing. Remove bearingcups (28 and 31) from housing and outerbearing cone (27) from axle shaft.Inspect oil seal contact ring (26) andinstaU new ring if seal contact surface isscored or rough.

To reassemble, press new oU seal ringtightly against shoulder on axle shaft,then press outer bearing cone tightly

12 13 14

32Fig. 177—Exptodad viaw of finat driva and raar axta assembly. Hydrauttc braka piston (13) isfittad in side of rear axte center housing. Three pins (17) ara fittad in mating hoias in axiahousing {29) and rear axta center housing and hoid the pianetary ring gaar {8), braka outar disc{9) and brake inner disc {11) stationary. Pianetary sun gear teeth ara machinad on outar and ofinnar shaft (12). Ptanatary gear carriar {3) is spiinad to innar and of wheei axia shaft {24). TW-30

modats ara aquippad with four pianatary gears and two braka innar discs {11) and two brakafriction discs {10) par sida.

Fig. 176—With pinion supported as shown inFig, 175, instaii front bearing cone with

proper sized sieeve driver as shown.

1. Locking wire2. Retaining ring3. Planetary carrier4. Shims5. Retainer6. Cap screw lock7. Axle cap screw8. Planetary rin^ gear9. Brake outer disc

10. Brake friction disc11. Brake inner disc12. Axle inner shaft

(planetary sun gear)13. Brake piston14. Sealing ring, large15. Sealing ring, small16. Brake piston springs

17. Steel pins18. Thrust washers19. Planet gears20. Needle rollers21. Spacers22. Planet gear shafts23. Wheel hub snap ring24. Axle shaft

25. OUseal26. Oil seal ring27. Bearing cone28. Bearing cup29. Axle housing30. Gasket31. Bearing cup32. Bearing cone

71

Paragraphs 206-209 FORD

against seal ring. InstaU inner and outerbearing cups in axle housing, then insertaxle shaft and install inner bearing cone.Install planetary carrier and gearassembly, then install axle retaining capscrew and washer with thickest shimavailable. Tighten retaining cap screw toa torque of 396-484 ft.-lbs. and measureend play of axle shaft with dial indicator.Remove cap screw, retainer and shim,measure shim with micrometer andsubtract measured end play from shimthickness. Select a spacer shim of thick-ness nearest to result obtained by sub-tracting end play from shim thickness,then install selected shim, retainer andcap screw. Tighten cap screw to a torqueof 396-484 ft.-lbs. and instaU cap screwlock.

206. OVERHAUL PLANETARYDRIVE. With the axle and final driveassembly removed as outlined in para-graph 204 and the planetary carrier andgear assembly removed as in paragraph205, proceed as follows:

Cut the locking wire (1—Fig. 177)(refer also to Fig. 178), then puU wirefrom under planet gear shaft retainingsnap ring (2—Fig. 177). The snap ringcan then be disengaged from the planetgear shafts by pulUng ends of ringtogether which will aUow the shafts to bedriven out snap ring side of carrier.There are 54 loose needle rollers (20),two thrust washers (18) and a spacer (21)in each planet gear. Remove snap ringfrom carrier. •

Carefully clean and inspect all partsand renew any that are excessivelyworn, scored or otherwise not suitablefor service. Needle rollers are availablein sets of 54 roUers only and should berenewed only as a complete set for eachplanet gear and shaft.

To reassemble, stick the spacer andthe two rows of 27 roUers each in theplanet gear using thin layer of heavygrease. Position planet gear in carrierand insert gear shaft from snap ring sideof carrier. Push the shafts in flush withbore, then instaU snap ring, compressthe snap ring and align notches in shaftswith ring. Push a new locking wireunder the ring and secure wire bywrapping ends around snap ring projec-tions as shown in Fig. 178.

Inspect ring gear (8—Fig. 177) andsun gear teeth on inner axle shaft (12)and renew if teeth are chipped orexcessively worn. Insert the pins (17) inaxle housing to align ring gear wheninstalling gear in housing. If a new ringgear is installed, it may have anidentification groove, which should beinstalled toward center housing.

BRAKESAll Models Except TW-30

207. ADJUSTMENT. The rod con-necting trunnion in brake pedal tomaster cylinder piston must be adjustedin length to provide a pedal free travel of1/8-inch on 8700, 9700, TW-10 andTW-20 models or 3/16 to V4-inch on8000, 9000, 8600 and 9600 modelsmeasured at pedal stop pad as shown inFig. 180. To adjust rod length, loosenjam nut (Fig. 180) and turn rod in or outof trunnion to obtain correct free travel,then tighten jam nut. Right side hoodpanel must be removed on Models 8000,8600,9000 and 9600 for access to Unkage.

NOTE: if pedai is spongy, bieed thebraices as outiined in paragraph 208 priorto adjusting, insufficient free travel wiiicause braises to drag.

208. FLUID AND BLEEDING. Onsome early Model 8000 and 9000 trac-tors, lubricant from rear axle centerhousing is utilized as brake hydraulicfluid. On these models, a line connectsbrake reservoir to hydraulic lift sumpreturn line which supplies master

ADJUSTMENT ROD

cylinder with fluid. A second line returnsexcess fluid to the rear axle centerhousing. Whenever servicing brakemaster cylinder, or if cylinder has beendrained, refill with proper lubricant (seeparagraph 197), then bleed brakes asfoUows:

With engine running to keep mastercylinder supplied with fluid, follownormal hydrauUc brake bleeding pro-cedure to remove all air from the systemfor both master cyUnders and brakepiston units. Bleeder fitting is located inrear axle center housing at top of rearaxle housing on both sides of tractor asshown in Fig. 181.

Later 8000 and 9000 models and 8600,8700, 9600, 9700, TW-10 and TW-20models use a separate reservoir forbrake fluid. HydrauUc system fluid isNOT USED. The manufacturer recom-mends that commercial grade brakefluid not be used in these models. Fordpart No. IQ-M6C34-A fluid ONLYshould be used, to prevent formation ofgases in the system, and loss of brakingaction. If any other fluid has been used,it is recommended that the entiresystem be thoroughly flushed and ap-proved fluid added.

To bleed these models, foUow normalhydraulic brake bleeding procedure toremove aU air from system. On modelswith auxiUary fluid reservoir, make surethat brake fluid is maintained at a visiblelevel while bleeding. On models withdipstick in master cyUnder, add fluidwhile bleeding to maintain adequatefluid level. Refer to Fig. 181 for brakebleeder fitting location.

209. OVERHAUL MASTER CYLIN-DER. For access to brake master cyUn-der, remove engine hood right sidepanel. On 8600, 8700, 9600, 9700, TW-10and TW-20 models, remove enough ofheat shield to allow removal of mastercylinder. The master cylinder assemblycan then be unbolted and removed from

Fig, 178—Planet gear shaft retainer is heid inptace wtth iockwire inserted under the retainerand secured by wrapping ends of wire aroundends of retainer ring as shown. TW-30 modeisare equipped with four pianetary gears; other

modeis have three gears.

Fig. mo—Adjust master cyiinder to brakepedai rods to obtain desired free travei ofbrake pedat at stop as shown. If free travei isiess than specified brakes may drag or seize.

Fig. 181—Brake bteeder fittings (8) are io-cated at each side of rear axie center housing

just above axie housing fiange.

72

Paragraphs 206-209 FORD

against seal ring. InstaU inner and outerbearing cups in axle housing, then insertaxle shaft and install inner bearing cone.Install planetary carrier and gearassembly, then install axle retaining capscrew and washer with thickest shimavailable. Tighten retaining cap screw toa torque of 396-484 ft.-lbs. and measureend play of axle shaft with dial indicator.Remove cap screw, retainer and shim,measure shim with micrometer andsubtract measured end play from shimthickness. Select a spacer shim of thick-ness nearest to result obtained by sub-tracting end play from shim thickness,then install selected shim, retainer andcap screw. Tighten cap screw to a torqueof 396-484 ft.-lbs. and instaU cap screwlock.

206. OVERHAUL PLANETARYDRIVE. With the axle and final driveassembly removed as outlined in para-graph 204 and the planetary carrier andgear assembly removed as in paragraph205, proceed as follows:

Cut the locking wire (1—Fig. 177)(refer also to Fig. 178), then puU wirefrom under planet gear shaft retainingsnap ring (2—Fig. 177). The snap ringcan then be disengaged from the planetgear shafts by pulUng ends of ringtogether which will aUow the shafts to bedriven out snap ring side of carrier.There are 54 loose needle rollers (20),two thrust washers (18) and a spacer (21)in each planet gear. Remove snap ringfrom carrier. •

Carefully clean and inspect all partsand renew any that are excessivelyworn, scored or otherwise not suitablefor service. Needle rollers are availablein sets of 54 roUers only and should berenewed only as a complete set for eachplanet gear and shaft.

To reassemble, stick the spacer andthe two rows of 27 roUers each in theplanet gear using thin layer of heavygrease. Position planet gear in carrierand insert gear shaft from snap ring sideof carrier. Push the shafts in flush withbore, then instaU snap ring, compressthe snap ring and align notches in shaftswith ring. Push a new locking wireunder the ring and secure wire bywrapping ends around snap ring projec-tions as shown in Fig. 178.

Inspect ring gear (8—Fig. 177) andsun gear teeth on inner axle shaft (12)and renew if teeth are chipped orexcessively worn. Insert the pins (17) inaxle housing to align ring gear wheninstalling gear in housing. If a new ringgear is installed, it may have anidentification groove, which should beinstalled toward center housing.

BRAKESAll Models Except TW-30

207. ADJUSTMENT. The rod con-necting trunnion in brake pedal tomaster cylinder piston must be adjustedin length to provide a pedal free travel of1/8-inch on 8700, 9700, TW-10 andTW-20 models or 3/16 to V4-inch on8000, 9000, 8600 and 9600 modelsmeasured at pedal stop pad as shown inFig. 180. To adjust rod length, loosenjam nut (Fig. 180) and turn rod in or outof trunnion to obtain correct free travel,then tighten jam nut. Right side hoodpanel must be removed on Models 8000,8600,9000 and 9600 for access to Unkage.

NOTE: if pedai is spongy, bieed thebraices as outiined in paragraph 208 priorto adjusting, insufficient free travel wiiicause braises to drag.

208. FLUID AND BLEEDING. Onsome early Model 8000 and 9000 trac-tors, lubricant from rear axle centerhousing is utilized as brake hydraulicfluid. On these models, a line connectsbrake reservoir to hydraulic lift sumpreturn line which supplies master

ADJUSTMENT ROD

cylinder with fluid. A second line returnsexcess fluid to the rear axle centerhousing. Whenever servicing brakemaster cylinder, or if cylinder has beendrained, refill with proper lubricant (seeparagraph 197), then bleed brakes asfoUows:

With engine running to keep mastercylinder supplied with fluid, follownormal hydrauUc brake bleeding pro-cedure to remove all air from the systemfor both master cyUnders and brakepiston units. Bleeder fitting is located inrear axle center housing at top of rearaxle housing on both sides of tractor asshown in Fig. 181.

Later 8000 and 9000 models and 8600,8700, 9600, 9700, TW-10 and TW-20models use a separate reservoir forbrake fluid. HydrauUc system fluid isNOT USED. The manufacturer recom-mends that commercial grade brakefluid not be used in these models. Fordpart No. IQ-M6C34-A fluid ONLYshould be used, to prevent formation ofgases in the system, and loss of brakingaction. If any other fluid has been used,it is recommended that the entiresystem be thoroughly flushed and ap-proved fluid added.

To bleed these models, foUow normalhydraulic brake bleeding procedure toremove aU air from system. On modelswith auxiUary fluid reservoir, make surethat brake fluid is maintained at a visiblelevel while bleeding. On models withdipstick in master cyUnder, add fluidwhile bleeding to maintain adequatefluid level. Refer to Fig. 181 for brakebleeder fitting location.

209. OVERHAUL MASTER CYLIN-DER. For access to brake master cyUn-der, remove engine hood right sidepanel. On 8600, 8700, 9600, 9700, TW-10and TW-20 models, remove enough ofheat shield to allow removal of mastercylinder. The master cylinder assemblycan then be unbolted and removed from

Fig, 178—Planet gear shaft retainer is heid inptace wtth iockwire inserted under the retainerand secured by wrapping ends of wire aroundends of retainer ring as shown. TW-30 modeisare equipped with four pianetary gears; other

modeis have three gears.

Fig. mo—Adjust master cyiinder to brakepedai rods to obtain desired free travei ofbrake pedat at stop as shown. If free travei isiess than specified brakes may drag or seize.

Fig. 181—Brake bteeder fittings (8) are io-cated at each side of rear axie center housing

just above axie housing fiange.

72

SHOP MANUAL

support after disconnecting the fluidsupply and return Unes (early modelsonly) and the two pressure lines to wheelpistons.

Refer to exploded view of assembly inFig. 182 and remove the two rubberboots (not shown), snap (retaining)rings, pistons, piston primary seals andreturn springs from cylinder bores.Remove reservoir cover and thoroughlyclean the cylinder bores and reservoir.Be sure that both the orifice and port inbottom of reservoir are open and clean.

Reservoir and cylinder casting isserviced as a complete master cylinderassembly only. AU other parts areavailable separately or as a mastercylinder repair kit which includes partsfor servicing both cyUnders of unit.Piston secondary seal is integral part ofpiston.

Lubricate master cylinder parts withrecommended rear axle lubricant onearly 8000 and 9000 models only. On aUother models, lubricate parts withapproved Ford brake fluid only andreassemble by reversing disassemblyprocedure.

TW-30 Models

Power to actuate brakes on TW-30models is provided by the low pressureoil pump. Refer to paragraph 174.Pressurized oil is routed to power brakevalve shown in Fig. 183 then toindividual rear brakes.

210. ADJUSTMENT. To adjust powerbrakes on TW-30 models, shut offengine, depress both brake pedals andinsert Ford tool No. 7446 (1-Fig. 184)between rocker arm links (2) and powerbrake valve housing as shown in Fig.184. Loosen adjusting nuts and locknutson both pedals then adjust one pedal at atime. Tighten adjusting nut until pedalbegins to move. Check corner of gage formovement. If gage can be moved with aheavy drag, adjustment is correct. Gagemust be movable without depressing

pedal. Tighten locknut, then repeatprocedure for other pedal.

210A. FLUID AND BLEEDING.With engine running and hydraulicsystem oil at normal operating tempera-ture, depress one pedal, loosen corres-ponding bleed screw in rear axle centerhousing near top of axle housing (Fig.181), to expel air from system. Tightenbleed screw while maintaining pedalpressure. Repeat procedure for otherbrake. Refer to paragraph 176 andreplenish transmission oil as required.

210B. R&R AND OVERHAULPOWER BRAKE VALVE. To removepower brake from tractor, remove oiltubes (2, 9, 12-Fig. 183), valvemounting bolts (13) and rocker armretaining pin (10). To overhaul valve,remove check valve (13—Fig. 185) andball (13A) from housing (10). Afterremoving housing cap screws and cap(23), remove rocker arm assembly (1) byremoving retaining rings (8) and retain-ing pins (7). Withdraw spool assembly(11). Heat valve retainers (3) to breakLoctite seal and remove retainers usingFord tool No. 7445. Remove valveplungers (4) then force directional valveneedles (6) and "0" rings (5) fromhousing (10) with a smaU punch.

Inspect all parts including housing (10)for excessive wear, damage or cracksand renew as necessary. During reas-sembly apply two or three drops of asuitable locking sealer to threads ofretainers (3) making sure no sealercontacts plungers (4) or inside diametersof retainers (3). Tighten retainers to atorque of 10-15 ft.-lbs. Remainder ofrejtssembly procedure is reverse ofdisassembly procedure. Bleed brakes asoutlined in paragraph 210A then adjustbrakes as outlined in paragraph 210.

211. BRAKE PISTONS ANDDISCS. To remove brake pistons anddiscs on all models, refer to procedurefor removing rear axle and final drive

Paragraphs 210-211

assembly outlined in paragraph 204. Thebrake discs can then be removed fromguide pins and the piston from rear axlecenter housing. Refer to Fig. 177 for ex-

CYllNDERBORE

Fig, 183—View of power brake vaive anddifferentiai tock vaive on Modei TW-30.

Fig. 182—Expioded view ofbrake master cytinderassembiy. Piston and sec-ondary seat are avaiiabteas an assembiy oniy. Mas-ter cyiinder reservoir is keptfiiiad by suppiy line fromhydraulic system andexcess oil is returned torear axle center housingon early 8000—9000 mod-

els oniy.

1. Differentiallockvalve to sump tubes

2. Brake valve oil inlettube

3. Differentiallockvalve adjusting bolt

4. Valve inlet port5. Valve outlet port6. Differentiallock

valve7. Valve spool

8. Valve mountingbolts

9. Brake tube to leftbrake

10. Rocker arm pin11. Release pins12. Brake tube to right

brake13. Mounting bolts14. Brake valve

assembly

Fig, 184—View of Ford brake adjusting tooiNo. 7446 {1) instaitad between rocker armlinks {2) and vaive body. See text for brake

adjustment on Modei TW-30,

73

Paragraph 211 Cont.

ploded view showing brake piston anddiscs. Inspect piston (13) for warpage,scoring or cracks. If piston is service-able, renew the seal rings (14 and 15).Inspect brake discs (9, 10 and 11) forwarping or excessive wear. Removebrake piston springs (16) and discard,since these springs are no longer used.

To reassemble, lubricate piston andsealing ring assembly and instaU, takingcare not to damage the rings. Completereassembly by following procedureoutlined in paragraph 204.

POWER TAKE-OFFThe independent type power take-off

Is driven by a hydrauiicaily operatedmultiple disc ciutch iocated in front endof rear axle center housing. On 8000,8600. 8700, 9700, TW-10, TW-20 andsome 9600 models, reduction gearsiocated in rear compartment provide both540 and 1000 rpm output shaft speeds.On other modeis, the pto is equippedwith reduction gears for 1000 rpm opera-tion only. The output shaft speed on dualspeed modeis is changed by instaiitngeither the 540 rpm six-spilne output shaftor 1000 rpm output shaft with 21 spiines.On 1000 rpm only models a 21-spllne1000 rpm output shaft Is used, but a 20spline heavy-duty 1000 rpm shaft isavaiiabie. On aii modeis the output shaftsupports the reduction gears and acts asa bearing surface.

On aii modeis except TW-10, TW-20and TW-30, fiuid pressure to operate thepto clutch and also operate the differ-entiai iock ciutch and Duai Power unit,on modeis so equipped, is provided by agear type pump that Is mounted on rearcover of the hydrauiic system pump.Pressure in the pto clutch circuit isiimited to 135-165 psi by the reguiatingvaive in pto ciutch vaive body. Pressureto differential iock ciutch is limited to250-300 psi by the regulating vaive sieeveon differentiai iock vaive iocated inhydrauiic system pump adapter piate.Operating pressure for Dual Power unitsis limited to 150-175 psi by Duai Powerreguiating vaive iocated on waii of centerhousing. When both the differential lockand pto clutch are operated at the sametime, system pressure is built up to250-300 psi, but remains iimited to135-165 psi in pto clutch circuit. A reiiefvaive within the pump body limits pumppressure to 450 psi in the event ofmaifunction of either the differential lockregulating vaive or pto reguiating vaive.

Fiuid pressure for operation of ptociutch and differentiai lock on IModelsTW-20, TW-20 and TW-30 is provided bythe iow pressure oil pump discussed inparagraph 174. With engine running at2200 rpm, operating pressure shouid be185-235 psi.

FORD

Fig. 185—Expioded viaw ofbrake valve used on Model

TW-30.

1. Rocker arm2. Control rod link3. Valve retainer4. Valve plunger5. "O"ring6. Valve needle7. Retaining pin8. Retaining ring9. Seal

10. Housing11. Valve spool12. Seat13. Check valve

13A. Ball14. Snap ring15. Spacer16. '*O"ring17. Spacer sleeve18. Actuating piston19. Sealretamer20. Washer21. Locknut22. "O"ring23. Valve housing cap

Fig, 186—Schematic dia-gram of the pto/diff0ren-tial lock hydrauiic system,{All modets except TW-10,TW-20 and TW-30), Whendifferentiai iock valve isoperated, line to pto dutchcontrol valva la momantarl-ly doaad to pravant loss ofprassura in dutch circuit,than vaiva raopans whanprasaura in diffarantiat iockcircuit is buiit up. Pressureis directed to pto brakacylindar to hold clutchhousing from turning whenpto control valve is in dis-engaged position. Hy-drauiic pressure to DuaiPower unit is controUed byDual Power reguiatingvaive. Hydrauiic iine isconnected between iockvaive on modeis notequipped with Dual Power,

21

18

11

P.T.O.CLUTCH

P.T.O. SYSTEMRELIEF VALVE

HYDRAULICSYSTEM PUMP

REGULATING

P.T.O. BRAKE

DUAL POWERTRANSMISSION

REGULATINGVALVE

DUAL POWERTRANSMISSION

INTAKEFILTER

TO DiFFERENTiALLOCK

P.T.O.DIFFERENTIALLOCK VALVE

74

Paragraph 211 Cont.

ploded view showing brake piston anddiscs. Inspect piston (13) for warpage,scoring or cracks. If piston is service-able, renew the seal rings (14 and 15).Inspect brake discs (9, 10 and 11) forwarping or excessive wear. Removebrake piston springs (16) and discard,since these springs are no longer used.

To reassemble, lubricate piston andsealing ring assembly and instaU, takingcare not to damage the rings. Completereassembly by following procedureoutlined in paragraph 204.

POWER TAKE-OFFThe independent type power take-off

Is driven by a hydrauiicaily operatedmultiple disc ciutch iocated in front endof rear axle center housing. On 8000,8600. 8700, 9700, TW-10, TW-20 andsome 9600 models, reduction gearsiocated in rear compartment provide both540 and 1000 rpm output shaft speeds.On other modeis, the pto is equippedwith reduction gears for 1000 rpm opera-tion only. The output shaft speed on dualspeed modeis is changed by instaiitngeither the 540 rpm six-spilne output shaftor 1000 rpm output shaft with 21 spiines.On 1000 rpm only models a 21-spllne1000 rpm output shaft Is used, but a 20spline heavy-duty 1000 rpm shaft isavaiiabie. On aii modeis the output shaftsupports the reduction gears and acts asa bearing surface.

On aii modeis except TW-10, TW-20and TW-30, fiuid pressure to operate thepto clutch and also operate the differ-entiai iock ciutch and Duai Power unit,on modeis so equipped, is provided by agear type pump that Is mounted on rearcover of the hydrauiic system pump.Pressure in the pto clutch circuit isiimited to 135-165 psi by the reguiatingvaive in pto ciutch vaive body. Pressureto differential iock ciutch is limited to250-300 psi by the regulating vaive sieeveon differentiai iock vaive iocated inhydrauiic system pump adapter piate.Operating pressure for Dual Power unitsis limited to 150-175 psi by Duai Powerreguiating vaive iocated on waii of centerhousing. When both the differential lockand pto clutch are operated at the sametime, system pressure is built up to250-300 psi, but remains iimited to135-165 psi in pto clutch circuit. A reiiefvaive within the pump body limits pumppressure to 450 psi in the event ofmaifunction of either the differential lockregulating vaive or pto reguiating vaive.

Fiuid pressure for operation of ptociutch and differentiai lock on IModelsTW-20, TW-20 and TW-30 is provided bythe iow pressure oil pump discussed inparagraph 174. With engine running at2200 rpm, operating pressure shouid be185-235 psi.

FORD

Fig. 185—Expioded viaw ofbrake valve used on Model

TW-30.

1. Rocker arm2. Control rod link3. Valve retainer4. Valve plunger5. "O"ring6. Valve needle7. Retaining pin8. Retaining ring9. Seal

10. Housing11. Valve spool12. Seat13. Check valve

13A. Ball14. Snap ring15. Spacer16. '*O"ring17. Spacer sleeve18. Actuating piston19. Sealretamer20. Washer21. Locknut22. "O"ring23. Valve housing cap

Fig, 186—Schematic dia-gram of the pto/diff0ren-tial lock hydrauiic system,{All modets except TW-10,TW-20 and TW-30), Whendifferentiai iock valve isoperated, line to pto dutchcontrol valva la momantarl-ly doaad to pravant loss ofprassura in dutch circuit,than vaiva raopans whanprasaura in diffarantiat iockcircuit is buiit up. Pressureis directed to pto brakacylindar to hold clutchhousing from turning whenpto control valve is in dis-engaged position. Hy-drauiic pressure to DuaiPower unit is controUed byDual Power reguiatingvaive. Hydrauiic iine isconnected between iockvaive on modeis notequipped with Dual Power,

21

18

11

P.T.O.CLUTCH

P.T.O. SYSTEMRELIEF VALVE

HYDRAULICSYSTEM PUMP

REGULATING

P.T.O. BRAKE

DUAL POWERTRANSMISSION

REGULATINGVALVE

DUAL POWERTRANSMISSION

INTAKEFILTER

TO DiFFERENTiALLOCK

P.T.O.DIFFERENTIALLOCK VALVE

74

SHOP MANUAL Paragraphs 212*213

When pto ciutch vaive is in "STOP"position, fiuid pressure is directed to ptobrake cylinder which appiies a disc typebrake on TW-10, TW-20 and TW-30models or band type brake on aii othermodeis. The brake stops the pto ciutchhousing from turning due to fiuid drag onthe ciutch discs. Brake is reieased byspring pressure whenever clutch isapplied or engine is stopped.

CAUTiON: As reduction gears aresupported by the pto output shaft, do notoperate tractor without either the 540 or1000 rpm output shaft in piace. Severedamage may be caused if driven gears arerotated under engine power if notsupported by output shaft.

TROUBLESHOOTING

212. OPERATIONAL CHECKS.When troubleshooting pto malfunctions,refer to the following:

A. PTO CLUTCH WILL NOT EN-GAGE. Trouble could be caused by:

1. Failure of hydraulic pump.2. Control lever broken, disconnected

or improperly adjusted.3. Pto actuating arm in center housing

disengaged from control valve spool.4. Extremely cold oil in rear axle cen-

ter housing.5. Pto/differential lock relief valve ball

or spring missing in hydraulic pump (allbut TW models),

B. PTO STOPS UNDER LOAD.Trouble could be caused by:

1. Pto system pressure too low due toworn pump or leaking pump relief valve.

2. Pto clutch plates worn or damaged.

C. PTO WONT STOP. Trouble couldbe caused by:

1. Extremely cold oil in rear axlecenter housing.

2. Pto control linkage disconnected orimproperly adjusted.

3. Pto actuating arm in center housingdisengaged from control valve spool.

4. Pto clutch plates warped or dam-aged.

5. Excessive wear of pto clutch brake.6. Cut, broken or missing "0" ring on

pto brake piston.

D. PTO SYSTEM PRESSURE TOOHIGH. Trouble could be caused by:

1. Extremely cold oil in rear axlecenter housing.

2. Low pressure hydraulic systemcontrol valve stuck closed or spring toostiff.

E. PTO SYSTEM PRESSURE TOOLOW, (WARNING LIGHT ILLUMI-NATES). Trouble could be caused by:

1. Low pressure hydraulic operatingand or lube oil system pressure controlvalve spool(s) stuck open or spring(s)broken or weak.

2. Brake priority valve spool stuckclosed or spring too stiff (Model TW-30only).

3. Low pressure hydraulic system oilpump mounting bolts loose or rotorsworn.

4. Low pressure hydraulic system oilpump or oU pick up tube seal damaged.

5. Hydraulic line leading to pto controlvalve leaking or damaged.

6. Cut or broken o-rings on pto clutchpiston.

7. Pto regulating valve stuck open.8. Worn or broken pto seal rings and/

or pto support.9. Leak in differential lock or Dual

Power system.

213. PTO/DIFFERENTIAL LOCKSYSTEM PRESSURE. On all modelsexcept TW-10, TW-20 and TW-30,before checking pto/differential locksystem pressure, operate tractor untiloil in rear axle center housing is at

normal operating temperature. Stopengine and connect a O-500 psi hydraulicgage at upper V4-inch pipe plug openingin pump adapter plate as shown in Fig.188. On models equipped with DualPower, connect gage to tee fitting inhydraulic pump cover for Dual Powerline. Start engine and move control leverback and forth between "start" and"stop" positions several times to purgeair from system. With engine running at700 rpm, check pressure gage readingwith clutch engaged and disengaged.Pressure readings should be within therange of 135-165 psi. System pressure ofnear 165 psi is desirable for positiveclutch engagement. A variation of morethan 3 psi will indicate internal leakagein pto clutch circuit. While observingpressure gage, depress differential lockpedal. Pressure should drop momentari-ly then return to same reading. Ifpressure reading is lower with differen-tial lock engaged, there is an internalleak in the differential lock circuit.Differential lock circuit pressure can bechecked by connecting a pressure gageto lower V4-inch pipe plug opening asindicated in Fig. 188. With enginerunning at 700 rpm and differential lockengaged, pressure reading should be250-300 psi.

To check fluid pressure for pto and dif-ferential lock on TW-10 and TW-20models, first operate tractor until oil inrear axle housing is at normal tempera-ture. Stop engine and connect a 0-500psi hydraulic gage to low oil pressuresystem tee fitting (3 - Fig. 189) on pumpadapter plate. Pressure readings onmodels not equipped with Dual Power

Fig. 188—Pressure gageinstatted to check ptodutch circuit pressure onait modets except TW-10,TW-20 and TW-30. On DuatPower modets, connectgage to Duat Power iine teein same tocation, tnstattgage in lower pipe piughoie as indicated to checkdifferentiai iock systempressure. Refer to text for

test procedure.

GAUGETO CH6CK

LOCKSYSTEM PRESSURE

Fig, 189—To chack pto and diffarantiat lockvatva fiuid prassura, conn act a 0-500 psi gagato iow oii system tee fitting (F) and refer totext. Model TW-30 is shown, however Modeis

TW-10 and TW-20 are simitar.

75

Paragraphs 215-217 FORD

should be 185-220 psi with enginerunning at idle speed of 1000 rpm. OnDual Power models, pressure should be185-220 psi at engine speed of 1000 rpmunder each of the following conditions:Dual Power in underdrive. Dual Powerin direct drive. With Dual Power indirect drive, engage the pto. with DualPower in direct drive, engage the differ-ential lock.

To check pto, differential lock, powerbrake and Dual Power system pressureon TW-30 models, first operate tractoruntil oil in rear axle housing is at normaloperating temperature. Stop engine andconnect a 0-500 psi hydraulic gage to lowoil pressure system tee fitting (3-Fig.189) on pump adapter plate. Pressurereadings should be 185-235 psi undereach of the following conditions with theengine idle speed set at 2200 rpm: withDual Power in direct drive first applyleft wheel brake then apply right wheelbrake; apply both brakes at same time.With Dual Power in direct drive, engagepto then engage differential lock.

CONTROL LINKAGEADJUSTMENT

215. To check adjustment of the ptoclutch control cable on all models ex-cept TW-10, TW-20 and TW-30, refer toFig. 190 and proceed as follows: Movepto control lever to full rearward"STOP" position; the actuating armshould snap to "OFF" position and thecable yoke pin be centered in slot ofactuating arm. Then, move control leverfully forward to "START" position; theactuating arm should snap downward on8700 and 9700 models or upward on allother models to "ON" position and thecable yoke pin should again be centeredin slot in actuating lever. If the pincontacts end of slot in actuating lever in

either of the two positions, or theactuating lever will not "snap" intoeither the "ON" or "OFF" position, read-just control linkage cable as follows:

Disconnect lower end of cable fromactuating arm and loosen bottom clip.Move control lever to full rearward"STOP" position and snap actuating armupward on 8700 and 9700 models ordownward on all other models to "OFF"position, then reconnect cable with pincentered in slot of actuating arm andtighten bottom clip with cable in thisposition. Recheck adjustment as previ-ously described and if correct adjust-ment is not yet obtained, proceed asfollows:

Unbolt and remove console fromtractor fender.

NOTE: It will be necessary to removeall control lever handles so that consoiecan be iifted off controi linkage.

Loosen top cable clip and positioncontrol lever to dimension shown in Fig.190. Position top clip so that it is1/16-inch from cable seal on 8700 and9700 or butts against cable seal on othermodels, tighten clip and reinstall con-sole. Readjust lower cable stop, ifnecessary, as previously described.

To check and adjust pto clutch controlrod on TW-10, TW-20 and TW-30models, refer to Fig. 191 and with ptolever (3) in off position, adjust turn-buckle (T) so pto handle is 3V4 inchesfromfrontof slot (1).

R&R AND OVERHAUL

216. PTO/DIFFERENTIAL LOCKHYDRAULIC PUMP. Fluid pressure forpto and differential lock on ModelsTW-10, TW-20 and TW-30 is providedby the low oil pressure system pump as

Fig, 190—Viaw showingadjustment points for ptocontroi linkaga. Modeis8700 and 9700 are shownin View "A" whiie 8000—9000—8600—9600 modeisare shown in Viaw "B". Re-fer to text for procedure.See Fig, 191 for pto adjust-ment on Models TW-10,

TW-20 and TW-30.

noted in paragraph 174. Refer toparagraph 191 for pump removal.

Fluid pressure for pto and differentiallock on all other models is provided bythe hydraulic lift system pump. Refer toparagraphs 233 and 236 for pumpremoval and overhaul.

217. PTO UPPER (CLUTCH OUT-PUT) SHAFT AND REDUCTIONGEARS. To remove the pto clutch out-put shaft and drive gears, first removehydraulic lift top link, where required,then refer to Fig. 192 and pro<jeed asfollows:

Unbolt the drive gear bearing re-tainer (top link bracket) (58) from rearaxle center housing. Withdraw theretainer, along with drive gear (54),bearings (53 and 55) and shaft (33) as aunit. Remove the shaft from drive gear,taking care not to lose any shims (52)that may be located between gear andsnap ring on rear end of shaft. Removebearing retainer from rear bearing (55).Inspect gear teeth for chips and/or ex-cessive wear.

Ftg. 191—Rotate turnbuckie {T) on ModeisTW-10, TW-20 and TW-30 to adjust pto controi

rod as outiined in text.

76

SHOP MANUAL Paragraph 218

NOTE: Teeth on driven gears (61 and62) may be inspected through drive gearopening in rear axle center housing; turnoutput shaft to rotate the gears.

Check bearings on drive gear andrenew bearings if rough or worn; bear-ings may be removed using wedge typeattachment with two-leg puller and stepplate.

On dual speed models there are twodriven reduction gears while there isonly one driven reduction gear on 1000rpm only models. To remove drivengear(s), first remove swinging drawbarand drain pto reduction gear housing(rear plug). Remove the cover frombottom of rear axle center housing.Remove pto output shaft after remov-ing safety cap (72). Unbolt and removeoutput shaft bearing retainer (68), thensupport driven gear(s) (61 and 62) andremove bearing (64) and sleeve (63)assembly. The driven gear(s) can thenbe removed from bottom of rear axlecenter housing. Inspect needle bearing(59) in blind hole in rear axle centerhousing and remove if worn or damaged.Rear bearing (64) can be pressed from

5354

Fig. 192—Exptoded view showing pto reduc-tion gears, ciutch output shaft and pto outputshaft. Refer to Fig. 193 for view of both the540 and 1000 rpm output shafts used on duaispaed modets. On 1000 rpm modets onty,drtva gear (54) is a singie gear and spacer{61 A) is used in ptace of 540 rpm driven gear

{61).33. Clutch output shaft51. Snap ring52. Shims53. Front bearing54. Drive gear55. Rear bearing56. Gear bore plug57. Gasket58. Bearing retainer59. Needle roller bearing60. Thrust washer (3)61. 540 rpm driven gear

61 A. Spacer62. 1000 rpm driven gear63. Bearing sleeve64. Ballbearing65. Snap ring66. OU seal67. Gasket68. Bearing retainer69. "O"ring70. Output shaft71. Snap ring72. Safety cap

sleeve (63) after removing snap ring(65).

To reassemble, proceed as follows:Use 1-7/8-inch O.D. sleeve to drive out-put shaft front bearing (59) into housing,lubricate bearing and stick thrustwasher (60) into place using heavygrease. Press rear bearing (64) ontosleeve (63) and secure with snap ring. Ondual speed models, pilot the 1000 rpmdriven gear (62) onto hub of the 540 rpmgear (61) with a thrust washer (60)between them and position the gears inhousing. On 1000 rpm only models,install a thrust washer in spacer (61A)and install spacer and driven gear (62) inhousing so that concave side of gear isnext to spacer. Insert a thrust washerbetween sleeve (63) and gear(s) andinstall sleeve (63) and rear bearing (64).Install new oil seal (66) in retainer (68),lubricate seal and install retainer withnew gasket. Install appropriate outputshaft (Fig. 193) and secure with snapring (71-Fig. 192).

Install bearings (53 and 55) on drivegear (54), making sure that sealed side offront bearing (53) faces forward (awayfrom gear). Be sure that cup plug (56) inrear bore of gear is tight and does nothave a vent hole; renew plug if loose or ifit is early type having a vent hole. Iforiginal drive shaft (33) and drive gear(54) are being reinstalled, place shims(52) on rear end of shaft as removed ondisassembly and insert shaft in gear.Position retainer on rear drive gearbearing with new gasket (57), theninstall assembly in rear axle centerhousing and tighten retaining cap screwsto a torque of 68-92 ft.-lbs. Fill pto gearbox through fill plug opening on left rearof differential housing with approxi-mately 4 quarts for 8000, 9000, 8600,and 9600 models or 6V2 quarts for8700 and 9700 models. On ModelsTW-10, TW-20 and TW-30, replenishtransmission oil as outlined in paragraph176. Recommended lubricant for allmodels is Ford ESN-M2C53-A.

If shaft and/or drive gears have beenrenewed, drive shaft end play should bechecked and correct shim (52) thick-ness installed on assembly as outlined infollowinjg paragraph 218.

218. CLUTCH SHAFT END PLAY.End play of shaft (33-Fig. 192, 197 or198) should be 0.001-0.029 inch and iscontrolled by shims (52—Fig. 192)placed between rear snap ring (51) andshoulder on pto drive gear (54) hub. Ifthe hydraulic lift cover is removed, endplay can be checked by measuring gapbetween snap ring and gear hub with afeeler gage and, if not within limits of0.001-0.029 inch, the assembly should beremoved as outlined in paragraph 217and the correct thickness of shims (52)

installed to provide proper shaft endplay. Make sure rear bearing retainercap screws are tightened to a torque of68-92 ft.-lbs. when making end playcheck.

If a new shaft (33) is being installedand the lift cover is not removed, checkend play as follows: With the bearingretainer, drive gears and shaft removedas outlined in paragraph 217, install theassembly without a gasket and with totalshim (52) thickness of approximately0.100 inch. Install retainer cap screwsand tighten snugly until snap ring onfront end of shaft contacts pto clutchhousing and there is no end play of shaft,clutch housing or hub, but do not forcethe retainer in with cap screws. Loosenand tighten alternate cap screws untOgap is equal all around retainer, thenmeasure resulting gap with feeler gage.Record the measurement and remove

21-SPUNE P.T.O. SHAFTJOOO R.P.M.

6-SPLINE P.T.O. SHAFT540 R.P.M.

Fig, 193—Views showing 1000 rpm outputshaft {top) and 540 rpm output shaft {bottom)usad on duat apaad modala. Output ahafia{1000 rpm) for aingia apaad modala ara almllar.Nota location for aaaiing " 0 " ring {69—Fig,

192).

Fig, 194—View with hydrauiic system pumpremoved showing pto clutch and driva hub.Ciutch and hub can ba removed out pumpadaptar piate opening after ramoving dutch

output shaft raduction drive gears.

77

Paragraphs 219 221

retainer, drive gear and shaft assembly.Withdraw shaft from drive gear andmeasure test shim pack thickness withmicrometer. Subtract measured gapfrom test shim pack thickness; then,select shims of total thickness of 0.001 to0.029 inch less than the resulting valueof reassembly. For example, if test shimpack thickness was 0.098 inch and gapbetween retainer and housing was 0.043inch, resulting value would be 0.055inch. Desired shim pack thickness wouldbe 0.001 to 0.029 inch less than this value(0.055) or 0.026 to 0.054 inch. Reinstall

VAIVEASSCMIiy

Fig. 195—After removing dutch assambiy,lift off valva assambiy with valva support and

braka band.

shaft gear and retainer assembly withnew gasket and selected shim packthickness as outlined in paragraph 217and recheck end play.

219. PTO OUTPUT SHAFT. Thepower take-off output shaft (70—Fig.192) can be withdrawn after removingcap (72) and retaining snap ring (71).

When installing output shaft, be surethe sealing "0" ring (69) is in propergroove as shown in Fig. 193 and thatbearing surfaces of shaft are not scoredor burred.

220. R&R PTO CLUTCH ANDVALVE ASSEMBLY (TW-10, TW-20AND TW-30). To remove pto clutch andvalve assembly, separate tractor be-tween transmission and rear axle centerhousing as outlined in paragraph 188. Torenew pto clutch or valve assembly, pro-ceed as follows:

NOTE: Removai of hydrauiic lift coverIs optlonai. Pto ciutch and valveassembiy can be removed and installedwith iift cover in piace, however,instailation is difficuit because controlvalve spool (81—Fig. 198) and foriccannot easily be seen for aiignment.

FORD

Remove hydraulic lift cover, if de-sired, from center housing, then removepto drive hub (34-Fig. 198) and thrustwasher (35). Disconnect pto lube line(L—Fig. 198A) from fitting on inside leftwall of center housing, then disconnecthigh pressure line (H). Remove shoulderbolt (B—Fig. 200), over center spring(S), locating pin (82) and stop pin (84)from pto control linkage. Turn controlvalve lever so shift fork will be releasedfrom control valve spool (81 -Fig. 198).

On TW-10 and TW-20 models, slidepto valve assembly forward and removethrough center housing.

On TW-30 models, remove pto uppershaft and gears while supporting ptoassembly, then slide pto assembly pasthydraulic pump gear (G—Fig. 198A) andout center housing opening.

To reinstall pto clutch assembly,reverse removal procedure. Fingertighten locating pin (82-Fig. 200), con-nect pto lube line (L-Fig. 198A) andhigh pressure line (H), then tighten lo-cating pin (82-Fig. 200) to a torque of70-95 ft.-lbs. On TW-30 models, tightenpto upper shaft and gears bearing re-tainer to a torque of 68-92 ft.-lbs.

221. R&R PTO CLUTCH ANDVALVE ASSEMBLY. (All OtherModels). On 8000 models, it is possible toremove pto clutch and valve assembly

34 35 3a 37 38 39

40

44 45 46 47 48

^'on f^SiVL J'^!^J^ "^^^ ^^^^"^^^y^ ^^"^^^ *»'«*« mechanism, controi vaive assembiy and actuating linkage on all modeis except TW-10,TW-20 and TW-30, Pm {18) ts mserted through teft side of rear axie center housing and piiots in hoie in dutch vaive housing {10) to keep the dutchassembiy from rotating. Pin {23), a/so inserted from outer ieft side of center housing, ads as stop for controi arm (21) and atso as attaching pointfor the over-center spring (25). inset shows view of vaive housing from ciutch side and the pto brake iever and reiated parts. On transmissions withDuai Power, reguiator vaive {51) is used in piace of elbow {26). Refer to Fig, 198 for exploded viaw of pto assembiy on Modeis TW-10, TW-20 and

TW-30,

1. Snap ring2. Piston guide3. Piston return spring4. "O"rinR5. Pto brake piston6. Snap ring7. Washer8. Valve spring9. Regulating valve

10. Valve housing11. Lever pin12. Clevis pin13. Adjusting screw14. Locknut15. Clevis16. Brake lever17. "O"ring18. Locating pin

19. "O"ring20. Bushing21. Actuating arm22. Actuating lever23. Stop pin24. "0">mg25. Over center spring26. Elbow fitting27. Pressure line

28. Control valve spool29. Gasket30. Valve support31. Sealing rings32. Snap ring33. Clutch output shaft34. Clutch drive hub35. Thrust washer36. Snap ring

37. Spring retainer38. Snap ring39. Pressure plate40. External spline

discs41. Internal spline discs42. Feathering spring43. Piston return spnng44. "0" ring, inner

45. Piston46. "0" ring, outer47. Clutch housing48. Brakeband49. Band to arm pin50. Band to devis pin51. Dual Power

regulator valve

78

SHOP MANUAL

through opening in rear axle centerhousing after the hydraulic pump andadapter plate have been removed. On allother models, it is necessary to separatetractor to remove pto clutch and valveassembly due to interference with otherparts. To remove pto clutch, proceed asfollows;

On 8000 models, remove the adapterplate and hydraulic pump assembly fromright side of rear axle center housing asoutlined in paragraph 233. On all othermodels, separate tractor between trans-mission and rear axle center housing asoutlined in paragraph 187 or 188. Re-move pto upper (clutch output) shaft asindicated in paragraph 217. Remove hy-draxilic pump in i^e tube, filter screenand disconnect pto pressure line from in-side of rear axle center housing. Onmodels with Dual Power, remove DualPower regulating valve from wall ofcenter housing. On all except 8000models, remove locating pin (18-Fig.197), and remove pto clutch assembly.

On 8000 models, remove locating pin(18), slide clutch assembly rearward offinput shaft and remove pto clutchassembly through pump adapter plateopening. Care should be taken not to losethrust washer located between clutchand drive hub if they are separatedduring removal.

To reinstall pto clutch on 8000 modelsplace clutch drive hub on transmissionpto shaft and using heavy grease, stickthrust washer to clutch housing hub sothat prongs on thrust washer enter holesin hub of housing (47-Fig. 197).Position clutch and valve assembly onrear of drive hub and rotate hub backand forth to align splines of hub withsplines in pto clutch discs. With clutchfully forward, insert locating pin withnew "0" ring in left side of rear axlecenter housing, making sure pin entershole in pto valve housing, and tightenpin finger tight. Reconnect pto pressureline, reinstall pto upper shaft as inparagraph 217 and tighten locating pinto a torque of 70-95 ft.-lbs. Reinstallhydraulic pump as outlined in paragraph234 or 235.

To reinstall pto clutch on all except8000 models, install pto output shaft anddrive gear as outlined in paragraph 217.InstaU thrust washer (35-Fig. 197)using heavy grease so that prongs ofthrust washer enter holes in hub ofhousing (47). Install clutch assembly andcontrol valve on pto output shaft andinsert locating pin (18) finger tight tohold assembly in place. Connect controlvalve hydraulic line and install DualPower regulating valve, on models soequipped, so that hydraulic connection isfacing rearward. Connect Dual Powerhydraulic line. Connect rear axle housingand transmission as outlined in para-

graph 187 or 188. Tighten locating pin(18) to 70-95 ft.-lbs.

222. OVERHAUL PTO CLUTCHAND VALVE ASSEMBLY (TWMODELS). After removing pto clutchassembly as outlined in paragraph 220,refer to Fig. 198 and remove brake padbolts, outer pad (55), spacers (50) andinner pad (54). Remove clutch pack fromsupport and bearing assembly (30).Remove clutch rotor (52) then unbolt andremove valve assembly (80) fromsupport and bearing assembly. Removebrake piston (57) with compressed air.Remove snap ring (38), pressure plate(39), clutch discs (40 & 41) and feather-ing spring (42) from housing (47). UsingFord tool No. 1312, compress pistonretum spring (43) as shown in Fig. 199and remove snap ring (36). Use com-pressed air to unseat piston (45-Fig.198). Inspect and renew any componentsthat have excessive wear or damage.

Refer to Fig. 198 for view of controlvalve. Overhaul is evident after inspec-tion of valve. If regulating valve(77_Fig. 198) is worn or damaged, itmust be replaced as a complete unit.

NOTE: Lubricate all parts with hydrau-iic fiuid/differentiai lubricant beforereassembly.

Install a new "0" ring (58) on piston(57), then install feathering spring (42),clutch discs (40 & 41) and pressure plate(39) into housing (47). Reinstall snap ring(38) after compressing clutch spring as

Paragraphs 222-223

illustrated in Fig. 199.Assemble brake rotor (52) on clutch

housing (47), then attach clutch pack tosupport assembly (30). Install brakepads (53 & 55) and brake pad bolts.Tighten brake pad bolts to a torque of27-37 ft.-lbs. Attach pto valve assembly(80) to support (30) and tighten bolts to atorque of 15-21 ft.-lbs.

223. OVERHAUL PTO CLUTCHAND VALVE ASSEMBLY (AU OtherModels). With pto clutch and valveassembly removed as outlined in para-graph 221, place unit on bench, frontface down, and remove the brake band,valve support and valve assembly as aunit from the clutch housing as shown inFig. 195. Withdraw control valve spoolfrom valve body and remove the pin(11—Fig. 197) retaining band and lever(16) to valve body. Place valve body in apress and using suitable sleeve, com-press guide (2) and spring (3) into valvebody, then remove snap ring (1). Releasespring pressure and remove the guide,spring and piston (5). Remove snap ring(6), flat washer (7), spring (8) and ptoregulating valve (9) from bore in valvebody.

Remove snap ring (38) from clutchhousing (47), then remove the pressureplate (39), clutch discs (40 and 41) andfeathering spring (42) from housing.Remove the cast iron sealing rings (31)from rear hub of housing. Refer to Fig.199, place housing in a press and using

34 35 36 37 38 39 40 42 43 44 45 46 47 50 53 5455

Fig, 198—Exploded view of pto ctutch, vatve, shaft and retatad components used on ModetsTW-10, TW-20 and TW-30. Refer to Fig. 200 for view of shift mechanism.

30. Support31. Seal32. Snap ring33. S h ^34. Hub35. Thrust washer36. Retaining ring37. Spring retainer38. Snap ring39. Pressure plate40. External spline discs41. Internal spline discs42. Feathering spring

43. Piston return spring44. "0" ring, inner45. Piston46. *'O" ring, outer47. Clutch housing50. Spacers52. Brake rotor53. Brake pad54. Brake pad spring55. Brake pad56. Brake pin57. Piston58. Seal

59. BaU(5/16in.)60. Elbow61. Snaprii62. Support I63. Ball64. Shift fork65. Bushing66. Seal67. Shift lever71. Snap ring72. "O"ring73. Valve guide

74. Valve seal76. Return spring77. Pressure regulator

valve78. Push rod79. Valve spring80. Valve assembly81. Control valve82. Locating pin83. Spring84. Stop pin85. Gasket

79

Paragraphs 226-228 FORD

Fig. 198A—Viaw of rearaxie center housing onModeis TW'10, TW-20 andTW-30, Refer to paragraph220 for pto ciutch removal.

C. CouplerG. Hydraulic pump gearH. High pressure lineL. LuDeiineV. Pto valve

Ford tool No. 1312 or equivalent, com-press the piston return springs (43—Fig.197) and remove retaining snap ring(36). Gradually release spring pressureand remove the spring retainer (37) andspring (43). Use air pressure throughclutch piston port located between theseal ring grooves on housing rear hub toremove piston (45) from housing.

Carefully clean and inspect all partsand remove the "0" rings (44 and 46)from clutch piston and the "0** ring (4)from brake piston. Renew all excessivelyworn, scored or otherwise damaged

Fig. 199—Using Ford tool No, 1312 to com-press piston return spring {43—Fig. 197 or

198), so snap ring {36) can ba ramovad.

36. Retaining ringL Pto clutch housing

T. Tool No. 1312P. Arbor press

parts not suitable for further service.Lubricate all parts with hydraulicfluid/differential lubricant and usingnew "0" rings (4, 44 and 46) and cast ironrings (31), reassemble by reversing dis-assembly procedure. After placing thebrake band, valve support and valveassembly back on the pto clutch housing,loosen locknut (14), tighten band adjust-ing screw (13) to a torque of 9-11 in.-lbs.,back screw off lVz turns, then tightenlocknut.

HYDRAULICLIFT SYSTEiVi

The hydraulic lift system incorporatesautomatic draft controi, automaticposition controi and pump fiow (rate ofiift) controi. Provision is aiso made forinstaiiation of optionai remote cyiindercontroi vaives. Tractor is aiso avaiiabiewith a hydrauiic system for remotecyiinder operation only. Fluid for thesystem is common with differentiai andfinal drive iubricant. Refer to paragraph197 for fluid type and quantity. Hydrau-iic power is suppiied by a gear type pumpthat is mounted in right side of rear axiecenter housing. Pump is driven by gearmachined on pto ciutch input hub. Thesystem is protected by a wire meshscreen filter on intaice side of pump on ali

modeis except aii 8700, 9700, TW-10,TW-20, TW-30 and late 8600 and 9600,which have a renewable intake fiiter. Thepressure (outiet) side of system isprotected by a renewabie fiiter on pumpadapter piate on aii modeis.

HYDRAULIC FLUID

226. Fluid used in transmission andrear axle center housing and hydraulicsystem must be compatible with the wettype disc brakes and differential lockclutch. Refer to paragraph 176 forrecommended fluid type and for trans-mission and rear axle capacity. Rear axlecenter housing should be drained andrefilled with new lubricant after each1200 hours of service or yearly, which-ever occurs first. Before draining, besure that 3-point lift arms are loweredand any remote cylinders are retracted.Maintain fluid level at oil level plugopening in left side of rear axle centerhousing at front side of left axle housingflange on 8000-9000 models. All othermodels have a dipstick located by the leftside of the lift cover. Check fluid withthe tractor level, with 3-point hitch liftarms in raised position and any remotecylinders extended.

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM FILTERS

227. The external throw-away typefilter on pump adapter cover at rightside of rear axle center housing shouldbe renewed after each 300 hours of serv-ice. If tractor is equipped with externalthrowaway type intake filter, filtershould be renewed after each 300 hoursof service. External intake filter islocated just below pump adapter plateon 8700, 9700, TW-10, TW-20 and TW-30models or on left side of center housingon all other models.

On all models without external intakefilter, the wire screen filter on pumpintake tube should be cleaned each timethe hydraulic system is being servicedand is accessible after removing hydrau-lic pump, lift cover or splitting tractorbetween transmission and rear axlecenter housing.

Fig. 200—View of shiftmechanism for TW-10,TW-20 and TW-30 modeis,

B. Shoulder boltL. Locating boltS. Over center spring

67. Shift lever82. Locating pin84. Stop pin

TROUBLESHOOTING

228. When troubleshooting problemsare encountered with the hydraulic liftsystem, refer to the following malfunc-tions and their possible causes:

A. FAILURE TO LIFT UNDER ALLCONDITIONS. Could be caused by:

1. Low oil level in rear axle centerhousing.

2. Flow control valve stuck in openposition.

3. Faulty hydraulic pump.

80

Paragraphs 226-228 FORD

Fig. 198A—Viaw of rearaxie center housing onModeis TW'10, TW-20 andTW-30, Refer to paragraph220 for pto ciutch removal.

C. CouplerG. Hydraulic pump gearH. High pressure lineL. LuDeiineV. Pto valve

Ford tool No. 1312 or equivalent, com-press the piston return springs (43—Fig.197) and remove retaining snap ring(36). Gradually release spring pressureand remove the spring retainer (37) andspring (43). Use air pressure throughclutch piston port located between theseal ring grooves on housing rear hub toremove piston (45) from housing.

Carefully clean and inspect all partsand remove the "0" rings (44 and 46)from clutch piston and the "0** ring (4)from brake piston. Renew all excessivelyworn, scored or otherwise damaged

Fig. 199—Using Ford tool No, 1312 to com-press piston return spring {43—Fig. 197 or

198), so snap ring {36) can ba ramovad.

36. Retaining ringL Pto clutch housing

T. Tool No. 1312P. Arbor press

parts not suitable for further service.Lubricate all parts with hydraulicfluid/differential lubricant and usingnew "0" rings (4, 44 and 46) and cast ironrings (31), reassemble by reversing dis-assembly procedure. After placing thebrake band, valve support and valveassembly back on the pto clutch housing,loosen locknut (14), tighten band adjust-ing screw (13) to a torque of 9-11 in.-lbs.,back screw off lVz turns, then tightenlocknut.

HYDRAULICLIFT SYSTEiVi

The hydraulic lift system incorporatesautomatic draft controi, automaticposition controi and pump fiow (rate ofiift) controi. Provision is aiso made forinstaiiation of optionai remote cyiindercontroi vaives. Tractor is aiso avaiiabiewith a hydrauiic system for remotecyiinder operation only. Fluid for thesystem is common with differentiai andfinal drive iubricant. Refer to paragraph197 for fluid type and quantity. Hydrau-iic power is suppiied by a gear type pumpthat is mounted in right side of rear axiecenter housing. Pump is driven by gearmachined on pto ciutch input hub. Thesystem is protected by a wire meshscreen filter on intaice side of pump on ali

modeis except aii 8700, 9700, TW-10,TW-20, TW-30 and late 8600 and 9600,which have a renewable intake fiiter. Thepressure (outiet) side of system isprotected by a renewabie fiiter on pumpadapter piate on aii modeis.

HYDRAULIC FLUID

226. Fluid used in transmission andrear axle center housing and hydraulicsystem must be compatible with the wettype disc brakes and differential lockclutch. Refer to paragraph 176 forrecommended fluid type and for trans-mission and rear axle capacity. Rear axlecenter housing should be drained andrefilled with new lubricant after each1200 hours of service or yearly, which-ever occurs first. Before draining, besure that 3-point lift arms are loweredand any remote cylinders are retracted.Maintain fluid level at oil level plugopening in left side of rear axle centerhousing at front side of left axle housingflange on 8000-9000 models. All othermodels have a dipstick located by the leftside of the lift cover. Check fluid withthe tractor level, with 3-point hitch liftarms in raised position and any remotecylinders extended.

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM FILTERS

227. The external throw-away typefilter on pump adapter cover at rightside of rear axle center housing shouldbe renewed after each 300 hours of serv-ice. If tractor is equipped with externalthrowaway type intake filter, filtershould be renewed after each 300 hoursof service. External intake filter islocated just below pump adapter plateon 8700, 9700, TW-10, TW-20 and TW-30models or on left side of center housingon all other models.

On all models without external intakefilter, the wire screen filter on pumpintake tube should be cleaned each timethe hydraulic system is being servicedand is accessible after removing hydrau-lic pump, lift cover or splitting tractorbetween transmission and rear axlecenter housing.

Fig. 200—View of shiftmechanism for TW-10,TW-20 and TW-30 modeis,

B. Shoulder boltL. Locating boltS. Over center spring

67. Shift lever82. Locating pin84. Stop pin

TROUBLESHOOTING

228. When troubleshooting problemsare encountered with the hydraulic liftsystem, refer to the following malfunc-tions and their possible causes:

A. FAILURE TO LIFT UNDER ALLCONDITIONS. Could be caused by:

1. Low oil level in rear axle centerhousing.

2. Flow control valve stuck in openposition.

3. Faulty hydraulic pump.

80

SHOP MANUAL

4. Control linkage damaged or dis-connected.

5. Leak in pump suction (intake) pipe.6. Sticking exhaust control valve

(34-Fig.219).7. Sticking or improperly installed

exhaust pressure valve (36—Fig.219).

B. FAILURE TO LIFT UNDERLOAD. Could be caused by:

1. Faulty hydraulic pump.2. System pressure relief valve open-

ing at too low a pressure or faultyrelief valve.

3. Safety relief valve faulty.4. Exhaust pressure valve (36—Fig.

219) sticking.5. Clogged pump inlet screen.

C. OCCASIONALLY FAILS TO LIFTNOT DUE TO OVERLOADING. Couldbe caused by:

1. Flow control valve spool stickingoccasionally.

2. Exhaust pressure valve (36—Fig.219) sticking occasionally or valveinstalled backwards.

3. Lift control valve improperly ad-justed.

D. EXCESSIVE LIFT CORREC-TIONS (WILL NOT HOLD LOADAFTER STOPPING ENGINE). Couldbe caused by:

1. Drop valve poppet or poppet ballleaking.

2. Lift piston seal leaking.3. "0" ring seals between control

valve body and lift cylinder leak-ing.

4. Safety valve leaking.

E. LIFTS TOO SLOWLY. Could becaused by:

1. Flow control valve stuck in slowlift position.

2. Flow control valve scored or notproperly fit in valve bore.

3. Faiitypump.

F. OVER CORRECTS IN DRAFTCONTROL. Could be caused by:

1. Flow control valve adjusting knobnot properly set.

2. Lift control valve not properlyadjusted.

3. Binding draft control linkage orlower lift hanger binding in bush-ings.

4. Flow control override linkage bind-ing and not releasing variable flowvalve from fast flow position.

G. SYSTEM DOES NOT RESPONDTO CHANGES IN DRAFT OF IMPLE-MENT. Could be caused by:

1. Draft control linkage out of adjust-ment.

Paragraph 228 Cont.

SAFETY VALVE

ESm SUPPLY PRESSURE

• i SUMP OIL

[ 2 3 STATIC O i l

PUMPADAPTORPLATE

Fia. 203-Schematic diagram of hydraulic systam with controi valva in nautrai position. Flowcontroi vatva returns oit to sump through fiiter and brake suppiy tine and mamtains staticpressure in pressure iine with the controt vatve in neutrai or lowering position. When thecontrol valve is piaced in raising position, pressure is directed to pilot iine, dosing the flowcontroi vatva, thus directing ftuid fiow to prassura ttne and ttft cyiinder. When controt vatva tsptacad in towaring position, drop vatva is forcad open atiowing fiuid in cytinder to return tosump past the exhaust vaiva. Prassure in pitot tine hotds exhaust vatva dosed when tine ispressu7zed with controt vaive in raising position. Variabte fiow vatve restricts fiow to iiftCYtinder pressure tine, causing fiow controi vatve to direct part of pump ftow to sumpdepending upon position of variabte ftow valve. Thus, rate of Itft can be varied t>y varyingposition of variabte ftow vatve with controt {F-Fig. 209) on console. When controt vaive ievar isptaced in futt raise position, override tinkage returns variabia flow valva to full flow

position.

Fig, 204—Seiector lever{S—Fig. 209) controis po-sition of seiector shaftwhich movas rear end ofactuating rod attached tocontroi valve lever to posi-tion controt {top view) ordraft controi {bottom view)position in position con-troi arm. Atso, detent po-sitions between futt posi-tion controi and futt draftcontrot provide varying de-grees of draft controi,Rafar to exptoded view ofdetent mechanism in Fig,

223.

POSITIONCONTROI ARM

PIVOT

POSITION CONTROL

CONTROi VALVECONTROL VALVE

LEVER

POSITIONCONTROL ARM

RAM ARM

SELECTORSHAFT

PIVOT ARM'CONTROL VALVE

CONTROL VALVEI DRAFT CONTROL! LEVER

81

Paragraphs 229-231

DRAFT CONTROL-LEVER

ANCHOR

L.H. LOWERHANOER

R.H. LOWERLINK HANOER

Fig. 205—Cut-away viewshowing draft controi tor-sion bar and controt link-age. Draft on iowar linksrotatas iift link hangersagainst tension of torsionbar, thus rotating draftcontrol iever. When seiec-tor iever {Fig. 204) is indraft controi position, con-troi vaive position is con-trolled by draft on lower

links.

-RIAM WITH aSAa IN. DRILLTAP WITH 1/1 IN.^4 TAP

ORILL THIOUON WITH 7/1* IN. Ot i i lTAP WITH 1/4 IN. -If HHTAF

ffOCKIT HIAD PLUOPin t T T t i M

Fig. 206—On modeis not equipped with re-mote controi valva, manifoid plate must bemodified as shown abova to parmit chackinghydrauiic systam raliaf pressure, Rafar also

to Fig. 207.

PRESSUREOAOE

SHUT-OPPVALVE

RETURNHOSE

BIANIPOLDFig, 207—With manifoid on top of pumpadaptar piata modified as shown in Fig. 206,connact prassura gaga and shut-off vaivahosa to manifoid and insart raturn hosa

through fHlarpiug opaning in iift covar.

2. Linkage disconnected; roller disen-gaged from draft sensing yoke.

3. Lower link hanger stop not prop-erly adjusted.

4. Reaction too slow due to flow con-trol valve in slow flow position.

HYDRAULIC PRESSURE CHECK

229. Hydraulic system relief pressureshould be 2500-2600 psi for TW-10,TW-20 and TW-30 models and 2450-2550for all other models. Pressure can beadjusted by adding or removing shims(31-Fig. 216 or 3-Fig. 217), betweenrelief valve body cap and relief valvespring.

Shims are available in thicknesses of0.010 and 0.026 inch. Maximum allow-able shim pack thickness is 0.080 inch.Adding one 0.010 inch thick shim willincrease pressure approximately 42 psion TW-10, TW-20 and TW-30 modelsand approximately 100 psi on all othermodels. If adding shims does notincrease relief pressure or systempressure remains below desired pres-sure with maximum thickness (0.080

FORD

inch) shims installed, a worn or faultypump should be suspected.

If equipped with remote controlvalves, connect pressure test gage atremote quick disconnect coupling. If notequipped with remote control valves,modify the manifold plate on top ofpump adapter plate as shown in Fig. 206and connect pressure test gage as shownin Fig. 207. Insert return hose in rearaxle center housing fOler plug opening,open the shut-off valve and start engine.With engine running at 700 rpm, closeshut-off valve only long enough toobserve pressure reading. After check-ing system pressure with modifiedmanifold installed, either install newmanifold or remove internal V2-inch pipeplug and close external opening withV4-inch pipe plug.

ADJUSTMENTS

NOTE: The adjustments outiined Infoiiowing paragraph 230 through 233 arethose that can be made externaiiy;internai adjustments are outiined inreassembiy procedure in paragraphsoutiining overhaul of the system com-ponents, inabiiity to make system func-tion properiy by external adjustment wiiiindicate need of system overhaul and/orinternai adjustment.

230. LOWER LINK HANGER STOP.Refer to Fig. 208; gap between left handlower link hanger and eccentric stopshould be 0.33-0.34 inch (Vs-inch). To ad-just gap, loosen cap screw and turn ec-centric, then retighten cap screw to atorque of 50-60 ft.-lbs.

231. CONTROL LEVER LINKAGEADJUSTMENT. The lift control lever(L—Fig. 209) should move the controllever (6—Fig. 210) on lift cover throughfull range of travel without the lever(L—Fig. 209) contacting either end ofslot in console. If the control lever can bemoved against end of slot, adjust link(1—Fig. 210) as follows: Disconnectlower end of link (1) from lever (6) and

Fig. 208—Eccantric stopon iaft side of raar axiacanter housing is adjustadto provide a gap of 0.33-0,34 inch between stop andleft hand lift iink hanger.Hangar stop on torsion barhangar is non-adjustabta.

0,33-0.34 IN. GAP

82

SHOP MANUAL

move end of lever down until it pushesoverride link (5) as far as it will go. Movelift control lever (L—Fig. 209) rearwardso that it is 1/8 to V4-inch from rear endof slot in console. Then, turn lower endof link (1—Fig. 210) to shorten orlengthen link as necessary so that it canbe reconnected to lever (6) withoutmoving either the control lever or lever(6).

After adjusting and reconnecting link(1), check to be sure that control levercan be moved through full range oftravel without contacting either end ofslot in console.

232. POSITION CONTROL ADJUST-MENT. Place selector lever (S—Fig.209) in position control (fully rearward).With control lever adjusted as outlinedin paragraph 231, start engine and movecontrol lever (L) fully forward; the liftlinkage should then move to fullylowered position. Slowly move controllever rearward; lift linkage should startto raise when lever is V2 to 1 inch awayfrom front end of slot in console. If liftarms do not go to fully lowered positionwith control lever fully forward, or if liftarms do not start to raise untC afterlever is more than 1 inch away fromfront end of slot in console, adjustposition control pivot as follows:

Position the control lever so that it isV2 to 1 inch from front end of slot inconsole. Refer to Fig. 211 and loosenlocknut (Nl) on position control adjust-ing pivot (P) while holding pivot withAllen wrench. Slowly turn positioncontrol pivot until lift arms just start toraise without moving control lever, thentighten locknut to a torque of 70-80ft.-lbs. Recheck position control bymoving control lever fully forward, allowlift arms to reach fully lowered position,then move lever slowly rearward until

Paragraphs 232-234 I

Uft arms start to raise. Readjust positioncontrol pivot (P) if control lever positionat time lift arms start to raise is not asstated.

232A. DRAFT CONTROL ADJUST-MENT. After adjusting control leverlinkage as in paragraph 231 and posi-tion control pivot as in paragraph 232,check draft control adjustment asfollows: Place selector lever (S—Fig.209) in draft control position (fullyforward). With engine running, movecontrol lever (L) forward until lift armsare lowered, then slowly move levertowards rear of slot in console. When therear side of lever is Vz to 1 inch awayfrom rear end of slot, the lift arms shouldstart to raise. If the lift arms do not startto raise with control lever in thisposition, refer to Fig. 211 and loosenlocknut (N2) on draft control pivot (D)while holding pivot with Allen wrench.With the control lever Vz to 1 inch awayfrom end of slot in console, slowly turndraft control pivot until lift arms juststart to raise, then tighten locknut to atorque of 120-140 ft.-lbs. Recheck draftcontrol adjustment and readjust pivot ifnecessary.

233. R&R PUMP AND ADAPTERPLATE. To remove hydraulic pump andadapter plate from right side of rear axlecenter housing, proceed as follows:Drain oil from rear axle center housing.

S F

\Fig. 209—View of controi consote on 8000,8600, 9000 and 9600 modets, Modeis 8700,9700, TW-10, TW'2O and TW-30 are simiiar butpositions of pto and seiector controt tevers arereversed. Transmission brake tever (B) is notused on 8600, 8700, 9600, 9700, TW-10, TW-20

or TW'3O,

Remove access panel from right fenderon early models and thoroughly cleanadapter plate and surrounding area.Disconnect control rod or cable fromflow control valve arm at adapter andpuU up out of way.

If equipped with remote controlvalves, remove remote control valveaccess panel then back out manifold andremote control valve attaching boltsuntil they are free of pump adapterplate. Raise remote control valve stackslightly to disengage from pump adapterplate. Wire valve stack to adjacenttractor components as required to holdin place above pump cover. Remove inletmanifold (26-Fig. 212).

Refer to Fig. 212. Remove thehydraulic pressure tube and the pilotpressure tube connecting adapter plateto lift cover. Disconnect the flow controloverride spring and link from flowcontrol valve inner arm. Remove cotterpin connecting differential lock pedal tovalve and pull pedal up out of way.

On TW-10 and TW-20 models, discon-nect pto/differential lock valve pressureline from pump adapter plate and at teefitting on top right of transmission. Itmay be necessary to remove transmis-sion access panel on cab floor. On TW-30models, disconnect pto and differentiallock pressure line from pump adapterplate and valve assembly. Disconnectpto pressure line at rgulating valve.

On early models which use hydraulicoil instead of brake fluid in brakes,disconnect brake fluid lines from adapterplate and push lines downward out ofway. If necessary to renew hydraulicsystem filter, unscrew and discard filterat this time. Remove cap screws aroundoutside edge of adapter plate and pryplate and pump assembly from rear axlecenter housing.

234. If the pump intake tube andinternal intake filter have not beenremoved, carefully reinstall pump and

Fig, 210—View showing hydrauiic iift iaverto lift cover Unkaga. Uft controi link (1) isadjustable. Quadrant stop (Q) is adjusted sothat lever may be raturnad to dasirad setting

after raiaing Implament.

B. Transmission brakelever

F. Flow control knobL. Lift control knobP. Pto control lever

R. Remote controllevers

S. Selector (draft/position) controllever

F. Flow control knobL. Lift control leverQ. Quadrant stopS. Selector lever1. Control lever link2. Flow control link

3. Selector link4. Selector shaft arm5. Override linkage6. Lift control arm7. Variable flow valve

arm

Fig. 211—Viaw ahcwing location of positioncontrol accantrfc pin {P) and draft controleccentric pin (D) at right rear cornar of liftcovar and raar axia canter housing. Uft shaft

arm is {L).

83

Paragraphs 235-237

adapter plate (use new gasket betweenplate and center housing) by reversingremoval procedure and observing thefollowing: Take care to be sure thatpump opening fits over the intake pipeand install, but do not tighten, adapterplate retaining cap screws. Reconnectbrake lines (if so equipped) and reinstallhydraulic pressure tube and pilotpressure tube. Tighten pOot pressuretube fittings to a torque of 20-25 ft.-lbs.Tighten pressure Une to lift cover hollowbolt to a torque of 20-25 ft.-lbs. andtighten pressure tube to adapter platenut to a torque of 50-55 ft.-lbs. Then,tighten adapter plate cap screws to atorque of 30-40 ft.-lbs. Reinstall theremote control valves (if so equipped)using new "0" rings between the valves,adapter plate and manifold and tightenretaining cap screws to a torque of 20-25ft.-lbs. Reconnect aU linkage and rein-stall access plate in right fender. InstaUnew external oil fOter.

235. If the pump intake pipe and in-take filter were removed, or pipe shiftedin retainer bracket, reinstall pump andadapter plate separately as follows: Besure pipe bracket cap screws are tightand separate pump from adapter plate.Position the pump on intake pipe andstick pump to adapter plate "0" rings incounterbores with heavy grease. InstaUadapter plate with new gasket, taking

care not to dislodge the "0" rings, andinstaU adapter plate to pump cap screws.Loosely install the adapter plate capscrews, then tighten pump retaining capscrews to a torque of 20-25 ft.-lbs.Complete remainder of reinstaUationprocedure as outlined in paragraph 234.

236. OVERHAUL PUMP. With pumpand adapter plate removed as outlined inparagraph 233, remove pump retain-ing cap screws and separate pump fromadapter plate. Refer to foUowing sec-tions.

237. TW-10 AND TW-20. Refer toFig. 213 and remove cotter pin and nutsecuring pump drive gear then removedrive gear using suitable puUer. Removewoodruff key from shaft. Remove 16bolts and lock washers securing frontand rear cover to body. Remove rearcover by Ughtly tapping pump shaft witha rubber mallet. After rear cover isremoved, lightly tap gear shafts withmallet to remove front cover. Keepcomponents in order as removed.Remove pressure loading rings (5) andseal rings (4) from front and rear covers(7 and 12).

CarefuUy clean and inspect aU parts.Minor burrs and score marks can beremoved using "0" grade emery paperand kerosene. Check gear track wear inpump body. Maximum permissible gear

i-27

29

1. Lift cover2. Pump suction line3. Intake filter (internal)

4. Intake elbow5. Seal6. Intake support clamp

Fig. 212—Viaw showingconnections between iiftcover and pump adapterpiate. Pump {7) mounts onadapter piate {9). Fiare nut{20) connects pilot iine topilot pressure sieeve {18—Fig, 221) and hoiiow boit{14) connects system pres-sure tube {15) to pressuresieeve {io—Fig. 221). Com-ponents {26 through 31)ara usad on Modais 8700,9700, TW-10, TW-20 andTW-30; items in insets{A or B) are used on other

modeis.

7. Pump assembly8. Seal rings9. Pump adapter plate

10. Dual Power valve11. Pressure line12. Pressure line fitting13. "0" rings14. Hollowbolt15. Pressure line16. Pilot line fitting17. Pilot line18. Override link19. Override arm20. Pilot line fitting21. Pickup tube22. Pump inlet23. Manifold24. Valve25. External inlet filter26. Manifold27. Valve28. Gasket29. External inlet filter30. Pump inlet31. Pickup tube

FORD

track wear is 0.0025 inch. Maximumrunout across gear face to tooth edge is0.001 inch and width of gears must bewithin 0.002 inch of each other. Gearjournals must be within 0.0005 inch ofeach other. If wear or scoring isextensive, it is usuaUy more economicalto renew pump rather than attemptrepairs.

Using new parts as necessary, reas-semble pump using new seal and sealingrings by reversing disassembly pro-cedure and observing the foUowing:

Lightly lubricate each component witha high temperature grease to protectpump from heat damage during initialstart up. Place front and rear bearings(11) over drive/driven gears (10) makingsure recess in each bearing is againstgear faces and that reUef grooves wiU beon pump outlet side. InstaU gears andbearings in pump body (3). Pack shaftseal cavity with high temperaturegrease. InstaU front cover (7), thentighten front cover bolts to a torque of65-70 ft.-lbs. Install woodruff key, drivegear and retaining nut. Tighten retain-ing nut to a torque of 40-55 ft.-lbs. InstaUpump as outlined in paragraph 235.

Fig, 213—Exploded view of hydraulic pumpassembiy used on TW-10 and TW-20 modeis.

1. Pump drive gear2. Slotted nut 8. Seal3. Pump body 9. Snap ring4. Outer seal 10. Gear setf* P/essureseal n . Bearing assembly6. Hollow dowel 12. Rear cover7. Front cover 13. Solid dowel

84

SHOP MANUAL

238. TW-30. Refer to Fig. 214 andremove cotter pin and nut securingpump drive gear; remove drive gear (5)using a suitable puUer. Remove wood-ruff key from shaft. Remove five boltand lock washers holding pump togetherwhUe noting location of shorter bolt.Remove rear cover (11) by Ughtlytapping pump shaft with a rubbermallet. After removing rear cover,lightly tap gear shafts with maUet toremove front cover (4). Keep compo-nents in order as removed. Minor burrsand score marks can be removed using"0" grade emery paper and kerosene.Check gear track wear in pump body. Ifexcessively worn, replace completepump. Maximum allowable runoutacross gear face-to-tooth edge should not

exceed 0.00035 inch. Face width ofpaired gears must be within 0.0005 inchof each other and journal size on eachside of individual gear must be within0.0005 inch of each other. Inspectremaining components and renew asnecessary. Lightly lubricate componentswith high temperature grease to protectpump from heat damage during initialstart up.

InstaU a black pressure pre-load seal(6) in front and rear covers (4 and 11).Install a blue pressure load seal (7) ontop of black pressure pre-load seals.InstaU ring seal (10) in front and rearcovers (4 and 11). InstaU wear plates (8)in covers with bronze side facing out.Note that diamond shaped holes in wearplates are placed over larger holes in

Fig, 214—Exptoded view ofhydrauttc pump used on

Modei TW-30,

1. Slotted nut2. Drive/driven gear3. Shaft seal4. Front cover5. Gear sete. Preloadseal(black)7. Pressure load seal (blue)8. Wear plate9. Pump body

10. Ring seal11. Rear cover

Paragraphs 238-238A

front and rear covers. Wear plates fitinside diameters of ring seals (10).InstaU drive/driven gear (2) in frontcover (4) then instaU pump body (9) overgears making sure dowels enter dowelholes in cover. InstaU five bolts andwashers then tighten to a torque of 35ft.-lbs. InstaU woodruff key and pumpdrive gear. Install retaining nut andtighten to a torque of 40-55 ft.-lbs.; in-staU new cotter key. Install pump as out-lined in paragraph 235.

238A. ALL OTHER MODELS. Referto exploded view of pump assembly inFig. 215 and proceed as follows:

Straighten tab washer (2), remove nut(1) and washer, puU gear (3) from pumpshaft and remove Woodruff key (13).Remove pto pump body (33) from pumprear cover (23) and remove bearing (29)and gears (30 and 31). Unbolt andremove rear cover (23) and remove drivecoupling (16). Unbolt and remove frontcover (8) and push the bearings (12 and17) with gears (14 and 15) from pumpbody (11) as a unit. Remove snap ring (4)and seal (5) from front cover; discard theseal, sealing rings and " 0 " rings.Remove pto pump pressure reUef valveplug (18). washer (19), spring (20) andball (21).

Separate the bearings and pumpgears, keeping the parts in relativeposition. CarefuUy clean and inspect aUparts. Minor burrs and score marks can

1213

Fig 215-Expioded view of hydrauiic pump assembiy for ail modais axcapt TW-10, TW-20 and TW-30. Pto pump gear {31) Is driven by hydraulicsystem pump gear {14) via coupling {16). Oniy ona baaring {29) is usad on pto pump saction; body (33) serves as rear bearing.

1. Nut2. Locking washer3. Drive ^ear4. Snap ring5. OUseal6. Cap screws

7. Dowel pins8. Front cover9. Outer sealing ring

10. Inner sealing ring11. Pump body12. Front bearing

13. Woodruff key14. Driven gear15. Idler gear16. Drive coupling17. Rearbearmg18. Plug

19. Washer20. Relief valve spring21. Pto relief valve ball22. "O"ring23. Rear cover24. Dowel pin

25. Dowel pin26. Cap screws27. Outer sealing ring28. Inner sealing ring29. Front pto pump

bearing

30. Pto pump idler gear31. Pto pump driven

32. « . . .^33. Pto pump body34. Cap screws

85

Paragraphs 239-241 FORD

tweeVl^allel^'nitf/l^H m f « T w^Ji? ' ! ! . ' " * / * ^ I * * » «/':« " " ' " ^ ' ^ O" '"odeis equipped with remote controi vaives, vaiva units are mounted be-tween adapter piate and manifold (T). Adapter plate {39) is serviced as compiate plate and valve assambiy only aii other parts are avaiiabteseparateiy. Flow controi valve spoot {20) is seiact fit to bore size in adapter piate. See Fig. 217 for exploded vlwVfprLurer^^^^^^

Modeis TW-10, TW-20 and TW-30,1. Manifold2. "0" rings3. Variable flow valve

arm4. Back up washer5. "Oaring6. RoUpin7. Variable flow valve

8. RoUpin9. "O"ring

10. Friction washer11. Valve lever12. Spring washer13. Gland14. Shims (as required)15. Valve arm

16. RoUpin17. Connector18. "O"ring19. Flow control valve

springFlow cpg

20. Flow control valve21. Seal ring22. Guide

23. "O'ring24. Valve rod25. Snap ring26. Spring27. Pressure regulating

valve (pto)28. Differentiallock

valve

be removed using "0" grade emerypaper and kerosene. Check gear weartrack in pump body, especially at intakeside of pump. Maximum permissiblegear track wear is 0.0025 inch. Maxi-mum runout across gear face to toothedge is 0.001 inch and width of gearsmust be within 0.002 inch of each other.Gear journals must be within 0.001 inchof each other on either side of each gear.If wear or scoring is extensive, it isusually more economical to renew thepump than attempt repairs.

Using new parts as necessary, reas-semble pump using new seal and seal-ing rings by reversing disassembly pro-cedure and observing the foUowing: In-stall new seal in front cover with lip ofseal towards inside of pump. Assemblethe pump gears and bearings with reliefgroove side of bearings towards gearsand with "V" notched side of bearings tointake side of pump. Tighten cover andpto pump body retaining cap screws to atorque of 45-50 ft.-lbs. and the gear re-taining nut to a torque of 35-40 ft.-lbs.Bend tab of retaining washer againstflats on nut. If pump intake pipe andfilter were not moved from original posi-tion, assemble pump to adapter plate us-

29. Spring30. Valve cap31. Shims32. Relief valve spring33. Spring guide34. Relief valve baU35. Valve seat36. Seal ring

37. "0" rings38. Relief valve body39. Pump adapter plate40. Retwner.41. "O"ring42. Spring43. BaU guide44. Check ball

caping new "0" rings and tightenscrews to a torque of 20-25 ft.-lbs.

239. PUMP ADAPTER PLATEOVERALL. Refer to exploded view ofthe pump adapter plate and hydraulicvalves in Fig. 216 or 217 and to ap-propriate following paragraph:

240. DIFFERENTIAL ' LOCKVALVE. To remove differential lockvalve assembly from pump adapterplate, unscrew the valve rod guide(22-Fig. 216). Remove valve rod (24)and guide, then lift out the valve spool(28), regulating valve (27) and spring(26) assembly and withdraw valvereturn spring (29). Remove snap ring(25) from upper end of valve (28) toremove spring and regulating valve.Remove rod (24) from guide and removethe seal and "0" ring (21 and 23).Carefully clean and inspect all parts in-cluding valve bore in pump adapterplate. Renew any worn or damagedparts and reassemble as follows:

Install new seal (21) in guide and placenew "0" ring on guide. Lubricate guideand rod (24) and insert rod throughguide. Install regulating valve (27),

small end first, on valve spool (28), theninstall spring (26) and snap ring (25). In-sert spring (29) in valve bore, then in-stall valve assembly and the actuatingrod and guide assembly. Tighten guidesecurely.

241. PRESSURE RELIEF VALVETW-10, TW-20 And TW-30. To removehydraulic system reUef valve on TW-10,TW-20 and TW-30 models, first removedifferential lock valve as outlined inparagraph 240. The relief valve can thenbe unscrewed and removed from pumpadapter plate.

To disassemble relief valve, refer toFig. 217 and remove snap ring (1) andcap (2); take care not to lose any shims

1

2 4 6 8Fig. 217—Expioded view of hydrauiic pressurereiief vatve used on TW-10, TW-20 and TW-30

modeis.1. Snap ring2. Valve cap3. Shim4. Valve spring5. BaU retainer

6. BaU7. "O"ring8. "0" ring9. Relief valve body

86

SHOP MANUAL Paragraphs 242-247

(S) or valve baU (6). CarefuUy clean and YeUow 0.9377-0.9380inspect aU parts. If valve body (9) is Green 0.9380-0.9383damaged beyond further use, a newrelief valve assembly wiU have to be Lubricate valve spool and insert ininstalled. Compare reliefvalve spring (4) bore with hollow end first (tapped endwith new spring. If any parts are out), then install spring and connectorreplaced, system relief pressure should fitting with new "0" ring (18). Tightenbe checked and adjusted as outlined in connector fitting securely.Darafifraph 229.

Assemble valve using new "0" rings (7 244. VARIABLE FLOW VALVE. Toand 8) and same shims (3) as removed remove variable flow valve (7—Fig.unless necessary to adjust relief pres- 216), proceed as foUows: Drive the roUsure. Lubricate "0" rings then reinstaU pins (6 and 8) from each end of valve andvalve in pump adapter plate. Tighten remove the arms (3 and 15). Removevalve securely. shims (14) if so equipped. Unscrew gland

(13) and remove friction washer (10),242. All Other Models, To remove the lever (11) and spring washer (12);

hydraulic system pressure relief valve discard "0" ring (9). Push valve outassembly first remove the differential towards outside of adapter plate andlock valve as outlined in paragraph 240. remove the two "0" rings (5) andThe relief valve can then be unscrewed back-up rings (4) from valve. Clean andand removed from pump adapter plate. inspect all parts and renew any

To disassemble relief valve, unscrew excessively worn or damaged parts,cap (30—Fig. 216) from valve body (38); Reassemble using new "0" rings andtake care not to lose any shims (31) or back-up rings as foUows:the valve ball (34). CarefuUy clean and InstaU a new "0" ring (5) on each endinspect aU parts. Ifthe cap or valve body of valve, then install back-up ring atare damaged beyond further use, a new outside of each "0" ring. Lubricate valverelief valve assembly must be instaUed; and bore and instaU valve with flowaU other parts are serviced separately, control notch up and long end of valveCompare relief valve spring with new towards inside of adapter plate. Placespring. If any parts are renewed, system the spring washer (12), lever (11) andreUef pressure should be checked and friction washer (10) on gland and instaUadjusted as outlined in paragraph 229. new "0" ring (9) on gland shoulder.

Assemble valve using new seal ring Install the gland over valve shaft and(36) and same shims (31) as removed into adapter plate; tighten gland secure-unless necessary to adjust relief pres- ly. ReinstaU shims (14), if so equipped,sure. With valve assembled, instaU new unless arm (15), gland (13) and/or valve"0" rings (37) on valve body, lubricate (7) have been renewed. If a new arm,the '*0" rings and reinstaU valve in pump gland and/or valve have been instaUed,adapter plate. Tighten valve securely. install arm (15) without shims and check

end play of valve. If end play is more243. FLOW CONTROL VALVE. The than 0.012 inch, remove arm and instaU

flow control valve (20—Fig. 216) can be shims as necessary. Shims are avaUableremoved from bore in pump adapter inthicknessesof 0.012 and 0.024 inch. Beplate after removing connector fitting sure valve does not bind after reinstaU-(17) and spring (19). If valve is stuck in ing arm.bore, it may be removed by threading apuller screw into internal threads in LIFT COVER, CYLINDERouter end of valve spool. AND CONTROL VALVE

The flow control valve is a selective fitin bore in pump adapter plate and should 245. R&R LIFT COVER, CYLINDERhave a clearance of 0.0005-0.0011 inch in ^j^j) vALVE ASSEMBLY. Because ofbore. The valves and pump adapter plate construction differences, refer to theare color coded for size identification; appropriate following paragraphs forrefer to the foUowing chart: removal notes. Paragraphs 246 and

VALVE BORE IDENTIFICATION foUowing describe procedure for 8000,Color Code Valve Bore I.D. [in. 1 8600, 9000 and 9600 models; para-Blue/white 0.9376-0.9379 graphs following 247 describe removalWhite 0.9379-0.9382 for 8700, 9700, TW-10, TW-20 andBlue 0.9382-0.9385 TW-30 models.Yellow 0.9385-0.9388Green 0.9388-0.9391 246. Proceed as follows to remove the

lift cover (with cylinder and valveVALVE SPOOL IDENTIFICATION attached) from 8000,8600, 9000 and 9600

Color Code Valve Spool O.D. [in.] models: Remove battery cover andBlue/white 0.9368-0.9371 disconnect battery ground cable. UnboltWhite 0.9371 MIFi^ii ahcemove seat assembly from opera-Blue 0.937^s 1-0.9377 tor platform. Unbolt and remove both

fenders. Loosen set screws in consolecontrol lever handle and remove thehandles. Unbolt console and lift off fromover the control levers. Shut off fuelsupply valve, disconnect fuel line atvalve and disconnect fuel gage senderwire at tank. Drain fuel tank to lightenas necessary, then unbolt and lift tankfrom mounting plate. Unbolt and removefuel tank mounting plate and cover platefrom top of lift cover. Unbolt remotecontrol hose bracket from rear end of liftcover and allow remote hoses to hangover right axle housing. Disconnectcontrol linkage from remote controlvalves, lift cover and flow control valve.Remove the hydrauUc system pressuretube and the pilot pressure tubeconnecting lift cover to hydrauUc pumpadapter plate. Disconnect pto controlcable at lower end and unbolt controlcable bracket. Unbolt control leversupport and lift off the support andcontrol levers with linkage and pto cableattached. Disconnect rear (traUer) lightsocket and disconnect lift rods fromcross-shaft lift arms. Bolt lifting fixtureor plate to the lift cover, then unbolt liftcover from rear axle center housing.Using a hoist, raise the lift cover,cylinder and valve assembly from rearaxle center housing. Set assembly onwork bench with front end down andsupport unit to keep it from tippingwhile performing service work on thecylinder, control valve and/or linkage.

To reinstall lift cover assembly, placenew gasket on the lift cover, then withhoist attached so that lift cover is level,lower the unit onto rear axle centerhousing so that roUer on draft controllinkage enters draft control lever yokeand dowels in lift cover enter matingholes in rear axle center housing.ReinstaU remote control hose bracket,control lever support with levers andlinkage and the pto cable bracket. InstaUremaining lift cover retaining cap screwsand tighten all cap screws to a torque of95-130 ft.-lbs. If lift cylinder wasremoved from cover, tighten the four liftcylinder attaching cap screws to a torqueof 200-240 ft.-lbs. at this time. Completebalance of reassembly by reversingremoval procedure and observing thefollowing: Tighten pUot pressure tubenuts to a torque of 20-25 ft.-lbs. Tightenthe hollow bolt retaining system pres-sure line to lift cover to a torque of 20-25ft.-lbs. and the nut at pump adapterplate end of pressure line to a torque of50-55 ft.-lbs.

247. To remove the lift cover from8700, 9700, TW-10, TW-20 and TW-30models, first remove the cab or platformas follows: Remove screws retaininggearshift boot, raise boot, loosen gear-shift lever clamps and detach gear-

87

Paragraph 250

shift levers. On models equipped withDual Power, control pedal assembly andlinkage should be removed to preventdamage. Disconnect and cap brake Unes.Disconnect engine clutch linkage. Dis-connect wires, hoses, tubing or linkagewhich wiU interfere with cab or platformremoval. On cab equipped models,remove scuff plates in door openings,remove access plates and unscrew frontcab mounting bolts being careful not tolose shims. Remove bolts securing frontof platform on models so equipped.Unscrew bolts securing rear of cab orplatform to rear axle housing and using asuitable hoist lift cab or platform awayfrom tractor.

Disconnect tubes from remote valvesand remove quick coupler bracket andtubes from lift cover. Remove ptocontrol rod, lever and bracket assemblyfrom lift cover on TW-10, TW-20 andTW-30 models. Detach lift rods from Uftarms. Disconnect pressure Une (15—Fig.212), pilot pressure line (17) andoverride Unk (18). Bolt lifting fixture orplate to the Uft cover, then unbolt lift

cover, cylinder and valve assembly fromrear axle center housing. Set assemblyon work bench with front end down andsupport unit to prevent tipping whUeperforming? service work.

To reinstaU lift cover assembly, placea new gasket on lift cover then with hoistattached so that lift cover is level, lowerthe unit onto rear axle center housing sothat roUer on draft control Unkageenters draft control lever yoke anddowels in lift cover enter mating holes inrear axle center housing. Tighten liftcover retaining bolts to a torque of95-130 ft.-lbs. on 8700-9700 models andto 140-170 ft.-lbs. on TW-10, TW-20 andTW-30 models. Complete remainder ofreassembly by reversing disassemblyprocedure. If lift cylinder was removedfrom cover, tighten lift cylinder attach-ing cap screws to a torque of 200-240ft.-lbs. on 8700-9700 models and to250-310 ft.-lbs. on TW-10, TW-20 andTW-30 models. Tighten pUot pressuretube nuts to a torque of 20-25 ft.-lbs.Tighten hoUow bolt retaining systempressure line to lift cover to a torque of

8 ? 10 1,1 12

Fig. 219—Expioded view showing hydrauiic iift cyiinder and controt vatve assemblies. Cylin-der and controi vaive are removed as a unit, then controt vatve body can be unbotted fromcyiinder. When in fuily raised position, piston (2) skirt contacts pivot arm {4) moving controivaive (44) to neutral position. Safety vaive {items 8 through 16) timits pressure in iift cyiinder

to 2650-2750 psi, thus preventing damage due to shock ioads.

P. Pressure port1. Lift cylinder2. Piston3. Piston rine4. Shut off pivot arm5. Washer6. RoUpin7. "0" rings8. *'O*'ring9. Safety valve body

10. Seal ring11. Valve seat12. Valve baU

13. Spring guide14. Safety valve spring15. Shims16. Valve cap17. Plug18. "0" ring19. Drop poppet spring20. Spnng & ball seat21. Drop poppet ball22. Drop poppet valve23. Actuator rod24. Control valve body27. Check valve ball

28. Check valve spring29. Spring type guide30. "O"ring31. Plug32. "0" rings33. Passage plugs34. Exhaust control

valve35. Exhaust valve

spring36. Exhaust pressure

valve37. Exhaust pressure

spnng38. "O"rmg39. Plug40. Control valve

keeper41. Back up ring42. "0" rings43. Control valve

bushing44. Control valve spool45. Control valve spring46. Spring seat47. Snap ring

FORD

20-25 ft.-lbs. and the nut at pumpadapter plate end of pressure Une to atorque of 50-55 ft.-lbs. Tighten platformretaining bolts to a torque of 100-120ft.-lbs. or cab retaining bolts to a torqueof 200-240 ft.-lbs.

250. OVERHAUL CONTROLVALVE. With the lift cover removed asoutlined in paragraph 246 or 247, removethe control valve assembly as foUows:Remove the pilot pressure tube connect-ing sleeve (18—Fig. 221) and pressuresleeve (10). Remove the four cap screws(33) retaining lift cylinder to cover andremove the cyUnder and control valve asan assembly. Unbolt control valve blockfrom the Uft cyUnder. To disassemblecontrol valve unit, refer to explodedview in Fig. 219 and proceed as foUows:

Unscrew plug (17) and remove pop-pet spring (19), ball seat (20), baU (21),drop valve poppet (22) and poppetactuator (23). Unscrew plug (31) andremove spring type valve baU guide (29),check valve spring (28) and check valvebaU (27). Unscrew control valve bushing(43) and remove bushing along withcontrol valve (44), valve keeper (40),spring (45) and spring seat (46).Withdraw valve and keeper from bush-ing. Remove snap ring (47), spring seatand spring from bushing. Unscrew plug(39) and remove exhaust valve pres-sure spring (37), exhaust pressure valve(36), exhaust valve control spring (35)and exhaust control valve (34). CarefuUyclean and inspect aU parts and renew anythat are scored, excessively worn ordamaged. If valve body (24) is worn ordamaged beyond further use, a completenew valve assembly must be instaUed;all other parts are avaUable separately.If necessary to renew control valve,insert a 1/8-inch diameter rod throughhole in valve (44) and unscrew keeper(40). If keeper threads into new valvefreely, either renew keeper or treatthreads with Grade A "Loctite" onreassembly.

46 43

Fig, 220—Checking adjustment of valvekeeper {40), Position controt vaive spooi {44)so that a 1/8-inch diameter pin or drill bit (P)can be inserted through spooi and bushing{43), then measure gap between keeper andactuator rod {23) for drop poppet. Controi

vaive spring seat is {46),

88

SHOP MANUAL Paragraphs 251-255

Reassemble valve unit by reversingdisassembly procedure and using aU new"0" rings. Tightening torques are asfollows: (AU values are in ft.-lbs.)

Control valve bushing 120-150Drop poppet plug 80-100Exhaust valve plug 60-70Check baU plug 80-100

After reassembly, adjust control valvekeeper as follows: Insert a 1/8-inchdiameter pin or drUl bit through hole incontrol valve bushing and valve asshown in Fig. 220. Then measure gapbetween keeper (40) and drop poppetactuator (23) with feeler gage. Turnkeeper into or out of control valve toobtain a gap of 0.012-0.016 inch betweenkeeper and actuator. When proper gap isobtained, remove pin or drUl bit.

Assemble valve block to cylinderusing new "0" rings and tighten capscrews to a torque of 20-25 ft.-lbs.

251. OVERHAUL SAFETY VALVE.With lift cylinder removed as outlined inparagraph 246 or 247, unscrew thesafety valve body (9—Fig. 219) fromcylinder and remove valve assemblyfrom lift cylinder. With appropriateadapters, connect valve assembly topressure test pump. Valve should popopen at 2650-2750 psi, and should notleak at below pop-off pressure. If valveleaks or pop-off pressure is not correct,disassemble valve by unscrewing cap(16) from body. Inspect valve ball andseat and compare free length of springwith that of new spring. Assemble valveusing new seal (10) and other parts asnecessary and recheck for leakage andpop-off pressure. Vary shims (15) asrequired to obtain 2650-2750 psi pop-offpressure. Shims are avaUable in thick-nesses of 0.010-0.014 and 0.022-0.026inch. ReinstaU valve assembly using new"0" ring and tighten securely.

252. LIFT CYLINDER AND PIS-TON. With lift cyUnder removed asoutUned in paragraph 246 or 247, removethe control valve assembly (see para-graph 250) and the control valve armpivot roU pin (6—Fig. 219), arm (4) andwasher (5). Using low air pressureapplied at fluid passage (P) in cylinder,force piston from cylinder.

CAUTION: A sudden blast of airpressure will eject the piston at adangerous speed.

Remove piston ring (3) and inspectpiston and cylinder bore for scoring.Renew cylinder and/or piston if notsuitable for further service. InstaU newpiston ring, lubricate piston, seal and

cyUnder with hydraulic fluid and instaUpiston, closed end first, into cylinder.

253. LIFT COVER, LIFT SHAFTAND RELATED LINKAGE. With liftcover removed as outlined in paragraph246 or 247 and with cylinder and controlvalve removed from cover, refer toexploded views in Figs. 221 and 222,then proceed as foUows:

254. CONTROL LINKAGE. Removesnap ring (31—Fig. 221) from eccentricpin (29), snap ring (4) from control levershaft (5) and clevis pin (68-Fig. 222)from selector shaft (24), then remove thespring loaded actuator rod with controllever (65), position control arm (30) anddraft/position control guide (51) assem-bly from lift cover. If necessary to disas-semble spring loaded actuator rod,loosen locknut (N) and unscrew hex rod(58) from yoke (57). Remove internalsnap ring (59) from sleeve (63) andwithdraw hex rod with spring (61) andbushings (60). Remove snap ring (62)from rod and remove the spring andbushings. To disassemble draft/positionguide assembly, refer to Fig. 223 anddrive out retaining pins (49) to removedraft roUer (53) and pin (54) and theposition control lever pin (52). Removepins (50) to remove detent spring

I

mounting pins (45), spring (46) andspacer (47). Drive out pin (55) andremove yoke pin (56) and yoke (57) fromguide (51).

To remove control lever shaft (5—Fig.221), remove nut (14), lever (13),Woodruff key (12) and friction disc (11),then withdraw shaft from inside of coverand remove the two Oat washers (6) andspring (7) from shaft.

To remove selector lever shaft (24),remove snap ring (17), lever (16) andWoodruff key (25), then withdraw shaftfrom inside cover.

The position control eccentric pin (29)can be removed after removing nut (2iyand lockwasher (28) from outer end ofpin and driving the retaining pin (32)from cover.

Reassemble linkage and reinstaU incover by reversing disassembly pro-cedure and using Figs. 221, 222 and 223as a guide. Length (L—Fig. 224) of thespring loaded actuator rod must beadjusted to 13-49/64 to 13-51/64 inchesfrom center to center of pin holes asshown in Fig. 224. To adjust length,loosen locknut (N) and turn hex rod (58)in or out of yoke (57), then tightenlocknut.

255. LIFT SHAFT, LIFT CYLIN-DER ARM AND BEARINGS. With

7 6

3! 30 29 28 27 26 21R 24 2 3 - ^ 25

Fig. 221—Exptoded view of hydrautic tift cover. Pressure sieeve {10) and piiot sieeve {18)thread into controi vatve body {24—Fig. 219). Controi iever friction disc {11) keeps tever indesired position; spring (7) is adjusted by tightening nut {14). Cap screws (33) retain Uft

cyiinder to cover.

1. Pipe plugs2. Filler plug3. Breather4. Snap ring5. Control lever shaft6. Washers7. Friction-disc spring8. *O"ring9. "O"ring

10. Pressure sleeve11. Friction disc12. Woodruffkey13. Control lever14. Friction adjusting

nut15. Override lever pin16. Selector lever17. Snap ring

18. Pilot sleeve19. "O"ring20. "O"ring21. Lift shm bushings

(L, left; R, right)22. Lift shaft seal (right)23. "O"ring24. Selector shaft & arm25. Woodruffkey

26. Dowel pins27. Locknut28. Lockwasher29. Position control

eccentric30. Position control arm31. Snap ring32. Retaining pin33. Cap screws

89

Paragraphs 256-258

control linkage removed as outUned inparagraph 254, remove cap screws(40-Fig. 222) from each end of lift shaft(36) and remove the lift arms (39). Insidediameter of left bushing (21L—Fig. 221)is larger than inside diameter of rightbushing; therefore, shaft must beremoved out left side of cover. Dis-engage snap rings (37—Fig. 222) at eachside of lift cylinder arm (38) and bumpshaft to left side of cover untU the liftcylinder arm and snap rings can beremoved from shaft, then withdrawshaft from cover.

The bushings (21L and 21R—Fig.221) and shaft seals (22) can be re-moved from cover after removing liftshaft. Install new bushings with suitabledriver, then instaU new seals with lips ofseals inward.

NOTE: it is not necessary to removelift shaft to renew seals; remove seals bydrilling small hole in seal case, thread ametai screw welded to adapter in hoieand puii seai with slide hammer.

When reinstaUing Uft shaft, note thatindex marks on shaft must be alignedwith index mark on lift cylinder arm andindex mark on each lift arm. Lift armsare interchangeable from right to left.Tighten cap screw (40—Fig. 222) in eachend of lift shaft to a torque of 65-85ft.-lbs.

256. LIFT COVER. To renew liftcover, remove the Unkage and lift shaftfrom old cover as outlined in paragraph

254 and 255, then instaU the linkage andlift shaft in new cover. New cover isfitted with Uft shaft bushings, right sealand dowel pins (26—Fig. 221).

LOWER LINK HANGERSTORSION BAR AND

DRAFT CONTROL LINKAGE

257. TORSION BAR. To remove tor-sion bar (12—Fig. 225), proceed as fol-lows: Remove cap screw (15) and lock-washer from right end of torsion bar.Unbolt left lower link pin and remove pinand lift link. Unbolt and remove torsionbar anchor (11), then withdraw bar fromlift Unk hanger (3). If bar is broken or

Fig, 223—Expioded view of draft/positioncontroi guide and detent mechanism. Headof pin (56) detents in notches formed inspring {46). Spring is mounted in spiit pins(45) which are retained in guide {51) by rolipins (50). Roiier (53) engages yoke on draft

controt iever {18—Fig. 226),45. Split pins46. Detent spring 52. Position control pin47. Spring spacer 53. RoUer48. Roller for pin {56) 54. Draft control pin49. RoU pins 55. RoUpin50. RoU pins 56. Yoke pin51. Guide 57. Actuator rod yoke

FORD

seized, remove snap ring (14) and flatwasher (13) from right end of Uft hanger(3), then use suitable drift to drive barout to left side.

InstaU torsion bar by reversing re-moval procedure. Tighten anchor re-taining cap screws to a torque of 50-60ft.-lbs. and cap screw (15) in right end ofbar to a torque of 20-25 ft.-lbs.

258. LOWER LINK HANGERS. Toremove right lower Unk hanger (9—Fig.225), remove right link pin and Unk fromhanger, then remove retaining snap ring(10) and remove right hanger from rightend of left hanger (3).

To remove left lower Unk hanger, firstremove lift cover as outUned in para-graph 246 or 247 and remove torsion baras in paragraph 257, then proceed asfoUows: Remove snap ring (10) and puUright hanger off right end of left hanger.Loosen locknut (N) and remove setscrew (S) from draft control arm (7). PuUleft lower link hanger out far enough toremove draft control arm and Woodruffkey (4), then remove hanger from rear

57

Fig. 224—Length (L) of assembied actuatorrod must be adjusted to 13-49/64 to 13-51/64inches. To adjust, loosen tocknut (N) andturn hex rod {58) in yoke (57). Hot iow actu-

ator sieeve is (63).

-1

Fig. 222—Expioded view showing tift shaft and controt tinkage as removed from lift cover.Refer aiso to Fig, 223 for expioded view of seiector detent mechanism and to Fig. 224 foradjustment of controi vaive actuator Unk. Bumper ring {44) on piston rod {43) prevents rod from

striking cylinder if iift arms are raised with piston in forward {lowered) position.N. Locknut

Fig. 225—Expioded view showing torsionbar, tower ttnk hangers and draft controttinkage. Refer to Fig. 226 for adjustment ofdraft controi iink {16 and 17), and to Fig. 208

for adjustment of hanger stop (2).

22. Lift shaft seals (L.left; R, right)

24. Selector shaft arm30. Position control arm34. Position control link35. Spring pin36. Lift shaft37. Snap rings

38. Lift cylinder arm39. Lift arms40. Cap screws41. Retaining washers42. Round head groove

pins43. Lift piston rod44. Bumper ring

45. Detent spring pins46. Detent spring51. Guide56. Pin57. Yoke58. Hex rod59. Internal snap ring60. Bushings

61. Spring62. External snap ring63. Actuator sleeve64. Pin65. Control valve lever66. Snap rings67. Selector arm link68. Clevis pin

1. Cap screw2. Hanger stop eccentric3. Left lower link hanger4. Woodruffkey5. Washers6. "0" rings7. Draft control arm8. Spacer9. Right lower link hanger

10. Snap ring

11. Torsion bar anchor12. Torsion bar13. Flat washer14. Snap ring15. Cap screw16. Link end17. DraftcontrolUnk18. Draft control lever19. Eccentric pin20. Locknut

90

SHOP MANUAL Paragraphs 259-261

axle center housing. Reverse removalprocedure to install hanger.

259. DRAFT CONTROL LINKAGE.To service draft control linkage shown inFig. 225, lift cover and cylinderassembly must first be removed asoutlined in paragraph 246 or 247. Theeccentric pin (19), lever assembly (18)and link (16 and 17) can then beremoved. To remove draft control arm(7), follow procedure outUned in para-graph 258 for removal of left lower Unkhanger (3).

When draft control Unkage is reas-sembled and prior to reinstaUing liftcover, the link (16 and 17) must beadjusted for proper length as foUows:Turn eccentric pin (19) so that eccen-tric is in "up" position. Measure dis-tance (D—Fig. 226) betwven center ofdowel pin hole (H) in rear axle centerhousing to center of yoke in lever (18). Ifdistance (D) does not measure 5-5/8inches, back out eccentric pin untU levercan be removed from pin and turn linkrod (17) into link end (16) if measure-ment is less than 5-5/8 inches, or out oflink end if measurement exceeds 5-5/8inches.

REMOTE CONTROL VALVES

Remote control valves for operation ofremote cylinders may be installedbetween manifold (1—Fig. 227) and topface of hydraulic system pump adapterplate. The valve spools have detents forlift, lowering and float positions. Whenin either lift or lowering detent position,a pop-off valve releases the spool detentbefore pressure in remote cylinderreaches hydraulic system relief pres-sure. The valve must be moved manuallyfrom float detent position. Flow of early

remote valves was determined bysystem volume. Later model valves havea flow control valve knob which may beused to vary the volume of flow to aremote cylinder.

260. CHECK AND ADJUST RE-MOTE CONTROL VALVE DETENTPRESSURE. Early type without flowcontrol valve. With pressure gageinstalled at quick coupler remote cyUn-

Fig. 226—With eccentric pin {19) in "up"position, adjust Unk {17) by turning link intoor out of link end {16) so that distance (0)between center of dowel hole (H) in rear axiecenter housing to center of draft controiiever yoke ts 5-5/8 inches. Controt arm is {7).

Fig. 227—Remote controi valves (2) aremountad between manifold (1) and pumpadapter plate top surface. Lever position isadjusted by shortening or lengthening Unks(9 and 10) to atign tevers with detent posi-tions of vatve. Earty vatve without adjustabie

ftow controt is shown,

8. Connecting links9. Lower control rod

10. Upper control rod11. Spacer (single valve)12. Lever bracket13. Control levers14. Lever knobs15. Set screws

1. Manifold2. Remote control

valves3. "0" rings4. Remote hose fittings5. Remote hose6. "0" rings7. Bellcrank brackets

der connection, start engine and adjustengine speed to 700 rpm, then pressur-ize remote Une in which gage is instaUedby moving control lever to raising orlowering position. Lever should returnto neutral position as gage pressurereaches 2000-2300 psi. Check remainingvalve (if equipped with two valves) bymoving gage to proper hose quickcoupler connection.

If control lever wUl not return toneutral within specified pressure read-ing, adjust detent pop-off pressure asfollows: Using a short screwdriver, pryrubber plugs (1—Fig. 228) from valveend caps (3) and turn screws (12) in toincrease, or out to decrease pressure.

261. CHECK AND ADJUST RE-MOTE CONTROL VALVE DETENTPRESSURE. Late type with flowcontrol valve. With pressure gage in-stalled at quick coupler remote cylinderconnection, start engine and adjustengine speed to 1000 rpm on 8700 and9700, 1500 rpm on TW-10, TW-20 andTW-30, or 700 rpm on aU other models.Pressurize remote Une in which gage isinstalled by moving control lever toraising or lowering position. Levershould return to neutral position as gagepressure reaches 2000-2300 psi on 8000,9000, 8600 and 9600 models and1900-2200 psi on aU other models. Ifequipped with more than one remotevalve, move gage to proper hose quickcoupler connection and repeat test.

If control lever will not return toneutral within specified pressure read-ing, adjust detent pop-off pressure asfoUows: Remove end cap (27—Fig. 229).Unscrew detent guide (20) from valvespool (31) and remove detent assembly(15 through 26) as a unit. Using an Allenwrench, adjust screw (28) in to increasepop-off pressure. Reassemble detentunit into valve and retest.

Fig, 228—Expioded viewof remote controi vatvewithout adjustabte ftowcontrot vatve. Detent pop-off adjusting screw {12)threads into end of vaivaspoot (23). Whan vaiva (14)pops-off, prassura liftsdetent piunger {18) allow-ing vaiva to return to

neutral position.

1. Rubber plug2. Cap screw locks3. End cap4. Spool stop5. Snap ring6. Stop collar7. Centering spring8. Stop collar

9. Teflon back up ring10. Quad seal ring11. "O"ring12. Adjusting screw13. Spring14. Poppet valve15. Plug

16. "O"ring17. Detent spring18. Detent plunger19. "O"ring20. Back up ring21. Detent ball22. Detent housing

23. Valve spool24. "0" rings25. Check valve poppet26. Spring27. "O"ring28. Plug29. Valve body30. Quad se^ ring

91

Paragraphs 262-265 FORD

262. ADJUST REMOTE CONTROLVALVE LEVER LINKAGE. The links(9 and 10—Fig. 227) may be shortened orlengthened as necessary to align leverwith markings on console when remotecontrol valve is in raise, lower or floatdetent position. Disconnect lower rod(9) from beUcrank on remote valvebracket (7) and turn rod into or out ofupper rod (10) as necessary for properlever alignment.

263. R&R REMOTE CONTROLVALVES. To remove the remote con-trol valve, first remove access panelfrom right fender, then proceed asfoUows: Disconnect the remote hoses(5—Fig. 227) from valve fittings (4) andremove the fittings if desired. Plug aUopenings and disconnect control leverrods (9) from bellcranks on brackets (7).Back out the cap screws retainingmanifold (1) and valves (2) to pumpadapter plate and slide the valves andmanifold unit outward. Separate themanifold and remote valves and coveropenings in pump adapter plate.

ReinstaU valves by reversing removalprocedure and using all new "0" rings.Tighten the cap screws retaining mani-fold and valves to pump adapter plate toa torque of 20-25 ft.-lbs. Tighten thefitting jam nuts to a torque of 45-55ft.-lbs.

264. OVERHAUL REMOTE VALVEUNIT. Remove Unkage bracket (7—Fig.227) then refer to Fig. 228 or Fig. 229 forguide to disassembly. Count turnsrequired to remove adjusting screw(12-Fig. 228 or 28-Fig. 229), so settingmay be duplicated during assembly.

CAB

265. REMOVE AND REINSTALL.To remove and reinstaU cab on aUmodels so equipped, remove hood, griUpanels, griU, precleaner, muffler and

Fig. 229—Explodad viaw oflata ramota control valvawith adjustabia flow con-troi vaiva. Datant pop-offadjusting scraw {28)threads into vaiva spool(31). Components {2A, 34and 35) are used on 8700,9700, TW-10, TW-20 and

TW-30 modais.

1. Knob2. &2A. Flow control

cap3. Seal4. Adjuster valve5. "O'^ring6. Backupwa8her7. Spring8. Washer

9.10.U,12.13.14.15.16.17.

Belief poppetFlow valve pistonFlow valve sleeveFlow valve guideValve bodyQuad seal ringPlateSleeveCentering spring

hood. On TW-30 models also removecowl panel next to cab, air intake andturbo griU. Disconnect foUowing compo-nents on aU models: negative batterycable, a-c receiver/dehydrator, if soequipped, pto cable at axle housing,hydraulic lift control rod, system selec-tor rod, remote control rods, flowcontrol rod and remote cylinder flowcontrol cables. Unhook differential lockUnk pedal Unkage. Unplug main electri-cal harness and windshield washerharness. Note that washer wire is greywith yeUow stripe on tractors with Cprefixed serial numbers whUe tractorswith A or B numbers have a green wirewith black stripe.

Disconnect brake lines at mastercylinder, throttle cable, tachometercable and fuel shut off cable at fuelinjection pump. Let cables hang fromfront of cab. Close heater valves andremove hoses. Mark and remove powersteering hoses, brake lines and clutchlinkage. Remove roof retaining bolts and

18. Stop19. Detent ring20. Detent guide21. Detent seal22. Piston end23. Detent ball (7)24. Detent piston25. Spacer26. Snap ring

27. End cap28. Detent adjusting

screw29. Valve seat30. Adjusting valve seat31. Valve spool32. Valve plate33. Retainer34. Adjuster35. Poppet

attach Ford spreader bar tool No. 2420or simUar lifting device to cab. Removegear shift levers. Dual Power foot pedaland control rod. Remove scuff platesthen lift floor mat and remove mountingbolt access plates and front mountingbolts.

NOTE: Front mounts may have shimsbetween cab rails and insulaton>. Identifyshims for proper reinstaiiation.

Remove any remaining componentsthat wUl interfere with cab removal thenremove rear mount bolts and raise cabusing suitable hoist making sure cabdoesn't bind.

To instaU cab reverse removal pro-cedure. Torque front mounting bolts to180-220 ft.-lbs. then tighten rear bolts toa torque of 200-240 ft.-lbs.

NOTE: Shims are placed on top offront mount insulators. Reconnect andadjust linkages and hoses as necessary.Purge air from power steering system.

92

General Torque RecommendationsUse the following torque recommendations as a guideline

when a specification for a particular fastener is not available.In many cases manufacturers do not provide torque specifica-tions, especially on older models.

Consider fastener condition carefully when referring to ei-ther a recommendation or a specification. If fastener reuse isappropriate, select the minimum value to account for fastenerstretch. Softer fasteners or those securing softer materials,such as aluminum or cast iron, typically require less torque. Inaddition, lubricated or unusually long fasteners typically re-quire less torque.

Determine fastener strength by referring to the grade markon the bolt head. The higher the grade is, the stronger the fas-tener.

D

AL = Length T = Thread pitch D = Diameter

Determine fastener size by measuring the thread diameter(D), fastener length (L) and thread pitch (T).

Size andPitch

SAE grade 1or 2 boits

SAE grade5 bolts

SAE grade8 bolts

1/4—201/4—28

5/16—185/16—243/8—163/8—247/16—147/16—-201/2—131/2—20

9/16—129/16—185/8—115/8—183/4—103/4—167/8—9

7/&-141—81—14

1 1/8—7

4-65-76-129-1312-2017-2522-3227-3634-4741-5953-6960-7974-9682-110105-155130-180165-206185-230225-310252-345330-480

6-107-118-1915-2119-3326-3731-5440-6056-7864-8769-11478-127112-154127-175165-257196-317290-382342-451441-587508-675609-794

9-1410-1615-2919-3328-4736-5351-7858-8480-11989-129102-169115-185156-230178-287263-380309-448426-600492-665650-879742-1032860-1430

93